Kerio Tech Winroute Firewall 6 Users Manual Kwfag En

6 to the manual cb30c0da-eb71-48ed-a0f0-e17b7b47dea9

2015-02-09

: Kerio-Tech Kerio-Tech-Kerio-Winroute-Firewall-6-Users-Manual-568118 kerio-tech-kerio-winroute-firewall-6-users-manual-568118 kerio-tech pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 368 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Kerio WinRoute Firewall 6
Administrator’s Guide
Kerio Technologies s.r.o.
Kerio Technologies s.r.o. All rights reserved.
This guide provides detailed description on configuration and administration of Kerio
WinRoute Firewall, version 6.7.1. All additional modifications and updates reserved. User
interfaces Kerio StaR and Kerio Clientless SSL-VPN are focused in a standalone document,
Kerio WinRoute Firewall — User’s Guide. The Kerio VPN Client application is described in
a stand-alone document Kerio VPN Client — User’s Guide.
For current version of the product, go to http://www.kerio.com/firewall/download. For
other documents addressing the product, see http://www.kerio.com/firewall/manual.
Information regarding registered trademarks and trademarks are provided in appendix A.
Products Kerio WinRoute Firewall and Kerio VPN Client include open source software. To
view the list of open source items included, refer to attachment B.
3
Contents
1 Quick Checklist ................................................................ 7
2 Introduction ................................................................... 9
2.1 What’s new in 6.7.1 ....................................................... 9
2.2 Conflicting software ..................................................... 10
2.3 System requirements .................................................... 11
2.4 Installation - Windows ................................................... 12
2.5 Initial configuration wizard (Windows) .................................... 17
2.6 Upgrade and Uninstallation - Windows .................................... 19
2.7 Installation - Software Appliance and VMware Virtual Appliance ........... 20
2.8 Upgrade - Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance ................ 23
2.9 WinRoute Components ................................................... 23
2.10 WinRoute Engine Monitor (Windows) ..................................... 24
2.11 The firewall’s console (Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance) . . . . 25
3 WinRoute Administration ..................................................... 27
3.1 Administration Console - the main window ............................... 28
3.2 Administration Console - view preferences ................................ 31
4 Product Registration and Licensing ............................................ 32
4.1 License types and number of users ....................................... 32
4.2 License information ...................................................... 33
4.3 Registration of the product in the Administration Console ................ 35
4.4 Product registration at the website ....................................... 43
4.5 Subscription / Update Expiration ......................................... 43
4.6 User counter ............................................................ 45
5 Network interfaces ............................................................ 47
6 Internet Connection ........................................................... 53
6.1 Persistent connection with a single link ................................... 54
6.2 Connection with a single leased link - dial on demand ..................... 57
6.3 Connection Failover ...................................................... 62
6.4 Network Load Balancing ................................................. 66
7 Traffic Policy .................................................................. 71
7.1 Network Rules Wizard ................................................... 71
7.2 How traffic rules work ................................................... 78
7.3 Definition of Custom Traffic Rules ........................................ 78
7.4 Basic Traffic Rule Types .................................................. 90
4
7.5 Policy routing ........................................................... 95
7.6 User accounts and groups in traffic rules ................................. 98
7.7 Partial Retirement of Protocol Inspector .................................. 99
7.8 Use of Full cone NAT .................................................. 101
7.9 Media hairpinning ..................................................... 102
8 Configuration of network services ........................................... 104
8.1 DNS module ........................................................... 104
8.2 DHCP server ........................................................... 110
8.3 Dynamic DNS for public IP address of the firewall ....................... 119
8.4 Proxy server ........................................................... 121
8.5 HTTP cache ............................................................ 124
9 Bandwidth Limiter ........................................................... 130
9.1 How the bandwidth limiter works and how to use it ..................... 130
9.2 Bandwidth Limiter configuration ....................................... 130
9.3 Detection of connections with large data volume transferred ............ 135
10 User Authentication .......................................................... 137
10.1 Firewall User Authentication ........................................... 137
11 Web Interface ................................................................ 141
11.1 Web interface preferences .............................................. 141
11.2 User authentication at the web interface ................................ 146
12 HTTP and FTP filtering ....................................................... 147
12.1 Conditions for HTTP and FTP filtering .................................. 147
12.2 URL Rules ............................................................. 148
12.3 Content Rating System (Kerio Web Filter) ............................... 154
12.4 Web content filtering by word occurrence ............................... 158
12.5 FTP Policy ............................................................. 162
13 Antivirus control ............................................................ 167
13.1 Conditions and limitations of antivirus scan ............................ 167
13.2 How to choose and setup antiviruses ................................... 168
13.3 HTTP and FTP scanning ................................................ 172
13.4 Email scanning ........................................................ 176
13.5 Scanning of files transferred via Clientless SSL-VPN (Windows) ........... 178
14 Definitions ................................................................... 180
14.1 IP Address Groups ..................................................... 180
14.2 Time Ranges .......................................................... 181
14.3 Services ............................................................... 183
14.4 URL Groups ........................................................... 187
5
15 User Accounts and Groups ................................................... 190
15.1 Viewing and definitions of user accounts ............................... 191
15.2 Local user accounts .................................................... 193
15.3 Local user database: external authentication and import of accounts . . . . . 203
15.4 User accounts in Active Directory — domain mapping ................... 204
15.5 User groups ........................................................... 210
16 Administrative settings ...................................................... 214
16.1 System configuration (Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance) . . 214
16.2 Setting Remote Administration ......................................... 215
16.3 Update Checking ...................................................... 216
17 Advanced security features .................................................. 218
17.1 P2P Eliminator ......................................................... 218
17.2 Special Security Settings ............................................... 221
18 Other settings ................................................................ 224
18.1 Routing table .......................................................... 224
18.2 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ......................................... 227
18.3 Relay SMTP server ..................................................... 229
19 Status Information ........................................................... 231
19.1 Active hosts and connected users ...................................... 231
19.2 Network connections overview ......................................... 238
19.3 List of connected VPN clients ........................................... 242
19.4 Alerts ................................................................. 243
20 Basic statistics ............................................................... 248
20.1 Volume of transferred data and quota usage ............................ 248
20.2 Interface statistics ..................................................... 250
21 Kerio StaR - statistics and reporting .......................................... 254
21.1 Monitoring and storage of statistic data ................................ 254
21.2 Settings for statistics and quota ........................................ 256
21.3 Connection to StaR and viewing statistics ............................... 259
22 Logs ......................................................................... 262
22.1 Log settings ........................................................... 262
22.2 Logs Context Menu .................................................... 265
22.3 Alert Log .............................................................. 269
22.4 Config Log ............................................................. 269
22.5 Connection Log ........................................................ 270
22.6 Debug Log ............................................................. 271
22.7 Dial Log ............................................................... 273
22.8 Error Log .............................................................. 275
6
22.9 Filter Log .............................................................. 276
22.10 Http log ............................................................... 277
22.11 Security Log ........................................................... 278
22.12 Sslvpn Log ............................................................ 280
22.13 Warning Log ........................................................... 280
22.14 Web Log ............................................................... 281
23 Kerio VPN .................................................................... 283
23.1 VPN Server Configuration .............................................. 284
23.2 Configuration of VPN clients ........................................... 289
23.3 Interconnection of two private networks via the Internet (VPN tunnel) . . . 291
23.4 Exchange of routing information ....................................... 296
23.5 Example of Kerio VPN configuration: company with a filial office ......... 297
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration .................... 310
24 Kerio Clientless SSL-VPN (Windows) .......................................... 335
24.1 Configuration of WinRoute’s SSL-VPN ................................... 335
24.2 Usage of the SSL-VPN interface ......................................... 337
25 Specific settings and troubleshooting ......................................... 338
25.1 Configuration Backup and Transfer ..................................... 338
25.2 Configuration files ..................................................... 339
25.3 Automatic user authentication using NTLM ............................. 340
25.4 FTP on WinRoute’s proxy server ........................................ 343
25.5 Internet links dialed on demand ........................................ 346
26 Technical support ............................................................ 351
26.1 Essential Information .................................................. 351
26.2 Tested in Beta version ................................................. 352
A Legal Notices ................................................................. 353
B Used open source items ...................................................... 354
Glossary of terms ............................................................ 357
Index ........................................................................ 364
7
Chapter 1
Quick Checklist
In this chapter you can find a brief guide for a quick setup of Kerio WinRoute Firewall (referred
to as “WinRoute” within this document). After this setup the firewall should be immediately
available and able to share your Internet connection and protect your local network. For
a detailed guide refer to the separate WinRoute — Step-by-Step Configuration guide.
If you are not sure how to set any of the Kerio WinRoute Firewall functions or features, look up
the appropriate chapter in this manual. For information about your Internet connection (such
as your IP address, default gateway, DNS server, etc.) contact your ISP.
Note: In this guide, the expression firewall represents the host where WinRoute is (or will be)
installed.
1. The firewall must include at least two interfaces — one must be connected to the local
network (e.g. Ethernet or WiFi network adapter), another must be connected to the Internet
(e.g. Ethernet or WiFi network adapter, USB ADSL modem, analog modem or an ISDN
adapter).
On Windows, test functionality of the Internet connection and of traffic among hosts within
the local network before you run the WinRoute installation. This test will reduce possible
problems with debugging and error detections.
2. Run WinRoute installation and in the wizard provide required basic parameters (for details,
see chapter 2.4 or 2.7).
3. Set interface groups and basic traffic rules using the Network Rules Wizard (see chap-
ter 7.1).
4. Run the DHCP server and set required IP ranges including their parameters (subnet mask,
default gateway, DNS server address/domain name). For details, see chapter 8.2.
5. Check DNS module settings. Define the local DNS domain if you intend to scan the hosts
file and/or the DHCP server table. For details, see chapter 8.1.
6. Set user mapping from the Active Directory domain or create/import local user accounts
and groups. Set user access rights. For details see chapter 15.
7. Define IP groups (chapter 14.1), time ranges (chapter 14.2) and URL groups (chapter 14.4),
that will be used during rules definition (refer to chapter 14.2).
8. Create URL rules (chapter 12.2) and set the Kerio Web Filter module (chapter 12.3). Set
HTTP cache and automatic configuration of browsers (chapter 8.5). Define FTP rules (chap-
ter 12.5).
Chapter 1 Quick Checklist
8
9. Select an antivirus and define types of objects that will be scanned.
If you choose the integrated McAfee antivirus application, check automatic update settings
and edit them if necessary.
External antivirus must be installed before it is set in WinRoute, otherwise it is not available
in the combo box.
10. Using one of the following methods set TCP/IP parameters for the network adapter of
individual LAN clients:
•Automatic configuration — activate the Obtain an IP address automatically option.
Do not set any other parameters.
•Manual configuration — define IP address, subnet mask, default gateway address,
DNS server address and local domain name.
Use one of the following methods to set the Web browser at each workstation:
•Automatic configuration — activate the Automatically detect settings option (Inter-
net Explorer) or specify URL for automatic configuration (other types of browsers).
For details, refer to chapter 8.5.
•Manual configuration — select type of connection via the local network or define
IP address and appropriate proxy server port (see chapter 8.4).
9
Chapter 2
Introduction
2.1 What’s new in 6.7.1
In version 6.7.1, WinRoute brings the following new features:
Kerio WinRoute Firewall Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance
Kerio WinRoute Firewall is now available as a so called software appliance (Software Ap-
pliance / VMware Virtual Appliance). This appliance is distributed as a full installation
package with the firewall and operating system and can be installed on a physical or
virtual computer without an operating system. Software Appliance cannot be installed
on a computer with another operating system. Installation package of the standalone
product for installation on Linux is not available.
Kerio WinRoute Firewall in the Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance edition
provides the same features as the Windows version, only with the Kerio Clientless SSL-
VPN interface missing.
Web administration interface (Web Administration)
The new Web Administration interface allows both remote and local administration of
the firewall without the need to install the Kerio Administration Console. This interface
allows configuration of crucial WinRoute parameters — the interface, traffic policy, HTTP
and FTP filtering rules, user accounts and groups, etc. However, the Kerio Administration
Console is still available and allow setting of all configuration options.
The Web Administration interface is available at https://server:4081/admin (server
stands for the firewall name or IP address and 4081 for the default port of its web inter-
face).
Refer to chapter 3for more information.
Exporting and Importing Configuration
WinRoute now includes also a special backup-and-recovery tool which allows to back up
and recover full configuration including local user accounts and SSL certificates. These
functions allow easy and quick recovery of the firewall for cases of hardware failure,
transfer to another computer and cloning of an identical configuration for multiple fire-
walls. To export or import configuration, go to the Web Administration interface.
More details can be found in chapter 25.1.
Kerio Web Filter, the new web page rating module
Kerio Web Filter is a special module, used for rating of web pages in accordance to their
content categories. In WinRoute, it replaces the ISS OrangeWeb Filter module. The way of
how filtering rules are created is the same as before.
More details can be found in chapter 12.3.
Chapter 2 Introduction
10
Support for Windows 7
Kerio WinRoute Firewall now includes full support for the new operating system Microsoft
Windows 7.
2.2 Conflicting software
WinRoute can be run with most of common applications. However, there are certain applica-
tions that should not be run at the same host as WinRoute for this could result in collisions.
The computer where WinRoute is installed (the host) can be also used as a workstation. How-
ever, it is not recommended — user interaction may affect performance of the operating sys-
tem which affects WinRoute performance badly.
Collision of low-level drivers
WinRoute collides with system services and applications the low-level drivers of whose
use a similar or an identical technology. The security log contains the following types of
services and applications:
•The Internet Connection Firewall / Internet Connection Sharing system service.
WinRoute can detect and automatically disable this service.
•The system service Routing and Remote Access Service (RRAS) in Windows Server
operating systems. This service allows also sharing of Internet connection (NAT).
WinRoute can detect if NAT is active in the RRAS service; if it is, a warning is dis-
played. In reaction to the alert message, the server administrator should disable
NAT in the RRAS configuration.
If NAT is not active, collisions should be avoided and WinRoute can be used hand
in hand with the RRAS service.
•Network firewalls — e.g. Microsoft ISA Server.
•Personal firewalls, such as Sunbelt Personal Firewall,Zone Alarm,Norton Personal
Firewall, etc.
•Software designed to create virtual private networks (VPN) — i.e. software appli-
cations developed by the following companies: CheckPoint,Cisco Systems,Nortel,
etc. There are many applications of this type and their features vary from vendor
to vendor.
Under proper circumstances, use of the VPN solution included in WinRoute is
recommended (for details see chapter 23). Otherwise, we recommend you to test
a particular VPN server or VPN client with WinRoute trial version or to contact
our technical support (see chapter 26).
Note: VPN implementation included in Windows operating system (based on the
PPTP protocol) is supported by WinRoute.
Port collision
Applications that use the same ports as the firewall cannot be run at the WinRoute host
(or the configuration of the ports must be modified).
If all services are running, WinRoute uses the following ports:
2.3 System requirements
11
•53/UDP —DNS module,
•67/UDP —DHCP server,
•1900/UDP — the SSDP Discovery service,
•2869/TCP — the UPnP Host service.
The SSDP Discovery and UPnP Host services are included in the UPnP support
(refer to chapter 18.2).
•44333/TCP+UDP — traffic between Kerio Administration Console and WinRoute
Firewall Engine. This service cannot be stopped.
The following services use corresponding ports by default. Ports for these services can
be changed.
•443/TCP — server of the SSL-VPN interface (only in WinRoute on Windows — see
chapter 24),
•3128/TCP — HTTP proxy server (see chapter 8.4),
•4080/TCP — web interface of the firewall (refer to chapter 11),
•4081/TCP — secured (SSL-encrypted) version of the firewall’s web interface (see
chapter 11) ,
•4090/TCP+UDP — proprietary VPN server (for details refer to chapter 23).
Antivirus applications
Most of the modern desktop antivirus programs (antivirus applications designed to pro-
tect desktop workstations) scans also network traffic — typically HTTP,FTP and email
protocols. WinRoute also provides with this feature which may cause collisions. Therefore
it is recommended to install a server version of your antivirus program on the WinRoute
host. The server version of the antivirus can also be used to scan WinRoute’s network
traffic or as an additional check to the integrated antivirus McAfee (for details, see chap-
ter 13).
If the antivirus program includes so called realtime file protection (automatic scan of
all read and written files), it is necessary to exclude directories cache (HTTP cache in
WinRoute see chapter 8.5) and tmp (used for antivirus check). If WinRoute uses an
antivirus to check objects downloaded via HTTP or FTP protocols (see chapter 13.3), the
cache directory can be excluded with no risk — files in this directory have already been
checked by the antivirus.
The McAfee integrated antivirus plug-in does not interact with antivirus application in-
stalled on the WinRoute host (provided that all the conditions described above are met).
2.3 System requirements
Requirements on minimal hardware parameters of the host where WinRoute will be installed:
•CPU 1 GHz,
•1 GB RAM,
•Two network interfaces (including dial-ups).
For Windows:
Chapter 2 Introduction
12
•50 MB free disk space for installation of Kerio WinRoute Firewall.
•Disk space for statistics (see chapter 21) and logs (in accordance with traffic flow and
logging level — see chapter 22).
•to keep the installed product (especially its configuration files) as secure as possible,
it is recommended to use the NTFS file system.
For Kerio WinRoute Firewall Software Appliance:
•Minimum 3 GB hard disk.
•No operating system is required to be installed on the computer. Any existing operat-
ing system will be removed from the computer.
For Kerio WinRoute Firewall VMware Virtual Appliance:
•VMware Player,VMware Workstation or VMware Server.
•3 GB free disk space.
The following browsers can be used to access the WinRoute (Kerio StaR — see chapter 21 and
Kerio SSL-VPN — see chapter 24) web services:
•Internet Explorer 7 or higher,
•Firefox 2 or higher,
•Safari 3 or higher.
2.4 Installation - Windows
Installation packages
Kerio WinRoute Firewall is distributed in two editions: one is for 32-bit sys-
tems and the other for 64-bit systems (see the product’s download page:
http://www.kerio.com/firewall/download).
The 32-bit edition (the “win32” installation package) supports the following operating systems:
•Windows 2000,
•Windows XP (32 bit),
•Windows Server 2003 (32 bit),
•Windows Vista (32 bit),
•Windows Server 2008 (32 bit).
The 64-bit edition (the “win64” installation package) supports the following operating systems:
•Windows XP (64 bit),
•Windows Server 2003 (64 bit),
•Windows Vista (64 bit),
•Windows Server 2008 (64 bit).
Older versions of Windows operating systems are not supported.
2.4 Installation - Windows
13
Note:
1. WinRoute installation packages include the Kerio Administration Console. The separate
Kerio Administration Console installation package (file kerio-kwf-admin*.exe) is de-
signed for full remote administration from another host. This package is identical both for
32-bit and 64-bit Windows systems. For details on WinRoute administration, see chapter 3.
2. For correct functionality of the Kerio StaR interface (see chapter 21), it is necessary that
the WinRoute host’s operating system supports all languages that would be used in the
Kerio StaR interface. Some languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may require installation of
supportive files. For details, refer to documents regarding the corresponding operating
system.
Steps to be taken before the installation
Install WinRoute on a computer which is used as a gateway connecting the local network and
the Internet. This computer must include at least one interface connected to the local network
(Ethernet, WiFi, etc.) and at least one interface connected to the Internet. You can use either
a network adapter (Ethernet, WiFi, etc.) or a modem (analog, ISDN, etc.) as an Internet interface.
We recommend you to check through the following items before you run WinRoute installation:
•Time of the operating system should be set correctly (for timely operating system and
antivirus upgrades, etc.),
•The latest service packs and any security updates should be applied,
•TCP/IP parameters should be set for all available network adapters,
•All network connections (both to the local network and to the Internet) should function
properly. You can use for example the ping command to detect time that is needed
for connections.
These checks and pre-installation tests may protect you from later problems and complica-
tions.
Note: Basic installation of all supported operating systems include all components required
for smooth functionality of WinRoute.
Installation and Basic Configuration Guide
Once the installation program is launched (i.e. by kerio-kwf-6.6.0-5700-win32.exe), it is
possible to select a language for the installation wizard. Language selection affects only the
installation, language of the user interface can then be set separately for individual WinRoute
components.
In the installation wizard, you can choose either Full or Custom installation. Custom mode will
let you select optional components of the program:
Chapter 2 Introduction
14
Figure 2.1 Installation — customization by selecting optional components
•Kerio WinRoute Firewall Engine — core of the application.
•VPN Support — proprietary VPN solution developed by Kerio Technologies (Kerio VPN).
•Administration Console — the Kerio Administration Console application (universal con-
sole for all server applications of Kerio Technologies) including WinRoute administra-
tion tools.
•Help files — this manual in the HTML Help format. For help
files details, see Kerio Administration Console — Help (available at
http://www.kerio.com/firewall/manual).
Go to chapter 2.9 for a detailed description of all WinRoute components. For detailed descrip-
tion on the proprietary VPN solution, refer to chapter 23.
Having completed this step, you can start the installation process. All files will be copied to
the hard disk and all the necessary system settings will be performed. The initial Wizard will
be run automatically after your first login (see chapter 2.5).
Under usual circumstances, a reboot of the computer is not required after the installation (a
restart may be required if the installation program rewrites shared files which are currently in
use). This will install the WinRoute low-level driver into the system kernel. WinRoute Engine
will be automatically launched when the installation is complete. The engine runs as a service.
Note:
1. If you selected the Custom installation mode, the behavior of the installation program will
be as follows:
2.4 Installation - Windows
15
•all checked components will be installed or updated,
•all checked components will not be installed or will be removed
During an update, all components that are intended to remain must be ticked.
2. The installation program does not allow to install the Administration Console separately.
Installation of the Administration Console for the full remote administration requires
a separate installation package (file kerio-kwf-admin*.exe).
Protection of the installed product
To provide the firewall with the highest security possible, it is necessary to ensure that unde-
sirable (unauthorized) persons has no access to the critical files of the application, especially
to configuration files. If the NTFS system is used, WinRoute refreshes settings related to access
rights to the directory (including all subdirectories) where the firewall is installed upon each
startup. Only members of the Administrators group and local system account (SYSTEM) are
assigned the full access (read/write rights), other users are not allowed access the directory.
Warning
If the FAT32 file system is used, it is not possible to protect WinRoute in the way suggested
above. For this reason, it is recommended to install WinRoute only on computers which use
the NTFS file system.
Conflicting Applications and System Services
The WinRoute installation program detects applications and system services that might con-
flict with the WinRoute Firewall Engine.
1. Windows Firewall’s system components1and Internet Connection Sharing.
These components provide the same low-level functions as WinRoute. If they are run-
ning concurrently with WinRoute, the network communication would not be functioning
correctly and WinRoute might be unstable. Both components are run by the Windows
Firewall / Internet Connection Sharing system service.2.
Warning
To provide proper functionality of WinRoute, it is necessary that the Internet Connection
Firewall / Internet Connection Sharing detection is stopped and forbidden!
In Windows XP Service Pack 1 and older versions, the integrated firewall is called Internet Connection Firewall.
1
In the older Windows versions listed above, the service is called Internet Connection Firewall / Internet Connection
2
Sharing.
Chapter 2 Introduction
16
2. Universal Plug and Play Device Host and SSDP Discovery Service
The services support UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) in the Windows XP,Windows
Server 2003,Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 operating systems. However, these
services collide with the UPnP support in WinRoute (refer to chapter 18.2).
The WinRoute installation includes a dialog where it is possible to disable colliding system
services.
Figure 2.2 Disabling colliding system services during installation
By default, the WinRoute installation disables all the colliding services listed. Under usual
circumstances, it is not necessary to change these settings. Generally, the following rules are
applied:
•The Windows Firewall / Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) service should be disabled.
Otherwise, WinRoute will not work correctly. The option is a certain kind of warning
which informs users that the service is running and that it should be disabled.
•To enable support for the UPnP protocol in WinRoute (see chapter 18.2), it is neces-
sary to disable also services Universal Plug and Play Device Host and SSDP Discovery
Service.
•If you do not plan to use support for UPnP in WinRoute, it is not necessary to disable
the Universal Plug and Play Device Host and SSDP Discovery Serviceservices.
Note:
1. Upon each startup, WinRoute detects automatically whether the Windows Firewall / Inter-
net Connection Sharing is running. If it is, WinRoute stops it and makes a record in the
2.5 Initial configuration wizard (Windows)
17
warning log. This helps assure that the service will be enabled/started immediately after
the WinRoute installation.
2. On Windows XP Service Pack 2,Windows Server 2003,Windows Vista and Windows
Server 2008,WinRoute registers in the Security Center automatically. This implies that
the Security Center always indicates firewall status correctly and it does not display warn-
ings informing that the system is not protected.
2.5 Initial configuration wizard (Windows)
Using this wizard you can define all basic WinRoute parameters. It is started automatically by
the installation program for Windows.
Setting of administration username and password
Definition of the administration password is essential for the security of the firewall. Do not
use the standard (blank) password, otherwise unauthorized users may be able to access the
WinRoute configuration.
Figure 2.3 Initial configuration — Setting of administration username and password
Chapter 2 Introduction
18
Password and its confirmation must be entered in the dialog for account settings. Name Admin
can be changed in the Username edit box.
Note: If the installation is running as an upgrade, this step is skipped since the administrator
account already exists.
Remote Access
Immediately after the first WinRoute Firewall Engine startup all network traffic will be blocked
(desirable traffic must be permitted by traffic rules — see chapter 7). If WinRoute is installed
remotely (i.e. using terminal access), communication with the remote client will be also inter-
rupted immediately (WinRoute must be configured locally).
Within Step 2 of the configuration wizard specify the IP address of the host from which the
firewall will be controlled remotely to enable remote installation and administration. Thus
WinRoute will enable all traffic between the firewall and the remote host.
Note: Skip this step if you install WinRoute locally. Allowing full access from a point might
endanger security.
Figure 2.4 Initial configuration — Allowing remote administration
2.6 Upgrade and Uninstallation - Windows
19
Enable remote access
This option enables full access to the WinRoute computer from a selected IP address
Remote IP address
IP address of the computer from where you will be connecting (e.g. terminal services
client). This field must contain an IP address. A domain name is not allowed.
Warning
The remote access rule is disabled automatically when WinRoute is configured using the net-
work policy wizard (see chapter 7.1).
2.6 Upgrade and Uninstallation - Windows
Upgrade
Simply run the installation of a new version to upgrade WinRoute (i.e. to get a new release
from the Kerio Web pages — http://www.kerio.com/).
All windows of the Kerio Administration Console must be closed before the (un)installation is
started. All of the three WinRoute components will be stopped and closed automatically.
The installation program detects the directory with the former version and updates it by re-
placing appropriate files with the new ones automatically. License, all logs and user defined
settings are kept safely.
Note: This procedure applies to upgrades between versions of the same series (e.g. from
6.6.0 to 6.6.1) or from a version of the previous series to a version of the subsequent series
(e.g. from 6.5.2 to 6.6.0). For case of upgrades from an older series version (e.g. 6.3.1), full
compatibility of the configuration cannot be guaranteed and it is recommended to upgrade
“step by step” (e.g. 6.3.1 →6.4.0 →6.5.0 →6.6.0) or to uninstall the old version along with all
files and then install the new version “from scratch”.
Update Checker
WinRoute enables automatic checks for new versions of the product at the Kerio Technologies
website. Whenever a new version is detected, its download and installation will be offered
automatically.
For details, refer to chapter 16.3.
Uninstallation
To uninstall WinRoute, stop all three WinRoute components. The Add/Remove Programs
option in the Control Panel launches the uninstallation process. All files under the WinRoute
directory can be optionally deleted.
(the typical path is C:\Program Files\Kerio\WinRoute Firewall)
— configuration files, SSL certificates, license key, logs, etc.
Chapter 2 Introduction
20
Figure 2.5 Uninstallation — asking user whether files created in WinRoute should be deleted
Keeping these files may be helpful for copying of the configuration to another host or if it is
not sure whether the SSL certificates were issued by a trustworthy certification authority.
During uninstallation, the WinRoute installation program automatically refreshes the original
status of the Windows Firewall / Internet Connection Sharing,Universal Plug and Play Device
Host) and SSDP Discovery Service system services.
2.7 Installation - Software Appliance and VMware Virtual Appliance
WinRoute in the software appliance edition is distributed:
•as an ISO of the installation CD which is used to install the system and then install the
firewall either on a physical or virtual computer (Software Appliance),
•as a virtual appliance for VMware (VMware Virtual Appliance).
Standalone WinRoute installation package for installation on previously installed Linux is not
available.
Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance installation process consists of the following
simple steps:
2.7 Installation - Software Appliance and VMware Virtual Appliance
21
Start of the installation
Software Appliance
ISO image of the installation CD can be burned on a physical CD and then the CD can
be used for installation of the system on the target computer (either physical or virtual).
In case of virtual computers, the ISO image can be also connected as a virtual CD ROM,
without the need to burn the installation ISO file on a CD.
Note: Kerio WinRoute Firewall Software Appliance cannot be installed on a computer with
another operating system. Existing operating system on the target disk will be removed
within the installation.
VMware Virtual Appliance
Unzip the distribution package (Zip) and open the .vmx file in your VMware application
(VMware Player,VMware Workstation,VMware Server). This runs the Kerio WinRoute
Firewall installer.
The following steps are identical both for Software Appliance and Virtual Appliance.
Language selection
The selected language will be used both for WinRoute installation and for the firewall’s console
(see chapter 2.11).
Selection of target hard disk
If the installation program detects more hard disks in the computer, then it is necessary to
select a disk for WinRoute installation. Content of the selected disk will be completely removed
beforeWinRoute installation, while other disk are not affected by the installation.
If there is an only hard disk detected on the computer, the installer continues with the follow-
ing step automatically. If no hard disk is found, the installation is closed. Such error is often
caused by an unsupported hard disk type or hardware defect.
Selection of network interface for the local network and access to administration
The installer lists all detected network interfaces of the firewall. Select an interface which is
connected to the local (trustworthy) network which the firewall will be remotely administered
from.
In the field, a computer may have multiple interfaces of the same type and it is therefore not
easy to recognize which interface is connected to the local network and which to the Internet.
To a certain extent, hardware addresses of the adapters can be a clue or you can experiment
— select an interface, complete the installation and try to connect to the administration. If the
connection fails, use option Network Configuration in the main menu of the firewall’s console
to change the settings (see chapter 2.11).
There can also arise another issue — that the program does not detect some or any network
adapters. In such case, it is recommended to use another type of the physical or virtual (if the
Chapter 2 Introduction
22
virtual computer allows this) adapter or install WinRoute Software Appliance on another type
of virtual machine. If such issue arises, it is highly recommended to consult the problem with
the Kerio Technologies technical support (see chapter 26).
provided that no network adapter can be detected, it is not possible to continue installing
WinRoute.
Setting of the local interface’s IP address
It is now necessary to define IP address and subnet mask for the selected local network inter-
face. These parameters can be defined automatically by using information from a DHCP server
or manually.
For the following reasons, it is recommended to set local interface parameters manually:
•Automatically assigned IP address can change which may cause problems with con-
nection to the firewall administration (although the IP address can be reserved on the
DHCP server, this may bring other problems).
•In most cases WinRoute will be probably used itself as a DHCP server for local hosts
(workstations).
Admin password
The installation requires specification of the password for the account Admin (the account of
the main administrator of the firewall). Username Admin with this password are then used for
access:
•to the firewall’s console (see chapter 2.11),
•to the remote administration of the firewall via the web administration interface (see
chapter 3),
•to the remote administration of the firewall via the Kerio Administration Console (see
chapter 3).
Remember this password or save it in a secured location and keep it from anyone else!
Time zone, date and time settings
Many WinRoute features (user authentication, logs, statistics, etc.) require correct setting of
date, time and time zone on the firewall. Select your time zone and in the next page check
(and change, if necessary) date and time settings.
Completing the installation
Once all these parameters are set, the WinRoute Firewall Engine service (daemon) is started.
While the firewall is running, the firewall’s console will display information about remote ad-
ministration options and change of some basic configuration parameters — see chapter 2.11.
2.8 Upgrade - Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance
23
2.8 Upgrade - Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance
WinRoute can be upgraded by the following two methods:
•by starting the system from the installation CD (or a mounted ISO) of the new version.
The installation process is identical with the process of a new installation with an the
only exception that at the start the installer asks you whether to execute an upgrade
(any existing data will be kept) or a new installation (all configuration files, statistics,
logs, etc will be removed). For details, see chapter 2.7.
•by the Kerio Administration Console update checker. For details, refer to chapter 16.3
2.9 WinRoute Components
WinRoute consists of the following modules:
WinRoute Firewall Engine
WinRoute Firewall Engine is the core of the program that provides all services and func-
tions. It is running as a service in the operating system (the service is called Kerio
WinRoute Firewall and it is run automatically within the system account by default).
WinRoute Engine Monitor (Windows only)
Allows viewing and modification of the Engine’s status (stopped / running) and setting
of start-up preferences (i.e. whether Engine and Monitor should be run automatically at
system start-up). It also provides easy access to the Administration Console. For details,
refer to chapter 2.10.
Note: WinRoute Firewall Engine is independent on the WinRoute Engine Monitor. The
Engine can be running even if there is no icon in the system tray.
Kerio Administration Console (Windows only)
It is a versatile console for full local or remote administration of Kerio Technologies server
products. For successful connection to an application you need a plug-in with an appro-
priate interface.
Kerio Administration Console is installed on Windows hand-in-hand with the appropriate
module during the installation of Kerio WinRoute. The separate installation package Kerio
Administration Console for WinRoute is available for remote administration from another
host. The Kerio Administration Console is available for Windows only, but it can be used
for administration of both WinRoute installed on Windows and Kerio WinRoute Firewall
Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance.
Detailed guidance for Kerio Administration Console is provided in Kerio Administration
Console — Help (http://www.kerio.com/firewall/manual).
The firewall’s console (Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance only)
The firewall’s console is a simple interface permanently running on the WinRoute host. It
allows to set basic parameters of the operating system and the firewall for cases when it
is not possible to administer it remotely via the Web Administration interface or the Kerio
Administration Console.
Chapter 2 Introduction
24
2.10 WinRoute Engine Monitor (Windows)
WinRoute Engine Monitor is a standalone utility used to control and monitor the WinRoute
Firewall Engine status. The icon of this component is displayed on the toolbar.
Figure 2.6 WinRoute Engine Monitor icon in the Notification Area
If WinRoute Engine is stopped, a white crossed red spot appears on the icon. Under different
circumstances, it can take up to a few seconds to start or stop the WinRoute Engine application.
For this time the icon gets grey and is inactive.
On Windows, left double-clicking on this icon runs the Kerio Administration Console (described
later). Use the right mouse button to open the following menu:
Figure 2.7 WinRoute Engine Monitor menu
Start-up Preferences
With these options WinRoute Engine and/or WinRoute Engine Monitor applications can
be set to be launched automatically when the operating system is started. Both options
are enabled by default.
Administration
Runs Kerio Administration Console (equal to double-clicking on the WinRoute Engine Mon-
itor icon).
Internet Usage Statistics
Opens Internet Usage Statistics in the default browser. For details, see chapter 21.
Start / Stop WinRoute Firewall
Switches between the Start and Stop modes. The text displays the current mode status.
Exit Engine Monitor
An option to exit WinRoute Engine Monitor. It does not affect status of the WinRoute
Engine application (this will be announced by a report).
2.11 The firewall’s console (Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance)
25
Note:
1. If a limited version of WinRoute is used (e.g. a trial version), a notification is displayed
7 days before its expiration. This information is displayed until the expiration.
2. WinRoute Engine Monitor is available in English only.
2.11 The firewall’s console (Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appli-
ance)
On the console of the computer where Kerio WinRoute Firewall Software Appliance / VMware
Virtual Appliance is running, information about the firewall remote administration options
is displayed. Upon authenticating by the administration password (see above), this console
allows to change some basic settings, restore default settings after installation and shut down
or restart the computer.
By default, the console shows only information about URL or IP address which can be used
for firewall administration via the firewall’s web administration interface or the Kerio Admin-
istration Console. To access configuration options, authentication with the Admin password is
required (Admin is the main firewall administrator’s account). If idle for some time, the user
gets logged out automatically and the welcome page of the console showing details on the
firewall’s remote administration is displayed again.
The firewall’s console provides the following configuration options:
Network Interface Configurations
This option allows to show or/and edit parameters of individual network interfaces of the
firewall. Each interface allows definition of automatic configuration via DHCP or manual
configuration of IP address, subnet mask and default gateway.
Note: No default gateway should be set on interfaces connected to the local network,
otherwise this firewall cannot be used as a gateway for the Internet access.
Remote administration policy settings
When you change the firewall’s traffic policy (see chapter 7) via the web administration
interface or the Kerio Administration Console, you may happen to block access to the
remote administration accidentally.
If you are sure that the firewall’s network interfaces are configured correctly and despite
of that it is not possible to access the remote administration, you can use the Remote
Administration option to change the traffic policy so that the rules do not block remote
administration on any interface.
Upon saving changes in traffic rules, the Kerio WinRoute Firewall Engine service will be
restarted automatically.
I the field, unblocking of the remote administration means that a rule will be added to
the top of the traffic policy table that would allow access KWF Admin (connection with
the Kerio Administration Console), KWF WebAdmin (unsecured web interface) and KWF
WebAdmin-SSL (secured web interface) services from any computer .
Chapter 2 Introduction
26
Shutting down / restarting the firewall
If you need to shut your computer down or reboot it, these options provide secure closure
of the Kerio WinRoute Firewall Engine and shutdown of the firewall’s operating system.
Restoring default configuration
This option restores the default firewall settings as installed from the installation CD
or upon the first startup of the VMware virtual host. All configuration files and data
(logs, statistics, etc.) will be removed and it will then be necessary to execute the initial
configuration of the firewall again as if a new installation (see chapter 2.7).
Restoring the default configuration can be helpful if the firewall’s configuration is acci-
dentally damaged that much that it cannot be corrected by any other means.
27
Chapter 3
WinRoute Administration
For WinRoute configuration, two tools are available:
The Web Administration interface
The Web Administration interface allows both remote and local administration of the
firewall via a common web browser. In the current version of WinRoute, the Web Admin-
istration allows configuration of all crucial WinRoute parameters:
•network interfaces,
•traffic rules,
•HTTP and FTP filtering rules,
•user accounts, groups and domains,
•IP groups, URL groups, time ranges and network services.
The Web Administration interface is available at https://server:4081/admin (server
stands for the firewall name or IP address and 4081 for the default port of its web in-
terface). HTTPS traffic between the client and the WinRoute Firewall Engine is encrypted.
This protects the communication from tapping and misuse. It is recommended to use the
unsecured version of the Web Administration (the HTTP protocol) only for local adminis-
tration of WinRoute (i.e. administration from the computer where it is installed).
Kerio Administration Console
Kerio Administration Console (referred to as the Administration Console in this document)
is an application used for administration of all Kerio Technologies’ server products. All
WinRoute parameters can be configured here.
Using this program you can access the firewall either locally (from the WinRoute host)
or remotely (from another host). Traffic between Administration Console and WinRoute
Firewall Engine is encrypted. This protects you from tapping and misuse.
Kerio Administration Console is installed on Windows hand-in-hand with it during the
installation of Kerio WinRoute.
The separate installation package Kerio Administration Console for WinRoute is available
for remote administration from another host. The Kerio Administration Console is avail-
able for Windows only, but it can be used for administration of both WinRoute installed
on Windows and Kerio WinRoute Firewall Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance.
Detailed guidelines for the Administration Console are provided under Kerio Ad-
ministration Console — Help (to view these guidelines, use option Help →Con-
tents in the main Administration Console window, or you can download it from
http://www.kerio.com/firewall/manual).
Chapter 3 WinRoute Administration
28
The following chapters of this document address individual sections of the Administration
Console, the module which allows full configuration. The Web Administration interface is
almost identical as the Administration Console and its sections.
Note:
1. The Web Administration interface and the Administration Console for WinRoute are avail-
able in 16 localization versions. The Web Administration interface allows language selec-
tion by simple switching of the flag located in the top right corner of the window or by
following the browser language preferences. The Administration Console allows language
settings in the Tools menu of the login dialog box.
2. Upon the first login to the Administration Console after a successful WinRoute installation,
the traffic rules wizard is run so that the initial WinRoute configuration can be performed.
For a detailed description on this wizard, please refer to chapter 7.17.1.
3.1 Administration Console - the main window
The WinRoute administration dialog window (“administration window”) will be opened upon
a successful login to the WinRoute Firewall Engine through the Administration Console. This
window is divided into two parts:
Figure 3.1 The main window of Administration Console for WinRoute
3.1 Administration Console - the main window
29
•The left column contains the tree view of sections. The individual sections of the
tree can be expanded and collapsed for easier navigation. Administration Console
remembers the current tree settings and uses them upon the next login.
•In the right part of the window, the contents of the section selected in the left column
is displayed (or a list of sections in the selected group).
Administration Window — Main menu
The main menu provides the following options:
File
•Reconnect — reconnection to the WinRoute Firewall Engine after a connection
drop-out (caused for example by a restart of the Engine or by a network error).
•New connection — opens the main window of the Administration Console. Use
a bookmark or the login dialog to connect to a server.
This option can be useful when the console will be used for administration of
multiple server applications (e.g. WinRoute at multiple servers). For details, refer
to the Help section in the Administration Console manual.
Note: The New Connection option opens the same dialog as running the Adminis-
tration Console from the Start menu.
•Quit — this option terminates the session (users are logged out of the server and
the administration window is closed). The same effect can be obtained by clicking
the little cross in the upper right corner of the window or pressing Alt+F4 or
Ctrl+Q.
The Edit menu (on the welcome page only)
Options under Edit are related to product registration and licensing. The options available
in the menu depend on the registration status (for example, if the product is registered
as a trial version, it is possible to use options of registration of a purchased license or
a change of registration data).
•Copy license number to clipboard — copies the license number (the ID licence
item) to the clipboard. This may be helpful e.g. when ordering an upgrade or
subscription, where the number of the base license is required, or when sending
an issue to the Kerio Technologies technical support.
•Register trial version — registration of the product’s trial version.
•Register product — registration of a product with a purchased license number.
•Install license — use this option to import your license key file (for details, see
chapter 4.4).
Help menu
•Show Server’s Identity — this option provides information about the firewall
which the Administration Console is currently connected to (name or IP address
of the server, port and SSL-certificate fingerprint). This information can be used
Chapter 3 WinRoute Administration
30
for authentication of the firewall when connecting to the administration from
another host (see Kerio Administration Console — Help).
•Administrator’s guide — this option displays the administrator’s guide in HTML
Help format. For details about help files, see Kerio Administration Console — Help
manual.
•About — this page provides information about current version of the application
(WinRoute’s administration module in this case), a link to our company’s website,
etc.
Status bar
The status bar at the bottom of the administration window displays the following information
(from left to right):
Figure 3.2 Administration Console status bar
•The section of the administration window currently selected in the left column. This
information facilitates navigation in the administration window when any part of the
section tree is not visible (e.g. when a lower screen resolution is selected).
•Name or IP address of the server and port of the server application (WinRoute uses
port 44333).
•Name of the user logged in as administrator.
•Current state of the Administration Console:Ready (waiting for user’s response), Load-
ing (retrieving data from the server) or Saving (saving changes to the server).
Detection of WinRoute Firewall Engine connection drop-out
Administration Console is able to detect the connection failure automatically. The failure is
usually detected upon an attempt to read/write the data from/to the server (i.e. when the Ap-
ply button is pressed or when a user switches to a different section of Administration Console).
In such case, a connection failure dialog box appears where the connection can be restored.
After you remove the cause of the connection failure, the connection can be restored. Admin-
istration Console provides the following options:
•Apply & Reconnect — connection to the server will be recovered and all changes done
in the current section of the Administration Console before the disconnection will be
saved,
•Reconnect — connection to the server will be recovered without saving any changes
performed in the particular section of the console before the disconnection.
If the reconnection attempt fails, only the error message is shown. You can then try to recon-
nect using the File →Restore connection option from the main menu, or close the window and
restore the connection using the standard procedure.
3.2 Administration Console - view preferences
31
Note: After a connection failure, the Web Administration interface is redirected and opened at
the login page automatically. Any unsaved changes will get lost.
3.2 Administration Console - view preferences
Many sections of the Administration Console are in table form where each line represents
one record (e.g. detailed information about user, information about interface, etc.) and the
columns consist of individual entries for these records (e.g. name of server, MAC address, IP
address, etc.).
WinRoute administrators can define — according to their liking — the way how the information
in individual sections will be displayed. When you right-click each of the above sections, a pop-
up menu with Modify columns option is displayed. This entry opens a dialog window where
users can select which columns will be displayed/hidden.
Figure 3.3 Column customization in Interfaces
This dialog offers a list of all columns available for a corresponding view. Use checking boxes
on the left to enable/disable displaying of a corresponding column. You can also click the
Show all button to display all columns. Clicking on the Default button will restore default
settings (for better reference, only columns providing the most important information are
displayed by default).
The arrow buttons move the selected column up and down within the list. This allows the
administrator to define the order the columns will be displayed.
The order of the columns can also be adjusted in the window view. Left-click on the column
name, hold down the mouse button and move the column to the desired location.
Note: The width of individual columns can be adjusted by moving the dividing line between
the column headers.
32
Chapter 4
Product Registration and Licensing
When purchased, Kerio WinRoute Firewall must be registered, Upon registration of the product,
so called license key is generated.(the license.key file — see chapter 25.1). If the key is not
imported, WinRoute will behave as a full-featured trial version and its license will be limited
by the expiration timeout.
This means that the trial version differs from the full WinRoute version only in the aspect
whether the license has been registered or not. This gives each customer an opportunity
to test and try the product in the particular environment during the 30-day period. Then,
once the product is purchased, the customer can simply register the installed version by the
purchased license number (see chapter 4.3). This means that it is not necessary to uninstall
the trial version and reinstall the product.
Once the 30-day trial period expires, WinRoute cuts the speed of all network traffic of the
computer where it is installed to 4 KB/s. Also, the routing is blocked (which implies that the
WinRoute’s host cannot be used as a gateway for the Internet). Upon registration with a valid
license number (received as a response to purchase of the product), WinRoute is available with
full functionality.
Note: If your license key gets lost for any reason (e.g. after the hard drive breakdown or
by an accidental removal, etc.), you can simply use the basic product’s purchase number to
recover the license. The same method can be used also for change of the firewall’s operating
system (Windows /Software Appliance /VMware Virtual Appliance) — the license keys cannot
be used across different operating systems. If the license number gets lost, contact the Kerio
Technologies sales department.
4.1 License types and number of users
License types (optional components)
WinRoute can optionally include the following components: McAfee antivirus (refer to chap-
ter 13) or/and the Kerio Web Filter module for web pages rating (see chapter 12.3). These
components are licensed individually.
License keys consist of the following information:
WinRoute license
Basic WinRoute license. Its validity is defined by the two following factors:
•update right expiration date — specifies the date by which WinRoute can be up-
dated for free. When this date expires, WinRoute keeps functioning, however, it
4.2 License information
33
cannot be updated. The time for updates can be extended by purchasing a sub-
scription.
•product expiration date — specifies the date by which WinRoute stops functioning
and blocks all TCP/IP traffic at the host where it is installed. If this happens, a new
valid license key must be imported or WinRoute must be uninstalled.
McAfee license
This license is defined by the two following dates:
•update right expiration date (independent of WinRoute) — when this date expires,
the antivirus keeps functioning, however, neither its virus database nor the an-
tivirus can be updated yet.
•plug-in expiration date— specifies the date by which the McAfee antivirus stops
functioning and cannot be used anymore.
Warning
Owing to persistent incidence of new virus infections we recommend you to use always
the most recent antivirus versions.
Kerio Web Filter subscriptions
Kerio Web Filter module is provided as a service. License is defined only by an expiration
date which specifies when this module will be blocked.
Note: Refer to Kerio Technologies website (http://www.kerio.com/) to get up-to-date infor-
mation about individual licenses, subscription extensions, etc.
Deciding on a number of users (licenses)
WinRoute’s license key includes information about maximal number of users allowed to use
the product. In accordance with the licensing policy, number of users is number of hosts
protected by WinRoute, i.e. sum of the following items:
•All hosts in the local network (workstations and servers),
•all possible VPN clients connecting from the Internet to the local network.
The host where WinRoute is installed in not included in the total number of users.
Warning
If the maximal number of licensed users is exceeded, WinRoute may block traffic of some
hosts!
4.2 License information
The license information can be displayed by selecting Kerio WinRoute Firewall (the first item in
the tree in the left part of the Administration Console dialog window — this section is displayed
automatically whenever the WinRoute administration is entered).
Chapter 4 Product Registration and Licensing
34
Figure 4.1 Administration Console welcome page providing license information
Product
name of the product (WinRoute)
Copyright
Copyright information.
Homepage
Link to the Kerio WinRoute Firewall homepage (information on pricing, new versions, etc.).
Click on the link to open the homepage in your default browser.
Operational system
Name of the operating system on which the WinRoute Firewall Engine service is running.
This is an informative item only — the purchased license can be used for any supported
operating system.
License ID
License number or a special license name.
Subscription expiration date
Date until when the product can be upgraded for free.
Product expiration date
Date when the product expires and stops functioning (only for trial versions or special
license types).
4.3 Registration of the product in the Administration Console
35
Number of users
Maximal number of hosts (unique IP addresses) that can be connected to the Internet via
WinRoute at the same time (for details, refer to chapter 4.6).
Company
Name of the company (or a person) to which the product is registered.
Depending on the current license, links are displayed at the bottom of the image:
1. For unregistered versions:
•Become a registered trial user — registration of the trial version. This type of
registration is tentative and it is not obligatory. The registration provides users
free technical support for the entire trial period.
•Register product with a purchased license number — registration of a purchased
product.
Once purchased, the product must be registered. Otherwise, it will keep behaving
as a trial version!
2. For registered versions:
•Update registration info — this link can be used to update information about the
person/company to which the product is registered and/or to add subscription
license numbers or add-on licenses (add users).
In any case, the registration wizard will be started where basic data are required and additional
data can also be defined. For detailed information on the wizard, refer to chapter 4.3.
If the update checker is enabled (refer to chapter 16.3), the A new version is available, click
here for details... notice is displayed whenever a new version is available. Click on the link to
open the dialog where the new version can be downloaded and the installation can be started
(for details, see chapter 16.3).
Note: Right-clicking in the main page of the Administration Console opens a context pop-up
menu with the same options as are provided in the Edit menu in the main toolbar of the
administration window (see chapter 3.1).
4.3 Registration of the product in the Administration Console
WinRoute registration, change of registration details, adding of add-on licenses and subscrip-
tion updates can be done in the Administration Console by clicking on a corresponding link on
the welcome page (see chapter 4.2) or by using a corresponding option in the Edit menu in the
main menu for the administration window (see chapter 3.1).
Chapter 4 Product Registration and Licensing
36
Registration of the trial version
By registrating the trial version, users get free email and telephonic technical support for
the entire trial period. In return, Kerio Technologies gets valuable feedback from these users.
Registration of the trial version is not obligatory. However, it is recommended since it provides
certain benefits. Such a registration does not oblige users to purchase the product.
Clicking on Become a registered trial user launches the registration wizard.
1. On the first page of the wizard, read the security code displayed in the picture and type
it to the text field (this protects the registration server from misuse). The security code is
not case-sensitive.
Figure 4.2 Trial version registration — security code
2. On the second page, enter information about the trial version user (person, company). It is
also necessary that the user accepts the Privacy Policy Terms. Otherwise, the information
cannot be stored in the Kerio Technologies database.
Use the E-mail address textfield to enter a valid email address. It is recommended to use
the address of the user who is performing the registration. At this address, confirmation
of the registration will be demanded when the registration is completed.
3. Page three includes optional information. It is not obligatory to answer these questions,
however, the answers help Kerio Technologies accommodate demands of as many cus-
tomers as possible.
4.3 Registration of the product in the Administration Console
37
Figure 4.3 Trial version registration — user information
Figure 4.4 Trial version registration — other information
4. The fourth page provides the information summary. If any information is incorrect, use
the Back button to browse to a corresponding page and correct the data.
5. The last page of the wizard provides user’s Trial ID. This is ID is a unique code used for
identification of the registered user when asking help at our technical support.
Chapter 4 Product Registration and Licensing
38
Figure 4.5 Registration of the trial version — summary
Figure 4.6 Trial version registration — Trial ID
At this point, an email message (in the language set in the Administration Console) where
confirmation of the registration is demanded is sent to the email address specified on the
page two of the wizard. Click on the link in the email message to complete the registration
and to make the Trial ID valid. The main purpose of the confirmation process is to check
that the email address is valid and that the user really wants to be registered.
4.3 Registration of the product in the Administration Console
39
Registration of the purchased product
Follow the Register product with a purchased license number link to run the registration wiz-
ard.
1. On the first page of the wizard, it is necessary to enter the license number of the basic
product delivered upon its purchase and retype the security code displayed at the picture
in the text field (this protects the server from misuse). The security code and the license
number are not case-sensitive.
Figure 4.7 Product registration — license number of the basic product and the security code
2. On the second page, it is possible to specify license numbers of add-ons (added users),
optional components and subscriptions. The page also includes any license numbers as-
sociated with the basic product that have already been registered.
Click on Add to add purchased license numbers. Each number is checked immediately.
Only valid license numbers are accepted.
The license numbers added recently can be edited or removed. Registered license numbers
(recorded in previous registrations) cannot be removed.
3. On the third page, enter information about the user (person, company). It is also necessary
that the user accepts the Privacy Policy Terms. Otherwise, the information cannot be
stored in the Kerio Technologies database.
Use the E-mail address textfield to enter a valid email address. It is recommended to use
the address of the user who is performing the registration. At this address, confirmation
of the registration will be demanded when the registration is completed.
Chapter 4 Product Registration and Licensing
40
Figure 4.8 Product registration — license numbers
of additional components, add-ons and subscription
4.3 Registration of the product in the Administration Console
41
Figure 4.9 Product registration — user information
4. Page four includes optional information. It is not obligatory to answer these questions,
however, the answers help Kerio Technologies accommodate demands of as many cus-
tomers as possible.
These questions are asked only during the primary (original) registration. If these ques-
tions have already been answered, the page is skipped and the registration process con-
sists of four steps only.
5. The last page provides the information summary. If any information is incorrect, use the
Back button to browse to a corresponding page and correct the data.
Click on Finish to use the information to generate a unique license key. The new license is
applied immediately (restart is not required).
Notes:
Chapter 4 Product Registration and Licensing
42
Figure 4.10 Product registration — other information
Figure 4.11 Product registration — summary
1. The license key is generated only for the operating system on which WinRoute was
installed during the registration (Windows /Linux). The license can be used for any
platform but the license key is always generated for the particular platform only.
2. If an error is reported upon finishing of the registration process (e.g. failure of net-
4.4 Product registration at the website
43
work connection, etc.), simply restart the wizard and repeat the registration.
4.4 Product registration at the website
If, by any reason, registration of WinRoute cannot be performed from the Administration Con-
sole, it is still possible to register the product at Kerio Technologies website. To open the
registration form, use the Support →Register License option in the main menu.
The form is similar to the registration wizard described in chapter 4.3. The corresponding
license key file is based on the registration form and it is automatically generated upon its
completion and confirmation.
In the registration, specify correctly the operating system you will use the license on (Windows
or Linux). The license can be used for any platform but the license key is always generated for
the particular platform only.
License key installation
Two methods can be used to install the license key:
•By using the Install license in the Edit menu available in the main toolbar of the admin-
istration window (see chapter 3.1). Click this link to open the standard system dialog
for opening of a file.
If the installation of the license key is completed successfully, the license is activated
immediately. Information about the new license is displayed on the Administration
Console welcome page.
This method can also be used for remote installation of the license key (the license
key file must be saved on the disk of the host from which the remote installation is
performed).
•By copying the license key file to a corresponding directory.
The license key must be saved in the license folder in the WinRoute’s installation
directory.
(the typical path is C:\Program Files\Kerio\WinRoute Firewall\license)
It is necessary that the file name (license.key) is not changed!
To activate the license, it is necessary to restart (stop and run again) the WinRoute
Firewall Engine.
Note: If possible, it is recommended to register WinRoute from the Administration Console (it
is not necessary to restart the WinRoute Firewall Engine).
4.5 Subscription / Update Expiration
WinRoute automatically alerts the administrator in case the WinRoute license’s expiration date,
the expiration of the McAfee antivirus or of Kerio Web Filter and/or expiration of the update
rights (so called subscription) for WinRoute or the McAfee antivirus is coming soon. These
alert only inform the administrator that they should prolong the subscription of WinRoute or
renew the corresponding license.
Chapter 4 Product Registration and Licensing
44
Administrators are informed in two ways:
•By a pop-up bubble tip (this function is featured by the WinRoute Engine Monitor mod-
ule),
•by an pop-up window upon a login to the Administration Console (only in case of
expiration of subscription).
Note: WinRoute administrators can also set posting of license or subscription expiration alerts
by email or SMS (see chapter 19.4).
Bubble alerts (Windows)
Seven days before the date, WinRoute Engine Monitor starts to display the information about
number of days remaining to the subscription/license expiration several times a day (in regular
intervals).
This information is displayed until WinRoute or any of its components stops functioning or
WinRoute or McAfee subscription expires. The information is also stopped being displayed
immediately after the registration of the subscription or a license of a particular component
(for details, see chapter 4.3).
Notices in the Administration Console
Starting 30 days ago a subscription expiration, a warning informing about number of the days
left to the expiration or informing that the subscription has already expired is displayed upon
each login. The warning also contains a link to the Kerio Technologies website where you can
find detailed subscription information as well as order subscription for an upcoming period.
The warning stops being displayed when a license number of a new subscription is registered
(refer to chapter 4.3).
Figure 4.12 The notice informing about upcoming subscription expiration
4.6 User counter
45
4.6 User counter
This chapter provides a detailed description on how WinRoute checks whether number of
licensed users has not been exceeded.
The WinRoute license does not limit number of user accounts. Number of user accounts does
not affect number of licensed users.
Warning
The following description is only a technical hint that may be used for troubleshooting. License
policy must be borne in mind when deciding for a license purchase — see chapter 4.1!
The license counter works as follows:
Start WinRoute
Upon WinRoute is started, the table of clients include the firewall only. Number of used li-
censes is zero.
Note: Table of clients is displayed in the Active Hosts section in the Administration Console —
see chapter 19.1.
License counter
Whenever a communication of any WinRoute’s client is detected, the IP address is used to iden-
tify whether a record does already exist in the table of clients. If not, a new record including
the IP address is added to the table and the number of licenses is raised by 1.
The following items are considered as clients:
1. All hosts from which users are connected to the firewall
2. All clients of the WinRoute’s proxy server (see chapter 8.4)
3. All local hosts communication of which is routed between Internet interfaces and
WinRoute’s local interfaces. The following items belong to this group:
•Each host which is connected to the Internet while no user is authenticated from
the host,
•All local servers mapped from the Internet,
•All VPN clients connected to the local network from the Internet.
Licenses are not limited by:
•DNS requests handled by the DNS module (Warning: If clients use a DNS server located
outside the local network, such communication is considered as communication with
the Internet),
•DHCP traffic (using either the WinRoute’s DHCP server or another DHCP server in-
stalled on the WinRoute host),
•Local communication between the firewall (e.g. access to shared disks) and hosts from
which no user is connected to the firewall.
Chapter 4 Product Registration and Licensing
46
License release
Idleness time (i.e. time for which no packet with a corresponding IP address meeting all
conditions is detected) is monitored for each record in the table of clients. If the idleness time
of a client reaches 15 minutes, the corresponding record is removed from the table and the
number of licenses is decreased by 1. Released license can be used by another host.
47
Chapter 5
Network interfaces
WinRoute is a network firewall. This implies that it represents a gateway between two or more
networks (typically between the local network and the Internet) and controls traffic passing
through network adapters (Ethernet,WiFi, dial-ups, etc.) which are connected to these net-
works.
WinRoute functions as an IP router for all WinRoute’s network interfaces installed within the
system.3The linchpin of the firewall’s configuration therefore is correct configuration of net-
work interfaces.
Network interfaces of the firewall can be displayed and configured in the Administration Con-
sole or in the Web Administration’s Configuration →Interfaces section.
Figure 5.1 Network interfaces
Groups of interfaces
To simplify the firewall’s configuration and make it as comfortable as possible, network inter-
faces are sorted in groups in WinRoute. In the firewall’s traffic rules, these groups as well as
individual interfaces can be used in Source and Target (refer to chapter 7.3). The main benefit
of groups of interfaces is that in case of change of internet connection, addition of a new line,
If you want to disable WinRoute for any of these interfaces, go to the adapter’s properties and disable Kerio WinRoute
3
Firewall (the WinRoute’s low level driver). However, for security reasons and to guarantee full control over the network
traffic, it is strongly unrecommended to disable WinRoute’s low level driver on any network adapter!
Chapter 5 Network interfaces
48
change of a network adapter etc., there is no need to edit traffic rules — simple adding of the
new interface in the correct group will do.
In WinRoute, the following groups of interfaces are defined:
•Internet interfaces — interfaces which can be used for Internet connection (network
cards, wireless adapters, dial-ups, etc.),
•Trusted / Local interfaces interfaces connected to local private networks protected
by the firewall (typically Ethernet or WiFi cards),
•VPN interfaces — virtual network interfaces used by the Kerio VPN proprietary solution
(VPN server and created VPN tunnels — for details, refer to chapter 23),
•Other interfaces — interfaces which do not belong to any of the groups listed above
(i.e. a network card for DMZ, idle dial-up, etc.).
Groups of interfaces cannot be removed and it is not possible to create new ones (it would not
be of any help).
During the initial firewall configuration by Traffic rules wizard (see chapter 7.1), interfaces
will be sorted in correct groups automatically. This classification can be later changed (with
certain limits — e.g. VPN server and VPN tunnels cannot be moved from the VPN interfaces
group).
To move an interface to another group, drag it by mouse to the desired destination group or
select the group in properties of the particular interface — see below.
Note: If the initial configuration is not performed by the wizard, all interfaces (except VPN
interfaces) are set as Other interfaces. Before you start creating traffic rules, it is recommended
to define correctly interfaces for Internet connection as well as interfaces for the local network
— this simplifies definitions of the rules significantly.
Special interfaces
Interfaces include also the following special items:
VPN server
This interface is used as a server for connection of the proprietary VPN
client (Kerio VPN Client — this solution can be downloaded for free from
http://www.kerio.com/firewall/download). VPN servers are always sorted in
the VPN interfaces group.
Double-click on this interface or click on Edit to edit settings and parameters of the VPN
server. The VPN server interface cannot be removed.
For detailed information on the proprietary solution Kerio VPN, refer to chapter 23.
Dial-In (on Windows only)
This interface represents the server of the RAS service (dial-up connection to the net-
work) on the WinRoute host. This interface can be used for definition of traffic rules (see
chapter 7) for RAS clients which are connecting to this server.
Dial-In interfaces are considered as trustworthy (clients connected via this interface use
it to access the local network). This interface cannot be either configured or removed. If
49
you do not consider RAS clients as parts of trustworthy networks for any reason, you can
move the Dial-In interface to Other interfaces.
Note:
1. If both RAS server and WinRoute are used, the RAS server must be configured to
assign clients IP addresses of a subnet which is not used by any segment of the local
network. WinRoute performs standard IP routing which might not function unless
this condition is met.
2. For assigning of IP addresses to RAS clients connecting directly to the WinRoute host,
it is not possible to use the WinRoute’s DHCP server. For details, see chapter 8.2.
Viewing and editing interfaces
In the list of interfaces, WinRoute shows parameters related to firewall’s configuration and
operations:
Name
The unique name used for interface identification within WinRoute. It should be clear for
easy reference, e.g. Internet for the interface connected to the Internet connection.
The name can be edited later (see below) with no affect on WinRoute’s functionality.
The icon to the left of the name represents the interface type (network adapter, dial-up
connection, VPN server, VPN tunnel).
Note: Unless the name is edited manually, this item displays the name of the adapter as
assigned by the operating system (see the Adapter name entry).
IP Address and Mask
IP address and the mask of this interface’s subnet.
If the more IP addresses are set for the interface, the primary IP address will be displayed.
On Windows, the address assigned to the interface as first is considered as primary.
Status
Current status of the interface (up/down).
Internet
This information indicates the method the interface uses for Internet connection (pri-
mary/secondary connection, bandwidth used).
Details
Adapter identification string returned by the device driver.
System Name
The name of the adapter (e.g. “LAN connection 2”). The name is for reference only.
Gateway
IP address of the default gateway set for the particular interface.
Chapter 5 Network interfaces
50
DNS
IP address of the primary DNS server set on the interface.
MAC
Hardware (MAC) address of a corresponding network adapter. This entry is empty for
dial-ups as its use would be meaningless there.
Use the buttons at the bottom of the interface list to remove or edit properties of the chosen
interface. If no interface is chosen or the selected interface does not support a certain function,
appropriate buttons will be inactive.
Add VPN Tunnel
Use this option to create a new server-to-server VPN tunnel. Details on the proprietary
Kerio VPN solution are provided in chapter 23.
Note: In Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance, it is also possible to add new
interfaces (dial-up, PPTP or PPPoE connections) — see section Adding new interface. If
WinRoute is installed on Windows, it is necessary to define new connections by standard
methods right in the operating system.
Modify
Click on Edit to view and/or modify parameters of the selected interface.
Figure 5.2 Editing interfaces
51
In WinRoute, it is specify to specify a special name for each interface (names taken from
the operating system can be confusing and the new name may make it clear). It is also
possible to change the group of the interface (Internet, secure local network, another
network — e.g. DMZ).
It is also possible to change the default gateway and edit parameters of DNS servers. In
the Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance edition, all parameters of the network
interface can be set in this dialog.
For dial-ups it is also possible to set login data and dialing options (see chapter 6.2).
For VPN server and VPN tunnels, a dialog for setting of the VPN server (see chapter 23.1)
or a VPN tunnel (refer to chapter 23.3) will be opened.
Remove
Removes the selected interface from WinRoute. This can be done under the following
conditions:
•the interface is an inactive (disabled) VPN tunnel,
•the network adapter is not active or it is not physically present,
•the interface is a dial-up which no longer exists in the system.
Network cards and dial-ups defined in the operating system as well as established VPN
tunnels cannot be removed in WinRoute.
Note:
1. Records related to network cards or dial-ups that do not exist any longer (those that
have been removed) do not affect WinRoute’s functionality — such interfaces are con-
sidered as inactive (as in case of a hung-up dial-up).
2. When an adapter is removed, the Nothing value is automatically used for correspond-
ing items of all traffic rules where the interface was used. These rules will be disabled.
This ensures that the traffic policy is not endangered (for details, refer to chapter 7.3).
Dial or Hang Up / Enable, Disable
Function of these buttons depend on the interface selected:
•For dial-up, PPTP and PPPoE connections, the Dial and Hang-up buttons are avail-
able and they are used to handle the line by hand.
Note: Users with appropriate rights can also control dial-ups in the user web
interface (see chapter 15.2 and the Kerio WinRoute Firewall — User’s Guide).
•For VPN tunnels, the Enable and Disable buttons are available that can be used to
enable /disable the VPN tunnel selected for details, see chapter 23.3).
In the Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance edition, it is also possible
to block individual network adapters.
•If the Dial-in interface or a VPN server is selected, these buttons are inactive.
Chapter 5 Network interfaces
52
Adding new interface (Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance)
In the Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance edition, WinRoute allows to add new
network interfaces (dial-up, PPPoE and PPTP connections) right in the administration console.
Click on Add to open a menu and select type of the new interface (dial-up can be added only
if an analog or ISDN modem is installed on the firewall host).
The new interface needs an easily identifiable name that will be showed in WinRoute and it
needs to be added to a group of interfaces (this item can be changed as desired any time
later).
Other parameters of the interface depend on the selected interface type. Most types require
username and password for access verification.
Optionally, you can specify IP address of a specific DNS server which will then be used as the
primary DNS server for Internet connections via this interface.
The Dialing settings can be used to set time intervals in which the connection should be estab-
lished persistently and when it should be disconnected. Out of these intervals, the connection
will be established on demand (i.e. it will be established automatically any time WinRoute
needs to send a packet to the corresponding network). For details about on-demand dialing,
see chapters 6.2 and 25.5.
53
Chapter 6
Internet Connection
The basic function of WinRoute is connection of the local network to the Internet via one or
more Internet connections (Internet links). Depending on number and types of Internet links,
WinRoute provides various options of Internet connection:
A Single Internet Link — Persistent
The most common connection of local networks to the Internet. In this case, only one
Internet connection is available and it is used persistently (typically Ethernet,WiFi,ADSL
or cable modems). It is also possible to use dial-like links which can be connected persis-
tently, such as PPPoE connections or CDMA modems.
A Single Internet Link — Dial On Demand
This type of connection is fit for links which are charged by connection time — typically
modems for analog or ISDN links. The link is down by default and WinRoute dials it in
response to a query demanding access from the local network to the Internet. If no data
are transferred via the link for some time, WinRoute hangs it up to reduce connection
costs.
Multiple Internet Links — Failover
Where reliability (availability of the Internet connection) is an issue and two Internet links
are available, the connection failover feature can help. If the primary link fails, WinRoute
switches to the secondary link automatically. Users may therefore notice just a very
short disconnection of the Internet connection. When the connection on the primary link
is recovered, WinRoute automatically switches back to it. For most part of users, this
operation takes so short to be even noticeable.
Multiple Internet Links Traffic Load Balancing
If throughput (connection speed) is an issue, WinRoute can use multiple links concur-
rently and spread data transferred between the LAN and the Internet among these links.
In standard conditions and settings, this also works as connection failover — if any of
the links fails, transferred data are spread among the other (working) links.
In all cases, WinRoute works in the mode of shared Internet connection. Sharing uses the NAT
(IP address translation) technology, hiding the entire local network behind a public IP address
of the firewall (or multiple addresses — depending on the type of Internet connection applied).
WinRoute can also be used as a neutral router (router without NAT). However, this mode is not
the best connection of the LAN to the Internet — it requires expert configuration and advanced
security.
Chapter 6 Internet Connection
54
This involves selection of the Internet connection type in the Configuration →Interfaces sec-
tion of the WinRoute configuration, setting corresponding interfaces for connection to the
Internet and definition of corresponding traffic rules (see chapter 7.3).
Hint
All necessary settings can be done semi-automatically with use of Traffic Policy Wizard —
see chapter 7.1. Following chapters provide with guidelines for setting of individual Internet
connection types as well as with description on configuration of the corresponding interface
and traffic rules in the wizard. The information available there can be used for customization
of settings (e.g. for setting of a new local subnetwork or for change of Internet connection).
6.1 Persistent connection with a single link
Requirements
The WinRoute hosting computer must be connected to the Internet by a leased line (typically
Ethernet or WiFi card). Parameters of this interface will be set with use of information supplied
by the ISP provider or they can be configured automatically with the DHCP protocol.
It is also possible to use a dial-like link which can be connected persistently, such as PPPoE
connections or CDMA modems. WinRoute will keep this type of link connected persistently (in
case of connection failure, the connection is automatically recovered immediately).
This connection type also requires one or more network cards for connection of individual
segments of the LAN. Default gateway must NOT be set on any of these cards!
If possible, it is also recommended functionality of the Internet connection before installing
WinRoute.
Configuration with the wizard
On the second page of the Traffic Policy Wizard (see chapter 7.1), select A Single Internet Link
— Persistent.
On the third page of the wizard, select a network interface (Internet link). As a preselection,
the interface where WinRoute detected the default gateway is used. Therefore, in most cases
the appropriate adapter is already set within this step.
If you select a link which is defined as a dial-up (see above), valid username and password are
required. If this information is saved in the operating system, WinRoute can enter it automati-
cally.
In the Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance edition, the wizard allows:
6.1 Persistent connection with a single link
55
Figure 6.1 Traffic Policy Wizard — persistent connection with a single link
Figure 6.2 Network Policy Wizard — selection of an interface for the Internet connection
•to configure parameters of the selected interface,
•to create a new interface (PPPoE,PPTP or dial-up).
For details on network interfaces, see chapter 5.
Notes:
1. On the top of the list, the Internet interface where the default gateway is set is offered.
Therefore, in most cases the appropriate adapter is already set within this step.
2. If the more IP addresses are set for the interface, the primary IP address will be displayed.
On Windows, the address assigned to the interface as first is considered as primary.
3. The other pages of the Traffic Policy Wizard do not concern Internet connection type. They
are focused in detail in chapter 7.1
Chapter 6 Internet Connection
56
Resulting interface configuration
When you finish set-up in Traffic Policy Wizard, the resulting configuration can be viewed
under Configuration →Interfaces and edited if desirable.
Figure 6.3 Configuration of interfaces — connection by a single leased link
The Internet Interfaces groups includes only card Internet selected in the third page of the
wizard. Other interfaces (including Dial-In) are considered as segments of the LAN and put in
Trusted / Local interfaces.
If the setting does not mirror the real configuration of the network correctly (for instance there
is an interface planned for DMZ), you can move the particular interface to Other Interfaces.
For these interfaces, it will be necessary to define corresponding traffic rules manually (see
chapter 7.3).
It is also possible to add new interfaces to the Internet Interfaces group. Packets will then be
routed to corresponding target networks in accordance with the system routing table (see also
chapter 18.1) and IP address translation will be applied (NAT). However, such configuration is
not significantly helpful in place.
Warning
It is necessary that in the Single internet Link mode the default gateway is set only at the “main”
Internet interface! If WinRoute detects more default gateways, error is announced. Solve this
problem immediately, otherwise traffic from the firewall and the LAN to the Internet will not
work correctly.
6.2 Connection with a single leased link - dial on demand
57
6.2 Connection with a single leased link - dial on demand
If the WinRoute host is connected to the Internet via dial-up, WinRoute can automatically dial
the connection when users attempt to access the Internet. WinRoute provides the following
options of dialing/hanging control:
•Line is dialed when a request from the local network is received. This function is called
Dial on demand. For further description see below.
•Line is disconnected automatically if idle for a certain period (no data is transmitted
in both directions).
•Maintenance of persistent connection or disconnection of the link within defined time
ranges.
Requirements
The corresponding device must be installed on the WinRoute (usually an analog or an ISDN
modem) and the corresponding dial-up connection must be created in the operating system.
It is not necessary to define and save login data in the dial-up settings, this information can be
defined directly in WinRoute. This connection type also requires one or more network cards
for connection of individual segments of the LAN. Default gateway must NOT be set on any of
these cards!
We recommend you to create and test a dial-up connection before installing WinRoute.
Warning
Before configuring the LAN and the firewall for a Internet link dialed on demand, please pay
special attention to the information provided in chapter 25.5. Correct configuration of the
network with respect to specific qualities and behavior of on demand dial helps to avoid
subsequent problems.
Configuration with the wizard
On the second page of the Traffic Policy Wizard (see chapter 7.1), select A Single Internet Link
— Dial on Demand.
On the third page of the wizard, select a corresponding dial-up connection (Internet link).
If authentication data are not saved in the operating system, username and password are
required.
In the Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance edition, the wizard allows:
Chapter 6 Internet Connection
58
Figure 6.4 Traffic Policy Wizard — dial on demand
Figure 6.5 Network Policy Wizard — selection of an interface for the Internet connection
•to configure parameters of the selected interface,
•to create a new interface (PPPoE,PPTP or dial-up).
For details on network interfaces, see chapter 5.
Resulting interface configuration
When you finish set-up in Traffic Policy Wizard, the resulting configuration can be viewed
under Configuration →Interfaces and edited if desirable.
The Internet Interfaces group includes only the Dial-up connection link selected in the third
page of the wizard. This connection is set up as a dial-on-demand link (see information in the
column labeled as Internet). Other interfaces (including Dial-In) are considered as segments of
the LAN and put in Trusted / Local interfaces.
6.2 Connection with a single leased link - dial on demand
59
Figure 6.6 Configuration of interfaces — an on-demand dial link
The Internet interfaces group can include multiple dial-ups. However, only one of these links
can be set for on-demand dialing. If another link is dialed manually, WinRoute will route
packets to the corresponding destination network in accordance with the system routing table
(see also chapter 18.1) and perform IP address translation (NAT). However, such configuration
would be of any use. It is therefore recommended to keep only a single on-demand-dial link
in the Internet interfaces group.
To change the dial-on-demand link, use the corresponding option in the interface edit dialog
(see chapter 5) or use the context menu (by right-clicking on the link).
Warning
In the Dial on Demand mode, default gateway must NOT be set on any network interface of
the firewall! On-demand dialing is based on absence of the default gateway (if no route exist
in the routing table where a packet would be directed, WinRoute create a default gateway by
dialing an Internet link).
Dialing options
For dial-ups, the interface settings dialog (see chapter 5) includes also the Dialing settings tab
where specific parameters for dial-up connections can be set:
Login information
If login data for the particular dial-up connection change, it can be updated here or it is
also possible to use the data saved in the operating system (if saved there).
Time intervals for persistent connection and persistent hang-up
Under certain circumstances it may be needed that dial on demand works only within
a certain time period (typically in working hours) and that the link is hung-up outside
this range. With respect to cost rates of individual providers, it can sometimes be most
Chapter 6 Internet Connection
60
Figure 6.7 Interface properties — dialing settings
efficient to keep the link up persistently even in times with dense network communica-
tion.
For these purposes, it is possible to set time intervals for persistent connection and/or
hang-up.
If the time intervals overlap, the interval in which the link is hung-up rules over the other.
In times outside the defined ranges, the link is dialed on demand.
Note:
1. If a static route over a dial-up is defined in WinRoute’s routing table, this link will
be dialed whenever a packet is routed through there. Settings for the interval within
which the link should be hung-up persistently will be ignored in this case.
For details, see chapter 18.1.
2. The dialing settings do not include an explicit option of connection recovery upon
failures. In case of connection outage, connection will or will not be recovered in
dependence on the current mode of the link:
•If the link should be connected persistently at the moment of the failure, the
6.2 Connection with a single leased link - dial on demand
61
connection is recovered automatically.
•If the connection is set to be hung-up at the moment of the outage, the con-
nection will not be recovered.
•In mode of on-demand dial (i.e. outside the intervals defined), connection
will be recovered in response to the first request (i.e. packet sent from the
local network to the Internet).
Automatic hangup when idle
Dial-ups are usually charged by connection time. When no data are transferred via the
connection, there is no reason to keep the link up. Therefore, it is possible to set also
idleness time after which the link will be hung-up automatically.
For optimal idleness timeout length, it is necessary to know how the Internet connection
is charged in the particular case. If the idleness timeout is too short, it may result in too
frequent hanging up and dialing of the link which might be very uncomfortable and in
certain cases even increase connection costs.
Note: In the time interval where persistent connection of the link is set (see above), the
idleness timeout is ignored.
Dialing scripts
In some cases there is a special need of running a program or a script (execute a batch
command) along with dialing or hanging up a link. This can be helpful for example if
a special type of modem is used that must be controlled by a special program provided
by its developers.
WinRoute allows launching any program or a command in the following situations: Before
dial,After dial,Before hang-up or/and After hang-up.
Note: In case of the Before dial and Before hang-up options, the system does not wait for
its completion after startup of the program.
Figure 6.8 Dial-up — external commands
Path to the executable file must be complete. If the path includes spaces it must be
closed into quotes, otherwise the part after a space will be considered as a parameter(s)
of a batch file. If the path to the file is quoted, the text which follows the closing quote
mark is also considered as batch file parameter(s).
Chapter 6 Internet Connection
62
Warning
WinRoute is running in the operating system as a service. Therefore, external applica-
tions and operating system’s commands will run in the background only (in the SYSTEM
account). The same rules are applied for all external commands and external programs
called by scripts. Therefore, it is not highly unrecommended to use interactive applica-
tions (i.e. applications with user interaction) for the actions described above. Otherwise.
interactive applications are running as “invisible” until the next reboot or until the partic-
ular process is ended by the Windows Task Manager. Under specific circumstances, such
application might also block other dials or hang-ups.
6.3 Connection Failover
WinRoute allows guarantee Internet connection by an alternative (back-up) connection (so
called connection failover). This connection failover is launched automatically whenever fail-
ure of the primary connection is detected. When WinRoute finds out that the primary con-
nection is recovered again, the secondary connection is disabled and the primary one is re-
established automatically.
Requirements
The computer hosting WinRoute must have two network interfaces for Internet connection:
a leased line (Ethernet,WiFi) or a dial-up with persistent connection (CDMA,PPPoE) for primary
connection and a leased line or a dial-up for secondary (failover) connection.
This connection type also requires one or more network cards for connection of individual
segments of the LAN. Default gateway must NOT be set on any of these cards (cards for the
LAN)!
In case of dial-ups, it is also necessary to define corresponding telephone connection in the
operating system. It is not necessary that login data for telephone connections are saved in
the system, this information can be specified directly in WinRoute.
Both the primary and the secondary link may be configured automatically by the DHCP proto-
col. In that case, WinRoute looks all required parameters up in the operating system.
It is recommended to check functionality of both the primary and the secondary link out
before installing WinRoute:
•If these links are two dial-ups, dial one after the other and check the Internet connec-
tion.
•If the primary link is leased and the secondary a dial-up, test the primary link con-
nection first and the secondary connection second. Dialing of the link opens (creates)
a new default route via this link which allows us to test Internet connection on the
secondary link.
•In case of two leased links, the simplest way is to disable one of the connections in
the operating system and test the other (enabled) link. And, as implied, test the other
in the same way when the first link is checked.
6.3 Connection Failover
63
Warning
Connection failover is relevant only if performed by a persistent connection (i.e. the primary
connection uses a network card or a persistently connected dial-up). Failing that, the sec-
ondary connection would be activated upon each hang-up of the primary link automatically.
Configuration with the wizard
On the second page of the Traffic Policy Wizard (see chapter 7.1), select Multiple Internet Links
— Failover.
Figure 6.9 Traffic Policy Wizard — Internet connection failover
In the third step of the wizard, select a network interface for the primary connection (leased
or persistent dial-up link) and for the secondary connection (leased or dial-up link). If login
data for the selected telephone connections are not saved in the operating system, enter the
valid username and password.
In the Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance edition, the wizard allows:
•to configure parameters of the selected primary and secondary interface,
•to create a new primary or/and secondary interface (PPPoE,PPTP or dial-up).
For details on network interfaces, see chapter 5.
Chapter 6 Internet Connection
64
Figure 6.10 Traffic Policy Wizard — failover of a leased link by a dial-up
Resulting interface configuration
When you finish set-up in Traffic Policy Wizard, the resulting configuration can be viewed
under Configuration →Interfaces and edited if desirable.
Figure 6.11 Configuration of interfaces — Internet connection failover
6.3 Connection Failover
65
The Internet interfaces group includes the Internet and the Dial-up link selected as primary and
secondary (failover) on the third page of the wizard. The information provided in the Internet
column states which link is used for primary and which one for secondary connection. The
Status column informs of the link status (up/down) as well as of the fact whether the link is
active (just being used as Internet connection at the moment) or not.
Other interfaces (including Dial-In) are considered as segments of the LAN and put in Trusted /
Local interfaces.
The Internet interfaces group can include also other links. If these links are connected, stan-
dard routing with IP address translation (NAT) will be applied. Obviously, these links will not
be backed up by any failover. Such configuration is not of any particular help, anyway. It is
recommended to use the Internet interfaces for primary and secondary connection links only.
To change settings of primary and secondary connection, use corresponding options in the
interface edit dialog (see chapter 5) or use the context menu called up by right-clicking on
the corresponding link. However, under any circumstances, always a single link can be set as
primary connection and a single one as secondary.
Probe hosts
Functionality of primary Internet connection is regularly tested by sending an ICMP request
for a response (PING) to certain hosts or network interfaces. By default, the default gateway of
the primary connection is used as the probe host. If the default gateway is not available, the
Internet connection is not working (correctly).
If the primary default gateway cannot be used as the testing computer by any reason, it is
possible to specify IP addresses of other (one or more) testing computers upon clicking on Ad-
vanced. If at least one of the tested devices is available, the primary connection is considered
as functioning.
Figure 6.12 Internet connection failover — setting probe hosts
Chapter 6 Internet Connection
66
Note:
1. Probe hosts must not block ICMP Echo Requests (PING) since such requests are used to test
availability of these hosts — otherwise the hosts will be always considered as unavailable.
This is one of the cases where the primary default gateway cannot be used as the testing
computer.
2. Probe hosts must be represented by computers or network devices which are permanently
running (servers, routers, etc.). Workstations which are running only a few hours per day
are irrelevant as probe hosts.
3. ICMP queries sent to probe hosts cannot be blocked by the firewall’s traffic rules.
6.4 Network Load Balancing
If at least two Internet links are available, WinRoute can divide traffic in parts sent by either of
them. The benefits of such solution are evident — Internet connection throughput gets better
(i.e. speed of data transmission between the LAN and the Internet increases) and response
time gets shorter for connections to servers in the Internet. If special traffic policy is not
defined (so called policy routing — see chapter 7.5), then individual links are also backed-up
mutually (see also chapter 6.3) — in case of failure of one of the lines, the traffic is routed via
another.
Note:
1. Network load balancing is applied only to outbound traffic via the default route. If the
routing table (see chapter 18.1) defines a route to a destination network, traffic to the
network will always be routed through the particular interface.
2. Network load balancing does not apply to the traffic of the firewall itself. This traffic is
processed directly by the operating system and, therefore, the standard routing is applied
here (the default route with the lowest metric value will always be used).
Requirements
The computer hosting WinRoute must have two network interfaces for connection to the In-
ternet, i.e. leased (Ethernet,WiFi) or persistently connected dial-up links (CDMA,PPPoE). Usual
dial-ups (analog modem, ISDN) are not suitable, because it is not possible to dial on demand
in the network load balancing mode.
This connection type also requires one or more network cards for connection of individual
segments of the LAN. Default gateway must NOT be set on any of these cards (cards for the
LAN)!
In case of dial-ups (CDMA,PPPoE), it is also necessary to define corresponding telephone con-
nection in the operating system. It is not necessary that login data for telephone connections
are saved in the system, this information can be specified directly in WinRoute.
6.4 Network Load Balancing
67
Both the primary and the secondary link may be configured automatically by the DHCP proto-
col. In that case, WinRoute looks all required parameters up in the operating system.
It is recommended to check functionality of individual Internet links out before installing
WinRoute. The following testing methods can be applied (to both links):
•If these links are two dial-ups, connect one after the other and check access to the
Internet.
•If one link is leased and the other a dial-up, test the leased link connection first and
then dial the other one. Dialing of the link opens (creates) a new default route via this
link which allows us to test Internet connection on the secondary link.
•In case of two leased links, the simplest way is to disable one of the connections in
the operating system and test the other (enabled) link. And, as implied, test the other
in the same way when the first link is checked.
This method can be applied to any number of Internet lines.
Configuration with the wizard
On the second page of the Traffic Policy Wizard (see chapter 7.1), select Multiple Internet Links
— Traffic Load Balancing.
Figure 6.13 Network Policy Wizard — network load balancing
Chapter 6 Internet Connection
68
On the third page of the wizard, add all links (one by one) which you intend to use for traffic
load balancing.
In the Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance edition, the wizard allows:
•to configure parameters of the selected interface,
•to create a new interface (PPPoE,PPTP or dial-up).
For details on network interfaces, see chapter 5.
Figure 6.14 Traffic Policy Wizard — failover of a leased link by a dial-up
For each link, specification of bandwidth is required (i.e. traffic speed). The absolute value
of the link speed is not important (however, just for reference reasons, it should correspond
with the link speed suggested by the ISP). The important aspect is the ratio of speed between
individual links — it determines how Internet traffic will be divided among these links.
If login data for the selected telephone connections are not saved in the operating system,
valid username and password are required.
Example
Let us suppose there are two Internet links available. You set their bandwidth values to
4 Mbit/s and 8 Mbit/s. Total (proposed) speed of the Internet connection is therefore 12 Mbit/s,
while one link provides one third of this capacity and the other link provides two thirds. Sim-
ply said, one third of overall Internet traffic will be routed through one link and the resting
two thirds through the other one.
6.4 Network Load Balancing
69
Resulting interface configuration
When you finish set-up in Traffic Policy Wizard, the resulting configuration can be viewed
under Configuration →Interfaces and edited if desirable.
Figure 6.15 Configuration of interfaces — network traffic load balancing
The Internet interfaces group includes the Internet 4Mbit and the Internet 8Mbit link selected
as an interface for Internet traffic load balancing on the third page of the wizard.
The Internet column shows proposed speed of individual links (see above). The Status column
informs of the current status of the link (up/down) as well as of the fact whether the link is
active, i.e. whether connection on this Internet link is working and part of Internet traffic can
be routed through it.
Other interfaces (including Dial-In) are considered as segments of the LAN and put in Trusted /
Local interfaces.
For any new link added to the Internet interfaces group, the default speed of 1 Mbit/s will be
set. Then it is possible and also recommended to edit the proposed link speed in the interface
settings (see chapter 5) with respect to its real speed, which makes the balancing efficient and
working smoothly.
Hint
Speed of one or more links can be set even for 0 Mbit/s. Such links will then not be used for
network traffic load balancing, but for traffic routing in accordance with specific traffic rules
(see chapter 7.5). However, availability of these links will still be tested and the links will serve
as alternative for case that all the other links fail.
Chapter 6 Internet Connection
70
Advanced settings (optimization, dedicated links, etc.)
In basic configuration, network load balancing is applied automatically with respect to their
proposed speeds (see above). It is possible to use traffic rules to modify this algorithm (e.g. by
dedicating one link for a particular traffic). This issue is described in detail in chapter 7.5.
Probe hosts
Functionality of individual Internet links is regularly tested by sending an ICMP request for
a response (PING) to certain hosts or network interfaces. By default, the default gateway of
the particular link is used as the probe host. If the default gateway is not available, the tested
link is not working (correctly).
If the primary default gateway (i.e. the default gateway set for the tested link) cannot be used
as the testing computer by any reason, it is possible to specify IP addresses of other (one or
more) testing computers upon clicking on Advanced. If at least one of the tested devices is
available, the Internet connection in question is considered as functioning.
The specified probe hosts will be used for testing of availability of all Internet links. Therefore,
the group of testing computers should include a few hosts belonging to various subnets of the
Internet.
Figure 6.16 Network load balancing — setting probe hosts
Note:
1. Probe hosts must not block ICMP Echo Requests (PING) since such requests are used to test
availability of these hosts — otherwise the hosts will be always considered as unavailable.
This is one of the cases where the default gateway cannot be used as the testing computer.
2. Probe hosts must be represented by computers or network devices which are permanently
running (servers, routers, etc.). Workstations which are running only a few hours per day
are irrelevant as probe hosts.
3. ICMP queries sent to probe hosts cannot be blocked by the firewall’s traffic rules.
71
Chapter 7
Traffic Policy
Traffic Policy belongs to of the basic WinRoute configuration. All the following settings are
displayed and can be edited within the table:
•security (protection of the local network including the WinRoute host from Internet
intrusions
•IP address translation (or NAT,Network Address Translation — technology which en-
ables transparent access of the entire local network to the Internet with one public IP
address only)
•access to the servers (services) running within the local network from the Internet
(port mapping)
•controlled access to the Internet for local users
Traffic policy rules can be defined in Configurations →Traffic Policy. The rules can be defined
either manually (advanced administrators) or using the wizard (recommended).
It is recommended to create basic traffic rules and later customize them as desired. Advanced
administrators can create all the rules according to their specific needs without using the
wizard.
7.1 Network Rules Wizard
The network rules wizard demands only the data that is essential for creating a basic set of
traffic rules. The rules defined in this wizard will enable access to selected services to the
Internet from the local network, and ensure full protection of the local network (including the
WinRoute host) from intrusion attempts from the Internet. To guarantee reliable WinRoute
functionality after the wizard is used, all existing rules are removed and substituted by rules
created automatically upon the new data.
Click on the Wizard button to run the network rules wizard.
Note: The existing traffic policy is substituted by new rules after completing the entire process
after confirmation of the last step. This means that during the process the wizard can be
stopped and canceled without losing existing rules.
Step 1 — information
To run successfully, the wizard requires the following parameters on the WinRoute host:
•at least one active adapter connected to the local network
•at least either one active adapter connected to the Internet or one dial-up defined. This
connection is not required to be dialed at the moment of the wizard’s startup.
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
72
Figure 7.1 Traffic Policy Wizard — introduction
Steps 2 and 3— internet connection settings
On the second page of the wizard, select how the LAN will be connected to the Internet with
WinRoute (leased link, dial-up, leased link with connection failover or multiple links with net-
work traffic load balancing).
On the third page, you can set parameters for the selected type of Internet connection.
Individual options of Internet connection are addressed thoroughly in chapter 6.
Note:
1. Selection of Internet connection type does not affect resulting traffic rules, but only con-
figuration of interfaces and their classification in groups (see chapters 5and 6).
2. The Traffic Policy Wizard no longer includes the option to enable /disable IP address trans-
lation (NAT) which was available in older versions of WinRoute. In all created traffic rules,
NAT is enabled automatically. The reason for this is that modes of network load balancing,
connection failover and on-demand dialing cannot actually be used without NAT.
Step 4 — Internet access limitations
Select which Internet services will be available for LAN users:
Allow access to all services
Internet access from the local network will not be limited. Users can access any Internet
service.
7.1 Network Rules Wizard
73
Figure 7.2 Network Policy Wizard — enabling access to Internet services
Allow access to the following services only
Only selected services will be available from the local network.
Note:
1. Defined restrictions will be applied also to the firewall itself.
2. In this dialog, only basic services are listed (it does not depend on what services
were defined in WinRoute — see chapter 14.3). Other services can be allowed by
modification of NAT traffic rules (for LAN hosts) or Firewall traffic rules (for the
firewall) or by adding custom rules. For details, see chapter 7.3.
Step 5 — enabling Kerio VPN traffic
To use WinRoute’s proprietary VPN solution in order to connect remote clients or to create
tunnels between remote networks, keep the Create rules for Kerio VPN server selected. Specific
services and address groups for Kerio VPN will be added. For detailed information on the
proprietary VPN solution, refer to chapter 23.
If you intend not to use the solution or to use a third-party solution (e.g. Microsoft PPTP,Nortel
IPSec, etc.), disable the Create rules for Kerio VPN option.
To enable remote access to shared items in the local network via a web browser, keep the
Create rules for Kerio Clientless SSL-VPN option enabled. This interface is independent from
Kerio VPN and it can be used along with a third-party VPN solution. For detailed information,
see chapter 24.
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
74
Figure 7.3 Network Policy Wizard — Kerio VPN
Step 6 — specification of servers that will be available within the local network
If any service (e.g. WWW server, FTP server, etc. which is intended be available from the
Internet) is running on the WinRoute host or another host within the local network, define it
in this dialog.
Figure 7.4 Network Policy Wizard — enabling local services
Note: If creating of rules for Kerio VPN was required in the previous step, the Kerio VPN
and HTTPS firewall services will be automatically added to the list of local servers. If these
services are removed or their parameters are modified, VPN services will not be available via
the Internet!
The dialog window that will open a new service can be activated with the Add button.
Service is running on
Select a computer where the corresponding service is running (i.e. the host to which
traffic coming in from the Internet will be redirected):
•Firewall — the host where WinRoute is installed
•Local host with IP address — another host in the local network (local server)
7.1 Network Rules Wizard
75
Figure 7.5 Network Policy Wizard — mapping of the local service
Note: Access to the Internet through WinRoute must be defined at the default
gateway of the host, otherwise the service will not be available.
Service
Selection of a service to be enabled. The service must be defined in Configurations →Defi-
nitions →Services formerly (see chapter 14.3). Majority of common services is predefined
in WinRoute.
Step 7 — generating the rules
In the last step, traffic rules are generated in accordance with data specified. All existing rules
will be removed and replaced by the new rules.
Figure 7.6 Network Rules Wizard — the last step
Warning
This is the last chance to cancel the process and keep the existing traffic policy. Click on the
Finish button to delete the existing rules and replace them with the new ones.
Rules Created by the Wizard
The traffic policy is better understood through the traffic rules created by the Wizard in the
previous example.
These rules are not affected by the selected type of Internet connection (the wizard, pages
2 and 3).
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
76
Figure 7.7 Traffic Policy generated by the wizard
FTP Service and HTTP Service
These rules map all HTTP and HTTPS services running at the host with the 192.168.1.10
IP address (step 6). These services will be available at IP addresses of the “outbound”
interface of the firewall (i.e. the interface connected to the Internet — page 3).
Note: Since WinRoute 6.4.0, mapped services can be accessed also from local networks
— it is therefore not necessary to use another (private) IP address for connections from
local clients. Therefore, the Source value is set to Any. For details, see chapter 7.3.
Kerio VPN Service and HTTPS Service
The Kerio VPN service rule enables connection to the WinRoute’s VPN server (establish-
ment of control connection between a VPN client and the server or creation of a VPN
tunnel — for details, see chapter 23).
The HTTPS Service rule allows connection via the Clientless SSL-VPN interface (access to
shared network items via a web browser — for details, see chapter 24).
These rules are not created unless the option allowing access to a particular service is
enabled in step 5.
Note: In these rules, value for Source is also set to Any. The main reason for this is to
keep consistent with rules for mapped services (all these rules are defined in page 6 of the
wizard). Access to firewall services from the local network is, under normal conditions,
allowed by the Firewall traffic rule but this is not always true.
7.1 Network Rules Wizard
77
NAT
This rule sets that in all packets routed from the local network to the Internet, the source
(private) IP address will be replaced by the address of the Internet interface through
which the packet is sent from the firewall. Only specified services can be accessed by the
Internet connection (the wizard, page 4).
The Source item of this rule includes the Trusted / Local interfaces group and the Des-
tination item includes group Internet interfaces. This makes the rule applicable to any
network configuration. It is not necessary to change this rule whenever a new segment of
the LAN is connected or Internet connection is changed.
By default, the Trusted / Local interfaces group includes also a Dial-In interface, i.e. all
RAS clients connecting to this server can access the Internet with the NAT technology.
Local Traffic
This rule allows all traffic between local hosts and the firewall (i.e. the computer where
WinRoute is installed). In this rule, items Source and Destination include the Trusted /
Local interfaces group (see chapter 5) and the special group Firewall.
By default, the Trusted / Local interfaces group includes also a Dial-In interface. This
means that the Local Traffic rule also allows traffic between local hosts and RAS
clients/VPN clients connected to the server.
If creating of rules for Kerio VPN was set in the wizard (the wizard, page 5), the Local
Traffic rule includes also special address groups All VPN tunnels and All VPN clients. This
implies that, by default, the rule allows traffic between the local network (firewall), remote
networks connected via VPN tunnels and VPN clients connecting to the WinRoute’s VPN
server.
Note: Access to the WinRoute host is not limited as the Wizard supposes that this host
belongs to the local network. Limitations can be done by modification of an appropriate
rule or by creating a new one. An inconvenient rule limiting access to the WinRoute
host might block remote administration or it might cause some Internet services to be
unavailable (all traffic between the LAN and the Internet passes through this host).
Firewall Traffic
This rule enables access to certain services from the WinRoute host. It is similar to the
NAT rule except from the fact that this rule does not perform IP translation (this host
connects to the Internet directly).
Default rule
This rule drops all communication that is not allowed by other rules. The default rule is
always listed at the end of the rule list and it cannot be removed.
The default rule allows the administrator to select what action will be taken with unde-
sirable traffic attempts (Deny or Drop) and to decide whether packets or/and connections
will be logged.
Note: To see detailed descriptions of traffic rules refer to chapter 7.3.
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
78
7.2 How traffic rules work
The traffic policy consists of rules ordered by their priority. When the rules are applied, they
are processed from the top downwards and the first rule is applied that meets connection or
packet parameters — i.e. order of the rules in the list is key. The order of the rules can be
changed with the two arrow buttons on the right side of the window.
An explicit rule denying all traffic is shown at the end of the list. This rule cannot be edited or
removed. If there is no rule to allow particular network traffic, then the “catch all” deny rule
will discard the packet.
Note:
1. Unless any other traffic rules are defined (by hand or using the wizard), all traffic is blocked
by a special rule which is set as default.
2. To control user connections to WWW or FTP servers and filter contents, use the special
tools available in WinRoute for these purposes (see chapter 12) rather than traffic rules.
7.3 Definition of Custom Traffic Rules
The traffic rules are displayed in the form of a table, where each rule is represented by a row
and rule properties (name, conditions, actions — for details see below) are described in the
columns. Left-click in a selected field of the table (or right-click a rule and choose the Edit...
option in the context menu) to open a dialog where the selected item can be edited.
To define new rules press the Add button. Move the new rule within the list using the arrow
buttons.
Name
Name of the rule. It should be brief and unique. More detailed information can be included in
the Description entry.
Matching fields next to names can be either ticked to activate or unticked to disable. If a par-
ticular field is empty, WinRoute will ignore the rule. This means that you need not remove and
later redefine these rules when troubleshooting a rule.
Figure 7.8 Traffic rule — name, color and rule description
7.3 Definition of Custom Traffic Rules
79
The background color of each row with this rule can be defined as well. Use the Transparent
option to make the background transparent (background color of the whole list will be used,
white is usually set). Colors allow highlighting of rules or distinguishing of groups of rules
(e.g. rules for incoming and outgoing traffic).
Any text describing the particular rule may be used to specify the Description entry (up to
1024 characters).
If the description is specified, the “bubble” symbol is displayed in the Name column next to
the rule name. Place the mouse pointer over the bubble to view the rule description.
It is recommended to describe all created rules for better reference (automatic descriptions
are provided for rules created by the wizard). This is helpful for later reference (at the first
glance, it is clear what the rule is used for). WinRoute administrators will appreciate this when
fine-tuning or trouble-shooting.
Note: Descriptions and background colors of the rules are used for better reference and greater
comfort — they do not influence the firewall’s functionality.
Source, Destination
Definition of the source or destination of the traffic defined by the rule.
Figure 7.9 Traffic rule — source address definition
A new source or destination item can be defined after clicking the Add button:
•Host — the host IP address or name (e.g. 192.168.1.1 or www.company.com)
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
80
Warning
If either the source or the destination computer is specified by DNS name, WinRoute
tries to identify its IP address while processing a corresponding traffic rule.
If no corresponding record is found in the cache, the DNS forwarder forwards the
query to the Internet. If the connection is realized by a dial-up which is currently hung-
up, the query will be sent after the line is dialed. The corresponding rule is disabled
unless IP address is resolved from the DNS name. Under certain circumstances denied
traffic can be let through while the denial rule is disabled (such connection will be
closed immediately when the rule is enabled again).
For the reasons mentioned above we recommend you to specify source and destination
computers only through IP addresses in case that you are connected to the Internet
through a dial-up!
•IP range — e.g. 192.168.1.10—192.168.1.20
•IP address group — a group of addresses defined in WinRoute (refer to chapter 14.1)
•Subnet with mask — subnet defined by network address and mask
(e.g. 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0)
•Network connected to interface — selection of the interface or a group of interfaces
from which the packet comes in (Source) or via which they are sent out (Destination).
Figure 7.10 Traffic rule — selecting an interface of a group of interfaces
Groups of interfaces allow creation of more general rules independent from any partic-
ular network configuration (e.g. it is not necessary to change such rules when Internet
connection is changed or when a new LAN segment is added). It is recommended to
define traffic rules associated with groups of interfaces wherever possible. For details
on network interfaces and groups of interfaces, see chapter 5.
Note: Only the Internet interfaces and the Trusted / Local interfaces group can be used
in traffic rules. Another method is used to add interfaces for Kerio VPN(see below).
The Other interfaces group includes interfaces of various types that were not filed in
another group. For this reason, traffic rules for such group would not be of much use.
•VPN — virtual private network (created with Kerio VPN). This option can be used to
add the following items:
1. Incoming VPN connections (VPN clients) — all VPN clients connected to the
WinRoute VPN server via the Kerio VPN Client
2. VPN tunnel — network connected to this server from a remote server via the VPN
7.3 Definition of Custom Traffic Rules
81
Figure 7.11 Traffic rule — VPN clients / VPN
tunnel in the source/destination address definition
tunnel The All option covers all networks connected by all VPN tunnels defined
which are active at the particular moment.
For detailed information on the proprietary VPN solution integrated in WinRoute, refer
to chapter 23.
•Users — users or groups that can be chosen in a special dialog
Figure 7.12 Traffic rule — users and groups in the source/destination address definition
The Authenticated users option makes the rule valid for all users authenticated to the
firewall (see chapter 10.1). Use the User(s) from domain option to add users/groups
from mapped Active Directory domains or from the local user database (for details,
refer to chapter 15).
Hint
Users/groups from various domains can be added to a rule at a moment. Select a do-
main, add users/groups, choose another domain and repeat this process until all de-
manded users/groups are added.
In traffic rules, user are represented by IP address of the host they are connected
(authenticated) from. For detailed description on user authentication, refer to chap-
ter 10.1.
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
82
Note:
1. If you require authentication for any rule, it is necessary to ensure that a rule ex-
ists to allow users to connect to the firewall authentication page. If users use each
various hosts to connect from, IP addresses of all these hosts must be considered.
2. If user accounts or groups are used as a source in the Internet access rule, auto-
matic redirection to the authentication page nor NTLM authentication will work.
Redirection requires successful establishment of connection to the destination
server.
If traffic policy is set like this, users must be told to open the authentication page
(see chapters 11 and 10.1) in their browser and login before they are let into the
Internet.
This issue is described in detail in chapter 7.6.
•Firewall — a special address group including all interfaces of the host where the fire-
wall is running. This option can be used for example to permit traffic between the
local network and the WinRoute host.
Use the Any button to replace all defined items with the Any item (this item is also used by
default for all new rules). This item will be removed automatically when at least one new item
is added.
Use the Remove button to remove all items defined (the Nothing value will be displayed in the
item list). This is helpful when rules are changed — it is not necessary to remove items one
by one. Whenever at least one item is added, the Nothing value will be removed automatically.
If the Nothing value is kept for the Source or/and Destination item, a corresponding rule is
disabled.
The Nothing value takes effect when network interfaces (see chapter 5) and users or groups
(see chapter 15) are removed . The Nothing value is automatically used for all Source,Desti-
nation or/and Service items of rules where a removed interface (or a user account, a group or
a service) has been used. Thus, all these rules are disabled.
Definition of rules with the Nothing value in any column is not of any use — it is more useful
to use the checkbox in the Name column instead to disable a rule.
Note: Removed interfaces cannot be replaced by the Any value, otherwise the traffic policy
might be changed fundamentally (e.g. an undesirable traffic might be allowed).
Service
Definition of service(s) on which the traffic rule will be applied. Any number of services defined
either in Configurations →Definitions →Services (see chapter 14.3) or using protocol and port
number (or by port range — a dash is used to specify the range) can be included in the list.
Use the Any button to replace all defined items with the Any item (this item is also used by
default for all new rules). Whenever at least one new service is added, the Any value removed
automatically.
7.3 Definition of Custom Traffic Rules
83
Figure 7.13 Traffic rule — setting a service
Use the Remove button to remove all items defined (the Nothing value will be displayed in
the item list). Whenever at least one service is added, the Nothing value will be removed
automatically. If the Nothing value is kept in the Service column, the rule is disabled.
The Nothing value is important for removal of services (see chapter 14.3). The Nothing value
is automatically used for the Service item of rules where a removed service has been used.
Thus, all these rules are disabled. Inserting the Nothing value manually is not meaningful
—a checking box in the Name column can be used instead.
Note: If there is a protocol inspector for a certain service in WinRoute, it is applied to all corre-
sponding traffic automatically. If desired to bypass the protocol inspector for certain traffic,
it is necessary to define this exception in the particular traffic rule. For detailed information,
see chapter 7.7.
Action
Action that will be taken by WinRoute when a given packet has passed all the conditions for the
rule (the conditions are defined by the Source,Destination and Service items). The following
actions can be taken:
•Permit — traffic will be allowed by the firewall
•Deny — client will be informed that access to the address or port is denied. The client
will be warned promptly, however, it is informed that the traffic is blocked by firewall.
•Drop — all packets that fit this rule will be dropped by firewall. The client will not
be sent any notification and will consider the action as a network outage. The action
is not repeated immediately by the client (the client expects a response and tries to
connect later, etc.).
Note: It is recommended to use the Deny option to limit the Internet access for local users and
the Drop option to block access from the Internet.
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
84
Figure 7.14 Traffic rule — selecting an action
Translation
Source or/and destination IP address translation.
Source IP address translation (NAT — Internet connection sharing)
The source IP address translation can be also called IP masquerading or Internet connection
sharing. The source (private) IP address is substituted by the IP address of the interface
connected to the Internet in outgoing packets routed from the local network to the Internet.
Therefore, the entire local network can access the Internet transparently, but it is externally
considered as one host.
Source address translation is used in traffic rules applied to traffic from the local private
network to the Internet. In other rules (traffic between the local network and the firewall,
between the firewall and the Internet, etc.), NAT is meaningless. For detailed information and
examples of rules, refer to chapter 7.4.
For source address translation, WinRoute offers these options:
Automatic IP address selection
By default, in packets sent from the LAN to the Internet the source IP address will be
replaced by IP address of the Internet interface of the firewall through which the packet
is sent. This IP address translation method is useful in the general rule for access from the
LAN to the Internet (see chapter 7.4), because it works correctly in any Internet connection
configuration and for any status of individual links (for details, see chapter 6).
If WinRoute works in the mode of network traffic load balancing (see chapter 6.4), you
can select a method which will be used for spreading the traffic between the LAN and the
Internet over individual Internet links:
•Load balancing per host — all traffic from the specific host (client) in the LAN will
always be routed via the same Internet link. All connections from the client will be
established from the same source IP address (the public address of the particular
interface of the firewall). This method is set as default, because it guarantees the
same behavior as in case of clients connected directly to the Internet. However,
7.3 Definition of Custom Traffic Rules
85
Figure 7.15 Traffic rule — NAT — automatic IP address selection
load balancing dividing the traffic among individual links may be not optimal in
this case.
•Load balancing per connection — for each connection established from the LAN
to the Internet will be selected an Internet link to spread the load optimally.
This method guarantees the most efficient use of the Internet connection’s ca-
pacity. However, it might also introduce problems and collisions with certain
services. The problem is that individual connections are established from vari-
ous IP addresses (depending on the firewall’s interface from which the packet is
sent) which may be considered as an attack at the destination server which might
result in closing of the session, blocking of the traffic, etc.
If another type of Internet connection is used (a single leased link, on demand dialing or
connection failover), these options have no effect on WinRoute’s functionality.
Hint
For maximal efficiency of the connection’s capacity, it is possible to combine both load
balancing methods. In the general rule for access from the LAN to the Internet, use load
balancing per connection and add a rule for specific services (servers, clients, etc.) which
will employ the load balancing per host method. For details, see also chapter 7.4.
NAT to IP address of a specific interface
It is possible to select a specific interface which will be used for the source NAT in outgo-
ing packets. This also determines that packets will be sent to the Internet via this specific
link. This allows definition of rules for sending of a specific traffic through a selected —
so called policy routing — see chapter 7.5.
If the selected Internet link fails, Internet will be unavailable for all traffic meeting criteria
(specific services, clients, etc.) specified by this rule. To prevent from such situations, it
is possible to allow use of an alternative (back-up) interface (link) for cases of the link’s
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
86
Figure 7.16 Traffic rule — NAT — NAT with specific interface (its IP address)
failure. If set as suggested, WinRoute will behave like in mode of automatic interface
selection (see above) if the such failure occurs.
NAT with a specified IP address
It is also possible to specify an IP address for NAT which will be used as the source IP
address for all packets sent from the LAN to the Internet. This option is available above
all to keep the environment compatible with older WinRoute versions. However, use of
a fixed IP address has many limitations:
•It is necessary to use an IP address of one of the firewall’s Internet interfaces. If
any other address is used (including even local private addresses). NAT will not
work correctly and packets sent to the Internet will be dropped.
•For obvious reasons, specific IP address cannot be used for NAT in the Internet
connection failover and the network traffic load balancing modes.
Figure 7.17 Traffic rule — NAT — NAT with specific IP address
7.3 Definition of Custom Traffic Rules
87
Full cone NAT
For all NAT methods it is possible to set mode of allowing of incoming packets coming from
any address — so called Full cone NAT.
If this option is off, WinRoute performs so called Port restricted cone NAT. In outgoing packets
transferred from the local network to the Internet, WinRoute replaces the source IP address of
the particular interface by public address of the firewall (see above). If possible, the original
source port is kept; otherwise, another free source port is assigned. As to incoming traffic,
only packets sent from the same IP address and port from which the outgoing packet was sent
are let in. This translation method guarantees high security — the firewall will not let in any
packet which is not a response to the sent request.
However, many applications (especially applications working with multimedia, Voice over IP
technologies, etc.) use another traffic method where other clients can (with direct connection
established) connect to a port “opened” by an outgoing packet. Therefore, WinRoute supports
also the Full cone NAT mode where the described restrictions are not applied for incoming
packets. The port then lets in incoming packets with any source IP address and port. This
translation method allows running of applications in the private network that would either
work only partially or they would not work at all.
For example of using of Full cone NAT for VoIP applications, refer to chapter 7.8.
Warning
Use of Full cone NAT brings certain security threats — the port opened by outgoing connection
can be accessed without any restrictions being applied. For this reason, it is recommended to
enable Full cone NAT only for a specific service (i.e. to create a special rule for this purpose).
By any means do not allow Full cone NAT in the general rule for traffic from the local network
to the Internet4!Such rule would significantly decrease security of the local network.
Note:
1. Older versions of WinRoute (to version 6.3.1 incl.) used so called Symmetric NAT where
each outgoing connection on the firewall was assigned a new source port from the reserved
range. For this reason, since 6.4.0 WinRoute includes significantly improved support for
VoIP and multimedia applications than the previous versions even without using special
traffic rules. Both methods have the same security level — they differ only in method of
assigning source ports on the firewall.
2. The method of IP address translation having been used since version 6.4.0 (i.e. Port re-
stricted cone NAT) allows also using of the IPSec protocol. Special support for IPSec in-
cluded in older versions of WinRoute is not needed any longer.
Typically the NAT rule created by the Traffic policy wizard — see chapter 7.1.
4
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
88
Destination NAT (port mapping):
Destination address translation (also called port mapping) is used to allow access to services
hosted in private local networks behind the firewall. All incoming packets that meet defined
rules are re-directed to a defined host (destination address is changed). This actually “moves”
to the Internet interface of the WinRoute host (i.e. IP address it is mapped from). From the
client’s point of view, the service is running on the IP address from which it is mapped (usually
on the firewall’s IP address).
Options for destination NAT (port mapping):
Figure 7.18 Traffic rule — destination address translation
•No Translation — destination address will not be modified.
•Translate to — IP address that will substitute the packet’s destination address. This
address also represents the IP address of the host on which the service is actually
running.
The Translate to entry can be also specified by DNS name of the destination computer.
In such cases WinRoute finds a corresponding IP address using a DNS query.
Warning
We recommend you not to use names of computers which are not recorded in the local
DNS since rule is not applied until a corresponding IP address is found. This might
cause temporary malfunction of the mapped service.
•Translate port to — during the process of IP translation you can also substitute the
port of the appropriate service. This means that the service can run at a port that is
different from the port where it is available from the Internet.
Note: This option cannot be used unless only one service is defined in the Service entry
within the appropriate traffic rule and this service uses only one port or port range.
For examples of traffic rules for port mapping and their settings, refer to chapter 7.4.
Log
The following actions can be taken to log traffic:
•Log matching packets — all packets matching with rule (permitted, denied or dropped,
according to the rule definition) will be logged in the Filter log.
•Log matching connections — all connections matching this rule will be logged in the
Connection log (only for permit rules). Individual packets included in these connec-
tions will not be logged.
7.3 Definition of Custom Traffic Rules
89
Figure 7.19 Traffic rule — packet/connection logging
Note: Connection cannot be logged for blocking and dropping rules (connection is not
even established).
The following columns are hidden in the default settings of the Traffic Policy window (for
details on showing and hiding columns, see chapter 3.2):
Valid on
Time interval within which the rule will be valid. Apart from this interval WinRoute ignores
the rule.
The special always option can be used to disable the time limitation (it is not displayed in the
Traffic Policy dialog).
When a denying rule is applied and/or when an allowing rule’s appliance terminates, all active
network connections matching the particular rule are closed immediately.
Protocol inspector
Selection of a protocol inspector that will be applied on all traffic meeting the rule. The menu
provides the following options to select from:
Figure 7.20 Traffic rule — protocol inspector selection
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
90
•Default — all necessary protocol inspectors (or inspectors of the services listed in the
Service entry) will be applied on traffic meeting this rule.
•None — no inspector will be applied (regardless of how services used in the Service
item are defined).
•Other — selection of a particular inspector which will be applied to traffic meeting this
rule (all WinRoute’s protocol inspectors are available). No other protocol inspector will
be applied to the traffic, regardless of settings of services in the Service section.
Do not use this option unless the appropriate traffic rule defines a protocol belonging
to the inspector. Functionality of the service might be affected by using an inappro-
priate inspector.
For more information, refer to chapter 7.7.
Note: Use the Default option for the Protocol Inspector item if a particular service (see the
Service item) is used in the rule definition (the protocol inspector is included in the service
definition).
7.4 Basic Traffic Rule Types
WinRoute traffic policy provides a range of network traffic filtering options. In this chapter
you will find some rules used to manage standard configurations. Using these examples you
can easily create a set of rules for your network configuration.
IP Translation (NAT)
IP translation (as well as Internet connection sharing) is a term used for the exchange of a
private IP address in a packet going out from the local network to the Internet with the IP
address of the Internet interface of the WinRoute host. This technology is used to connect
local private networks to the Internet by a single public IP address.
The following example shows an appropriate traffic rule:
Figure 7.21 A typical traffic rule for NAT (Internet connection sharing)
Source
The Trusted / Local interfaces group. This group includes all segments of the LAN con-
nected directly to the firewall. If access to the Internet from some segments is supposed
to be blocked, the most suitable group to file the interface into is Other interfaces.
If the local network consists of cascaded segments (i.e. it includes other routers), it is not
necessary to customize the rule in accordance with this fact — it is just necessary to set
routing correctly (see chapter 18.1).
7.4 Basic Traffic Rule Types
91
Destination
The Internet interfaces group. With this group, the rule is usable for any type of Internet
connection (see chapter 6) and it is not necessary to modify it even it Internet connection
is changed.
Service
This entry can be used to define global limitations for Internet access. If particular ser-
vices are defined for IP translations, only these services will be used for the IP translations
and other Internet services will not be available from the local network.
Action
To validate a rule one of the following three actions must be defined: Permit, Drop, Deny.
Translation
In the Source NAT section select the Default settings option (the primary IP address of
the interface via which packets go out from the WinRoute host will be used for NAT). This
also guarantees versatility of this rule — IP address translation will always be working
correctly, regardless the Internet connection type and the particular link type via which
the packet will be sent to the Internet.
Warning
The No translation option should be set in the Destination address translation section,
otherwise the rule might not function. Combining source and destination IP address
translation is relevant under special conditions only .
Placing the rule
The rule for destination address translation must be preceded by all rules which deny
access to the Internet from the local network.
Note: Such a rule allows access to the Internet from any host in the local network, not from
the firewall itself (i.e. from the WinRoute host)!
Traffic between the firewall and the Internet must be enabled by a special rule. Since WinRoute
host can access the Internet directly, it is not necessary to use NAT.
Figure 7.22 Rule for traffic between the firewall and hosts in the Internet
Port mapping
Port mapping allows services hosted on the local network (typically in private networks) to
become available over the Internet. The locally hosted server would behave as if it existed
directly on the Internet (public address of the WinRoute host).
Since 6.4.0,WinRoute allows to access mapped services also from the local network. This
avoids problems with different DNS records for the Internet and the local network.
Traffic rule for port mapping can be defined as follows:
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
92
Figure 7.23 Traffic rule that makes the local web server available from the Internet
Source
Mapped services can be accessed by clients both from the Internet and from the local
network. For this reason, it is possible to keep the Any value in the Source entry (or it
is possible to list all relevant interface groups or individual groups — e.g. Internet and
LAN).
Destination
The WinRoute host labeled as Firewall, which represents all IP addresses bound to the
firewall host.
This service will be available at all addresses of the interface connected to the Internet.
To make the service available at a particular IP address, use the Host option and specify
the IP address (see the multihoming example).
Service
Services to be available. You can select one of the predefined services (see chapter 14.3)
or define an appropriate service with protocol and port number.
Any service that is intended to be mapped to one host can be defined in this entry. To
map services for other hosts you will need to create a new traffic rule.
Action
Select the Allow option, otherwise all traffic will be blocked and the function of port
mapping will be irrelevant.
Translation
In the Destination NAT (Port Mapping) section select the Translate to IP address option and
specify the IP address of the host within the local network where the service is running.
Using the Translate port to option you can map a service to a port which is different from
the one where the service is available from the Internet.
Warning
In the Source NAT section should be set to the No Translation option. Combining source
and destination IP address translation is relevant under special conditions only .
Note: For proper functionality of port mapping, the locally hosted server must point to
the WinRoute firewall as the default gateway. Port mapping will not function well unless
this condition is met.
Placing the rule
As already mentioned, mapped services can be accessed also from the local network.
During access from the local network, connection is established from the local (private)
IP address to an IP address in the Internet (the firewall’s public IP address). If the rule
for mapped service is preceded by a rule allowing access from the local network to the
Internet, according to this rule the packet would be directed to the Internet and then
7.4 Basic Traffic Rule Types
93
dropped. Therefore, it is recommended to put all rules for mapped services at the top of
the table of traffic rules.
Note: If there are separate rules limiting access to mapped services, these rules must
precede mapping rules. It is usually possible to combine service mapping and access
restriction in a single rule.
Multihoming
Multihoming is a term used for situations when one network interface connected to the In-
ternet uses multiple public IP addresses. Typically, multiple services are available through
individual IP addresses (this implies that the services are mutually independent).
In the local network a web server web1 with IP address 192.168.1.100 and a web server web2
with IP address 192.168.1.200 are running in the local network. The interface connected to
the Internet uses public IP addresses 63.157.211.10 and 63.157.211.11. We want the server
web1 to be available from the Internet at the IP address 63.157.211.10, the server web2 at
the IP address 63.157.211.11.
The two following traffic rules must be defined in WinRoute to enable this configuration:
Figure 7.24 Multihoming — web servers mapping
Source
Any (see the previous example referring to mapping of single service).
Destination
An appropriate IP address of the interface connected to the Internet (use the Host option
for insertion of an IP address).
Service
Service which will be available through this interface (the HTTP service in case of a Web
server).
Action
Select the Allow option, otherwise all traffic will be blocked and the function of port
mapping will be irrelevant.
Translation
Go to the Destination NAT (Port Mapping) section, select the Translate to IP address option
and specify IP address of a corresponding Web server (web1 or web2).
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
94
Limiting Internet Access
Sometimes, it is helpful to limit users access to the Internet services from the local network.
Access to Internet services can be limited in several ways. In the following examples, the
limitation rules use IP translation. There is no need to define other rules as all traffic that
would not meet these requirements will be blocked by the default "catch all" rule.
Other methods of Internet access limitations can be found in the Exceptions section (see below).
Note: Rules mentioned in these examples can be also used if WinRoute is intended as a neutral
router (no address translation) — in the Translation entry there will be no translations defined.
1. Allow access to selected services only. In the translation rule in the Service entry specify
only those services that are intended to be allowed.
Figure 7.25 Internet connection sharing — only selected services are available
2. Limitations sorted by IP addresses. Access to particular services (or access to any Internet
service) will be allowed only from selected hosts. In the Source entry define the group of IP
addresses from which the Internet will be available. This group must be formerly defined
in Configuration →Definitions →Address Groups (see chapter 15.5).
Figure 7.26 Only selected IP address group(s) is/are allowed to connect to the Internet
Note: This type of rule should be used only if each user has his/her own host and the
hosts have static IP addresses.
3. Limitations sorted by users. Firewall monitors if the connection is from an authenticated
host. In accordance with this fact, the traffic is permitted or denied.
Figure 7.27 Only selected user group(s) is/are allowed to connect to the Internet
7.5 Policy routing
95
Alternatively you can define the rule to allow only authenticated users to access specific
services. Any user that has a user account in WinRoute will be allowed to access the
Internet after authenticating to the firewall. Firewall administrators can easily monitor
which services and which pages are opened by each user (it is not possible to connect
anonymously).
Figure 7.28 Only authenticated users are allowed to connect to the Internet
For detailed description on user authentication, refer to chapter 10.1.
Note:
1. The rules mentioned above can be combined in various ways (i.e. a user group can be
allowed to access certain Internet services only).
2. Usage of user accounts and groups in traffic policy follows specific rules. For detailed
description on this topic, refer to chapter 7.6.
Exclusions
You may need to allow access to the Internet only for a certain user/address group, whereas
all other users should not be allowed to access this service.
This will be better understood through the following example (how to allow a user group to
use the Telnet service for access to servers in the Internet). Use the two following rules to meet
these requirements:
•First rule will deny selected users (or a group of users/IP addresses, etc.) to access the
Internet.
•Second rule will deny the other users to access this service.
Figure 7.29 Exception — Telnet is available only for selected user group(s)
7.5 Policy routing
If the LAN is connected to the Internet by multiple links with load balancing (see chapter 6.4),
it may be needed that one link is reserved for a certain traffic, leaving the rest of the load for
the other links. Such a measure is useful if it is necessary to keep important traffic swinging
(email traffic, the informational system, etc.), i.e. not slowed down by secondary or even
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
96
marginal traffic (web browsing, online radio channels, etc.). To meet this crucial requirement
of an enterprise data traffic, it is necessary to consider and employ, besides the destination IP
address, additional information when routing packets from the LAN to the Internet, such as
source IP address, protocol, etc. This approach is called policy routing.
In WinRoute, policy routing can be defined by conditions in traffic rules for Internet access
with IP address translation (NAT). This approach brings wide range of options helping to meet
all requirements for routing and network load balancing.
Note: Policy routing traffic rules are of higher priority than routes defined in the routing table
(see chapter 18.1).
Example: A link reserved for email traffic
Let us suppose that the firewall is connected to the Internet by two links with load balancing
with speed values of 4 Mbit/s and 8 Mbit/s. One of the links is connected to the provider where
the mailserver is also hosted. Therefore, it is desirable that all email traffic (SMTP,IMAP,POP3
protocols and their secured versions) is routed through this link.
Define the following traffic rules to meet these requirements:
•First rule defines that NAT is applied to email services and the Internet 4 Mbit interface
is used.
•The other rule is a general NAT rule with automatic interface selection (see chap-
ter 7.4).
Figure 7.30 Policy routing — a link reserved for email traffic
Setting of NAT in the rule for email services is shown in figure 7.31. It is recommended to
allow use of a back-up link for case that the reserved link fails. Otherwise, email services will
be unavailable when the connection fails.
Let us suppose that the mailserver provides also Webmail and CalDAV services which use
HTTP(s) protocol. Adding these protocols in the first rule would make all web traffic routed
through the reserved link. To reach the desired goal, the rule can be modified by reserving the
link for traffic with a specific server — see figure 7.32.
7.5 Policy routing
97
Figure 7.31 Policy routing — setting NAT for a reserved link
Figure 7.32 Policy routing — a link reserved for a specific server
Note: In the second rule, automatic interface selection is used. This means that the Internet
4Mbit link is also used for network traffic load balancing. Email traffic is certainly still re-
spected and has higher priority on the link reserved by the first rule. This means that total
load will be efficiently balanced between both links all the time.
If you need to reserve a link only for a specific traffic (i.e. route other traffic through other
links), go toConfiguration →Interfaces and set the speed of the link to 0 Mbit/s. In this case
the link will not be used for load balancing. Only traffic specified in corresponding traffic rules
will be routed through it.
Example: Optimization of network traffic load balancing
WinRoute provides two options of network traffic load balancing: per host (clients) or per con-
nection (for details, refer to chapter 7.3). With respect to variability of applications on individ-
ual hosts and of user behavior, the best solution (more efficient use of individual links) proves
to be the option of load balancing per connection. However, this mode may encounter prob-
lems with access to services where multiple connections get established at one moment (web
pages and other web related services). The server can consider source addresses in individual
connections as connection recovery after failure (this may lead for instance to expiration of
the session) or as an attack attempt (in that case the service can get unavailable).
This problem can be bridged over by policy routing. In case of “problematic” services (e.g.
HTTP and HTTPS) the load will be balanced per host, i.e. all connections from one client will
be routed through a particular Internet link so that their IP address will be identical (a single
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
98
IP address will be used). To any other services, load balancing per connection will be applied
— thus maximally efficient use of the capacity of available links will be reached.
Meeting of the requirements will be guaranteed by using two NAT traffic rules — see fig-
ure 7.33. In the first rule, specify corresponding services and set the per host NAT mode. In
the second rule, which will be applied for any other services, set the per connection NAT mode.
Figure 7.33 Policy routing — load balancing optimization
7.6 User accounts and groups in traffic rules
In traffic rules, source/destination can be specified also by user accounts or/and user groups.
In traffic policy, each user account represents IP address of the host from which user is con-
nected. This means that the rule is applied to users authenticated at the firewall only (when
the user logs out, the rule is not effective any longer). This chapter is focused on various
issues relating to use of user accounts in traffic rules as well as hints for their solution.
Note: For detailed information on traffic rules definition, refer to chapter 7.3.
How to enable certain users to access the Internet
How to enable access to the Internet for specific users only? Assuming that this problem
applies to a private local network and Internet connection is performed through NAT, simply
specify these users in the Source item in the NAT rule.
Figure 7.34 This traffic rule allows only selected users to connect to the Internet
Such a rule enables the specified users to connect to the Internet (if authenticated). However,
these users must open the WinRoute interface’s login page manually and authenticate (for
details, see chapter 10.1).
However, with such a rule defined, all methods of automatic authentication will be ineffective
(i.e. redirecting to the login page, NTLM authentication as well as automatic authentication
from defined hosts). The reason is that the automatic authentication (or redirection to the
login page) is not invoked unless connection to the Internet is being established (for license
7.7 Partial Retirement of Protocol Inspector
99
counting reasons — see chapter 4.6). However, this NAT rule blocks any connection unless
the user is authenticated.
Enabling automatic authentication
The automatic user authentication issue can be solved easily as follows:
•Add a rule allowing an unlimited access to the HTTP service before the NAT rule.
Figure 7.35 These traffic rules enable automatic redirection to the login page
•In URL rules (see chapter 12.2), allow specific users to access any Web site and deny
any access to other users.
Figure 7.36 These URL rules enable specified users to access any Web site
User not authenticated yet who attempts to open a Web site will be automatically redirected
to the authentication page (or authenticated by NTLM, or logged in from the corresponding
host). After a successful authentication, users specified in the NAT rule (see figure 7.35) will
be allowed to access also other Internet services. As well as users not specified in the rules,
unauthenticated users will be disallowed to access any Web site or/and other Internet services.
Note: In this example, it is assumed that client hosts use the WinRoute DNS Forwarder or local
DNS server (traffic must be allowed for the DNS server). If client stations used a DNS server
in the Internet (this configuration is not recommended!), it would be necessary to include the
DNS service in the rule which allows unlimited Internet access.
7.7 Partial Retirement of Protocol Inspector
Under certain circumstances, appliance of a protocol inspector to a particular communication
might be undesirable. To disable specific protocol inspection, define corresponding source
and destination IP addresses and a traffic rule for this service that will define explicitly that
no protocol inspector will be used.
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
100
Example
A banking application (client) communicates with the bank’s server through its proper proto-
col which uses TCP protocol at the port 2000. Supposing the banking application is run on
a host with IP address 192.168.1.15 and it connects to the server server.bank.com.
This port is used by the Cisco SCCP protocol. The protocol inspector of the SCCP would be
applied to the traffic of the banking client under normal circumstances. However, this might
affect functionality of the application or endanger its security.
A special traffic rule, as follows, will be defined for all traffic of the banking application:
1. In the Configuration →Definitions →Services section, define a service called Internet Bank-
ing: this service will use TCP protocol at the port 2000 and no protocol inspector is used
by this communication.
Figure 7.37 Service definition without inspector protocol
2. In the Configuration →Traffic Policy section, create a rule which will permit this service
traffic between the local network and the bank’s server. Specify that no protocol inspector
will be applied.
Figure 7.38 This traffic rule allows accessing service without protocol inspection
7.8 Use of Full cone NAT
101
Note: In the default configuration of the Traffic rules section, the Protocol inspector column
is hidden. To show it, modify settings through the Modify columns dialog (see chapter 3.2).
Warning
To disable a protocol inspector, it is not sufficient to define a service that would not use the
inspector! Protocol inspectors are applied to all traffic performed by corresponding protocols
by default. To disable a protocol inspector, special traffic rules must be defined.
7.8 Use of Full cone NAT
However, many applications (especially applications working with multimedia, Voice over IP
technologies, etc.) use another traffic method where other clients can (with direct connection
established) connect to a port “opened” by an outgoing packet. For these cases, WinRoute
includes a special mode of address translation, known as Full cone NAT. In this mode, opened
port can be accessed from any IP address and the traffic is always redirected to a correspond-
ing client in the local network.
Use of Full cone NAT may bring certain security risk. Each connection established in this mode
opens a possible passage from the Internet to the local network. To keep the security as high
as possible, it is therefore necessary to enable Full cone NAT for particular clients and services
only. The following example refers to an IP telephone with the SIP protocol.
Note: For details on traffic rules definition, refer to chapter 7.3.
Example: SIP telephone in local network
In the local network, there is an IP telephone registered to an SIP server in the Internet. The
parameters may be as follows:
•IP address of the phone: 192.168.1.100
•Public IP address of the firewall: 195.192.33.1
•SIP server: sip.server.com
Since the firewall performs IP address translation, the telephone is registered on the SIP server
with the firewall’s public address (195.192.33.1). If there is a call from another telephone
to this telephone, the connection will go through the firewall’s address (195.192.33.1) and
the corresponding port. Under normal conditions, such connection can be established only
directly from the SIP server (to which the original outgoing connection for the registration was
established). However, use of Full cone NAT allows such connection for any client calling to
the SIP telephone in the local network.
Full cone NAT will be enabled by an extremely restrictive traffic rule (to keep the security level
as high as possible):
Chapter 7 Traffic Policy
102
Figure 7.39 Definition of a Full cone NAT traffic rule
•Source — IP address of an SIP telephone in the local network.
•Destination — name or IP address of an SIP server in the Internet. Full cone NAT will
apply only to connection with this server.
•Service —SIP service (for an SIP telephone). Full cone NAT will not apply to any other
services.
•Action — traffic must be allowed.
•Translation — select a source NAT method (see chapter 7.3) and enable the Allow
returning packets from any host (Full cone NAT) option.
Figure 7.40 Enabling Full cone NAT in the traffic rule
Rule for Full cone NAT must precede the general rule with NAT allowing traffic from the local
network to the Internet.
7.9 Media hairpinning
WinRoute allows to “arrange” traffic between two clients in the LAN which “know each other”
only from behind the firewall’s public IP address. This feature of the firewall is called hairpin-
ning (with the hairpin root suggesting the packet’s “U-turn” back to the local network). Used
especially for transmission of voice or visual data, it is also known as media hairpinning.
7.9 Media hairpinning
103
Example: Two SIP telephones in the LAN
Let us suppose two SIP telephones are located in the LAN. These telephones authenticate at
a SIP server in the Internet. The parameters may be as follows:
•IP addresses of the phones: 192.168.1.100 and 192.168.1.101
•Public IP address of the firewall: 195.192.33.1
•SIP server: sip.server.com
For the telephones, define corresponding traffic rules — see chapter 7.8 (as apparent from
figure7.39, simply specify Source of the Full cone NAT traffic rule by IP address of the other
telephone).
Both telephones will be registered on SIP server under the firewall’s public IP address
(195.192.33.1). If these telephones establish mutual connection, data packets (for voice
transmission) from both telephones will be sent to the firewall’s public IP address (and to the
port of the other telephone). Under normal conditions, such packets would be dropped. How-
ever, WinRoute is capable of using a corresponding record in the NAT table to recognize that
a packet is addressed to a client in the local network. Then it translates the destination IP
address and sends the packet back to the local network (as well as in case of port mapping).
This ensures that traffic between the two phones will work correctly.
Note:
1. Hairpinning requires traffic between the local network and the Internet being allowed (be-
fore processed by the firewall, packets use a local source address and an Internet destina-
tion address — i.e. this is an outgoing traffic from the local network to the Internet). In
default traffic rules created by the wizard (see chapter 7.1), this condition is met by the
NAT rule.
2. In principle, hairpinning does not require that Full cone NAT is allowed (see chapter 7.8).
However, in our example, Full cone NAT is required for correct functioning of the SIP
protocol.
104
Chapter 8
Configuration of network services
This chapter provides guidelines for setting of basic services in WinRoute helpful for easy
configuration and smooth access to the Internet:
•DNS module — this service is used as a simple DNS server for the LAN,
•DHCP server — provides fully automated configuration of LAN hosts,
•DDNS client — provides automatic update of firewall logs in public dynamic DNS,
•Proxy server — enables access to the Internet for clients which cannot or do not want
to use the option of direct access,
•HTTP cache — this service accelerates access to repeatedly visited web pages (for
direct connections with proxy server).
8.1 DNS module
In WinRoute, the DNS Forwarder module can be used to enable easier configuration for DNS
hosts within local networks or to speed up responses to repeated DNS queries. At local hosts,
DNS can be defined by taking the following actions:
•use IP address of the primary or the back-up DNS server. This solution has the risk
of slow DNS responses. All requests from each computer in the local network will be
sent to the Internet.
•use the DNS server within the local network (if available). The DNS server must be
allowed to access the Internet in order to be able to respond even to queries sent from
outside of the local domain.
•use the DNS module in WinRoute. It can be also used as a basic DNS server for the
local domain or/and as a forwarder for the existing server.
If possible, it is recommended to use the DNS module as a primary DNS server for LAN hosts
(the last option). The DNS module provides fast processing of DNS requests and their correct
routing in more complex network configurations. The DNS module can answer directly to
repeated requests and to requests for local DNS names, without the need of contacting DNS
servers in the Internet.
If the DNS module cannot answer any DNS request on its own, it can forward it to a DNS server
set for the Internet link through which the request is sent. For details addressing configuration
of the firewall’s network interfaces, see chapter 5, more information on Internet connection
options, refer to chapter 6.
8.1 DNS module
105
The DNS module configuration
By default, DNS server (the DNS forwarder service), cache (for faster responses to repeated
requests) and simple DNS names resolver are enabled in WinRoute.
The configuration can be fine-tuned in Configuration →DNS.
Figure 8.1 DNS settings
Enable DNS forwarder
This option enables DNS server in WinRoute. Without other configuration, any DNS re-
quests are forwarded to DNS servers on the corresponding Internet interface.
If the DNS forwarder service is disabled, the DNS module is used only as a WinRoute’s
DNS resolver.
Warning
If DNS forwarder is not used for your network configuration, it can be switched off. If
you want to run another DNS server on the same host, DNS forwarder must be disabled,
otherwise collision might occur at the DNS service’s port (53/UDP).
Enable cache for faster response of repeated queries
If this option is on, all responses will be stored in local DNS cache. Responses to repeated
queries will be much faster (the same query sent by various clients is also considered as
a repeated query).
Physically, the DNS cache is kept in RAM. However, all DNS records are also saved in the
DnsCache.cfg file (see chapter 25.2). This means that records in DNS cache are kept
even after WinRoute Firewall Engine is stopped or the firewall is closed.
Chapter 8 Configuration of network services
106
Note:
1. Time period for keeping DNS logs in the cache is specified individually in each log
(usually 24 hours).
2. Use of DNS also speeds up activity of the WinRoute’s non-transparent proxy server
(see chapter 8.4).
Clear cache
Clear-out of all records from the DNS cache (regardless of their lifetime). This feature can
be helpful e.g. for configuration changes, dial-up testing, error detection, etc.
Use custom forwarding
Use this option to enable settings for forwarding certain DNS queries to other DNS servers
(see below).
Simple DNS resolution
The DNS module can answer some DNS requests on its own, typically requests regarding local
host names. In local network, no other DNS server is required, neither it is necessary to save
information about local hosts in the public DNS. For hosts configured automatically by the
DHCP protocol (see chapter 8.2), the response will always include the current IP address.
Before forwarding a query...
These options allow setting of where the DNS module would search for the name or IP
address before the query is forwarded to another DNS server.
•’hosts’ file — this file can be found in any operating system supporting TCP/IP.
Each row of this file includes host IP addresses and a list of appropriate DNS
names. When any DNS query is received, this file will be checked first to find out
whether the desired name or IP address is included. If not, the query is forwarded
to a DNS server.
If this function is on, the DNS module follows the same rule. Use the Edit button
to open a special editor where the hosts file can be edited within the Administra-
tion Console even if this console is connected to WinRoute remotely (from another
host).
•DHCP lease table— if the hosts within local network are configured by the DHCP
server in WinRoute (see chapter 8.2), the DHCP server knows what IP address was
defined for each host. After starting the system, the host sends a request for IP
address definition including the name of the host.
The DNS module can access DHCP lease tables and find out which IP address has
been assigned to the host name. If asked to inform about the local name of the
host, DNS Forwarder will always respond with the current IP address. Actually,
this is a method of dynamical DNS update.
Note: If both options are disabled, the DNS module forwards all queries to other DNS
servers.
8.1 DNS module
107
Figure 8.2 Editor of the Hosts system file
Local DNS domain
In the When resolving name from the ’hosts’ file or lease table combine it with DNS domain
below entry, specify name of the local DNS domain.
If a host or a network device sends a request for an IP address, it uses the name only (it
has not found out the domain yet). Therefore, only host names without domain are saved
in the table of addresses leased by DHCP server . The DNS module needs to know the
name of the local domain to answer queries on fully qualified local DNS names (names
including the domain).
Note: If the local domain is specified in the DNS module, local names with or without the
domain can be recorded in the hosts system file.
The problem can be better understood through the following example.
Example
The local domain’s name is company.com. The host called john is configured so as to
obtain an IP address from the DHCP server. After the operating system is started the
host sends to the DHCP server a query with the information about its name (john). The
DHCP server assigns the host IP address 192.168.1.56. The DHCP server then keeps the
information that the IP address is assigned to the john host.
Another host that wants to start communication with the host will send a query on the
john.company.com name (the john host in the company.com domain). If the local do-
main name would not have been known by the DNS module, the forwarder would pass the
query to another DNS server as it would not recognize that it is a local host. However, as
DNS Forwarder knows the local domain name, the company.com name will be separated
and the john host with the appropriate IP address will be easily looked up in the DHCP
table.
Chapter 8 Configuration of network services
108
Enable DNS forwarding
The DNS module allows forwarding of certain DNS requests to specific DNS servers. This
feature can be helpful for example when we intend to use a local DNS server for the local
domain (the other DNS queries will be forwarded to the Internet directly — this will speed
up the response). DNS forwarder’s settings also play role in configuration of private networks
where it is necessary to provide correct forwarding of requests for names in domains of remote
subnets (for details, check chapter 23).
Request forwarding is defined by rules for DNS names or subnets. Rules are ordered in a list
which is processed from the top. If a DNS name or a subnet in a request matches a rule, the
request is forwarded to the corresponding DNS server. Queries which do not match any rule
are forwarded to the “default” DNS servers (see above).
Note: If Simple DNS resolution is enabled (see below), the forwarding rules are applied only if
the DNS module is not able to respond by using the information in the hosts system file and/or
by the DHCP lease table.
Clicking on the Define button in the DNS module configuration (see figure 8.1) opens a dialog
for setting of rules concerning forwarding of DNS queries.
Figure 8.3 Specific settings of DNS forwarding
The rule can be defined for:
•DNS name — queries requiring names of computers will be forwarded to this DNS
server (so called Aqueries)
•a subnet — queries requiring IP addresses of the particular domain will be forwarded
to the DNS server (reverse domain — PTR queries)
Rules can be reordered by arrow buttons. This enables creating of more complex combinations
of rules — e.g. exceptions for certain workstations or subdomains. As the rule list is processed
from the top downwards, rules should be ordered starting by the most specific one (e.g. name
of a particular computer) and with the most general one at the bottom (e.g. the main domain
of the company). Similarly to this, rules for reversed DNS queries should be ordered by subnet
mask length (e.g. with 255.255.255.0 at the top and 255.0.0.0 at the bottom). Rules for
8.1 DNS module
109
queries concerning names and reversed queries are independent from each other. For better
reference, it is recommended to start with all rules concerning queries for names and continue
with all rules for reversed queries, or vice versa.
Click on the Add or the Edit button to open a dialog where custom DNS forwarding rules can
be defined.
Figure 8.4 DNS forwarding — a new rule
•The Name DNS query option allows specification of a rule for name queries. Use the If
the queried name matches entry to specify a corresponding DNS name (name of a host
in the domain).
It is usually desirable to forward queries to entire domains rather than to specific
names. Specification of a domain name may therefore contain *wildcard symbol
(asterisk — substitutes any number of characters) and/or ?(question mark — substi-
tutes a single character). The rule will be applied to all names matching with the string
(hosts, domains, etc.).
Example:
DNS name will be represented by the string ?erio.c*. The rule will be applied to all
names in domains kerio.com,cerio.com,aerio.c etc., such as on www.kerio.com,
secure.kerio.com,www.aerio.c, etc.
Chapter 8 Configuration of network services
110
Warning
In rules for DNS requests, it is necessary to enter an expression matching the full DNS
name! If, for example, the kerio.c*expression is introduced, only names kerio.cz,
kerio.com etc. would match the rule and host names included in these domains (such
as www.kerio.cz and secure.kerio.com) would not!
•Use the Reverse DNS query alternative to specify rule for DNS queries on IP addresses
in a particular subnet. Subnet is specified by a network address and a corresponding
mask (i.e. 192.168.1.0 / 255.255.255.0).
•Use the Then forward query to DNS Server(s) field to specify IP address(es) of one or
more DNS server(s) to which queries will be forwarded.
If multiple DNS servers are specified, they are considered as primary, secondary, etc.
If the Do not forward option is checked, DNS queries will not be forwarded to any
other DNS server — WinRoute will search only in the hosts local file or in DHCP ta-
bles (see below). If requested name or IP address is not found, non-existence of the
name/address is reported to the client.
8.2 DHCP server
The DHCP protocol (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used for easy TCP/IP configura-
tion of hosts within the network. Upon an operation system start-up, the client host sends
a configuration request that is detected by the DHCP server. The DHCP server selects appro-
priate configuration parameters (IP address with appropriate subnet mask and other optional
parameters, such as IP address of the default gateway, addresses of DNS servers, domain
name, etc.) for the client stations. All client parameters can be set at the server only — at
individual hosts, enable the option that TCP/IP parameters are configured automatically from
the DHCP server. For most operating systems (e.g. Windows,Linux, etc.), this option is set by
default — it is not necessary to perform any additional settings at client hosts.
The DHCP server assigns clients IP addresses within a predefined scope for a certain period
(lease time). If an IP address is to be kept, the client must request an extension on the period
of time before the lease expires. If the client has not required an extension on the lease time,
the IP address is considered free and can be assigned to another client. This is performed
automatically and transparently.
So called reservations can be also defined on the DHCP server — certain clients will have their
own IP addresses reserved. Addresses can be reserved for a hardware address (MAC) or a host
name. These clients will have fixed IP address. These addresses are configured automatically.
Using DHCP brings two main benefits. First, the administration is much easier than with the
other protocols as all settings may be done at the server (it is not necessary to configure
individual workstations). Second, many network conflicts are eliminated (i.e. one IP address
cannot be assigned to more than one workstation, etc.).
8.2 DHCP server
111
DHCP Server Configuration
To configure the DHCP server in WinRoute go to Configuration →DHCP Server. Here you can
define IP scopes, reservations or optional parameters, and view information about occupied IP
addresses or statistics of the DHCP server.
The DHCP server can be enabled/disabled using the DHCP Server enabled option (at the top).
Configuration can be modified even when the DHCP server is disabled.
Definition of Scopes and Reservations
To define scopes including optional parameters and to reserve IP addresses for selected clients
go to the Scopes dialog. The tab includes two parts — in one address scopes and in the other
reservations are defined:
Figure 8.5 DHCP server — IP scopes
In the Item column, you can find subnets where scopes of IP addresses are defined. The IP
subnet can be either ticked to activate the scope or unticked to make the scope inactive (scopes
can be temporarily switched off without deleting and adding again). Each subnet includes also
a list of reservations of IP addresses that are defined in it.
In the Default options item (the first item in the table) you can set default parameters for DHCP
server.
Lease time
Time for which an IP address is assigned to clients. This IP address will be automatically
considered free by expiration of this time (it can be assigned to another client) unless the
client requests lease time extension or the address release.
Chapter 8 Configuration of network services
112
Figure 8.6 DHCP server — default DHCP parameters
DNS server
Any DNS server (or multiple DNS servers separated by semicolons) can be defined. We
recommend you to use the WinRoute’s DNS module as the primary server (first in the list)
— IP address of the WinRoute host. The DNS module can cooperate with DHCP server
(see chapter 8.1) so that it will always use correct IP addresses to response to requests on
local host names.
WINS server
IP address of the WINS server.
Domain
Local Internet domain. Do not specify this parameter if there is no local domain.
Advanced
Click on this button to open a dialog with a complete list of advanced parameters sup-
ported by DHCP (including the four mentioned above). Any parameter supported by
DHCP can be added and its value can be set within this dialog.
Default parameters are automatically matched with address scopes unless configuration of
a particular scope is defined (the Address Scope →Options dialog). The same rule is applied on
scopes and reservations (parameters defined for a certain address scope are used for the other
reservations unless parameters are defined for a specific reservation). Weight of individual
parameters corresponds with their position in the tree hierarchy.
Select the Add →Scope option to view the dialog for address scope definition.
Note: Only one scope can be defined for each subnet.
Description
Comment on the new address scope (just as information for WinRoute administrator).
8.2 DHCP server
113
Figure 8.7 DHCP server — IP scopes definition
First address, Last address
First and last address of the new scope.
Note: If possible, we recommend you to define the scope larger than it would be defined
for the real number of users within the subnet.
Subnet mask
Mask of the appropriate subnet. It is assigned to clients together with the IP address.
Note: The Administration Console application monitors whether first and last address
belong to the subnet defined by the mask. If this requirement is not met, an error will be
reported after the confirmation with the OK button.
Lease time
Time for which an IP address is assigned to clients. This IP address will be automatically
considered free by expiration of this time (it can be assigned to another client) unless the
client requests lease time extension or the address release.
Exclusions
WinRoute enables the administrator to define only one scope in within each subnet. To
create more individual scopes, follow these instructions:
•create address scope covering all desired scopes
•define so called exclusions that will not be assigned
Chapter 8 Configuration of network services
114
Example
In 192.168.1.0 subnet you intend to create two scopes: from 192.168.1.10
to 192.168.1.49 and from 192.168.1.61 to 192.168.1.100. Addresses from
192.168.1.50 to 192.168.1.60 will be left free and can be used for other purposes.
Create the scope from 192.168.1.10 to 192.168.1.100 and click on the Exclusions but-
ton to define the scope from 192.168.1.50 to 192.168.1.60. These addresses will not
be assigned by the DHCP server.
Figure 8.8 DHCP server — IP scopes exceptions
Parameters
In the Address Scope dialog, basic DHCP parameters of the addresses assigned to clients
can be defined:
•Default Gateway — IP address of the router that will be used as the default gate-
way for the subnet from which IP addresses are assigned. IP address of the
interface the network is connected to. Default gateway of another network would
be useless (not available to clients).
•DNS server — any DNS server (or more DNS servers separated with semicolons).
We recommend you to use the WinRoute’s DNS module as the primary server (first
in the list) — IP address of the WinRoute host. The DNS module can cooperate
with DHCP server (see chapter 8.1) so that it will always use correct IP addresses
to response to requests on local host names.
•WINS server
•Domain — local Internet domain. Do not specify this parameter if there is no
local domain.
Warning
This parameter is not used for specification of the name of Windows NT domain!
Advanced
Click on this button to open a dialog with a complete list of advanced parameters sup-
ported by DHCP (including the four mentioned above). Any parameter supported by
DHCP can be added and its value can be set within this dialog. This dialog is also a part
of the Address Scopes tab.
8.2 DHCP server
115
Figure 8.9 DHCP server — DHCP settings
To view configured DHCP parameters and their values within appropriate IP scopes see the
right column in the Address Scope tab.
Note: Simple DHCP server statistics are displayed at the right top of the Address Scope tab.
Each scope is described with the following items:
•total number of addresses within this scope
•number and percentage proportion of leases
•number and percentage proportion of free addresses
Figure 8.10 DHCP server — statistics (leased and free IP addresses within the scope)
Lease Reservations
DHCP server enables the administrator to book an IP address for any host. To make the
reservation click on the Add →Reservations button in the Scopes folder.
Any IP address included in a defined subnet can be reserved. This address can but does not
have to belong to the scope of addresses dynamically leased, and it can also belong to any
scope used for exceptions.
IP addresses can be reserved for:
Chapter 8 Configuration of network services
116
Figure 8.11 DHCP server — reserving an IP address
•hardware (MAC) address of the host — it is defined by hexadecimal numbers separated
by colons, i.e.
00:bc:a5:f2:1e:50
or by dashes— for example:
00-bc-a5-f2-1e-50
The MAC address of a network adapter can be detected with operating system tools
(i.e. with the ipconfig command) or with a special application provided by the net-
work adapter manufacturer.
•host name — DHCP requests of most DHCP clients include host names (i.e. all Windows
operating systems), or the client can be set to send a host name (e.g. the Linux operat-
ing system).
Click Advanced to set DHCP parameters which will accompany the address when leased. If the
IP address is already included to a scope, DHCP parameters belonging to the scope are used
automatically. In the Lease Reservation dialog window, additional parameters can be specified
or/and new values can be entered for parameters yet existing.
Note: Another way to reserve an IP address is to go to the Leases tab, find the IP address leased
dynamically to the host and reserve it (for details, see below).
Leases
IP scopes can be viewed in the Leases tab. These scopes are displayed in the form of trees. All
current leases within the appropriate subnet are displayed in these trees.
Note: Icon color represents address status (see below). Icons marked with Rrepresent reserved
addresses.
Columns in this section contain the following information:
•Leased Address — leased IP address
•Lease Expiration — date and time specifying expiration of the appropriate lease
8.2 DHCP server
117
Figure 8.12 DHCP server — list of leased and reserved IP addresses
•MAC Address — hardware address of the host that the IP address is assigned to (in-
cluding name of the network adapter manufacturer).
•Hostname — name of the host that the IP address is assigned to (only if the DHCP
client at this host sends it to the DHCP server)
•Status — status of the appropriate IP address; Leased (leased addresses), Expired (ad-
dresses with expired lease — the client has not asked for the lease to be extended
yet), Declined (the lease was declined by the client) or Released (the address has been
released by the client).
Note:
1. Data about expired and released addresses are kept by the DHCP server and can
be used later if the same client demands a lease. If free IP addresses are lacked,
these addresses can be leased to other clients.
2. Declined addresses are handled according to the settings in the Options tab (see
below).
The following columns are hidden by default (for details on showing and hiding columns, see
chapter 3.2):
•Last Request Time — date and time when the recent request for a lease or lease exten-
sion was sent by a client
•Lease Remaining Time — time remaining until the appropriate Lease Expiration
Use the Release button to release a selected IP address immediately (independently of its sta-
tus). Released addresses are considered free and can be assigned to other clients immediately.
Click on the Reserve button to reserve a selected (dynamically assigned) IP address based on
Chapter 8 Configuration of network services
118
the MAC address or name of the host that the address is currently assigned to. The Scopes tab
with a dialog where the appropriate address can be leased will be opened automatically. All
entries except for the Description item will be already defined with appropriate data. Define
the Description entry and click on the OK button to assign a persistent lease for the IP address
of the host to which it has been assigned dynamically.
Note: The MAC address of the host for which the IP is leased will be inserted to the lease
reservation dialog automatically. To reserve an IP address for a hostname, change settings of
the Reservation For and Value items.
DHCP server — advanced options
Other DHCP server parameters can be set in the Options tab.
Figure 8.13 DHCP server — advanced options
BOOTP
If this option is enabled, the DHCP server will assign IP addresses (including optional pa-
rameters) also to clients of BOOTP protocol (protocol used formerly to DHCP— it assigns
configurations statically only, according to MAC addresses).
Windows RAS
Through this option you can enable DHCP service for RAS clients (Remote Access Service).
You can also specify time when the service will be available to RAS clients (an IP address
will be assigned) if the default value is not convenient.
8.3 Dynamic DNS for public IP address of the firewall
119
Warning
1. DHCP server cannot assign addresses to RAS clients connecting to the RAS server
directly at the WinRoute host (for technical reasons, it is not possible to receive DHCP
queries from the local RAS server). For such cases, it is necessary to set assigning of
IP addresses in the RAS server configuration.
2. The RAS service in Windows leases a new IP address for each connection (even if re-
quested by the same client). WinRoute includes RAS clients in total number of clients
when checking whether number of licensed users has been exceeded (see chapter 4.6).
This implies that repeated connection of RAS clients may cause exceeding of the num-
ber of licensed users (if the IP scope for the RAS service is too large or/and an address
is leased to RAS clients for too long time). Remote clients will be then allowed to con-
nect and communicate with hosts in the local network, while they will not be allowed
to connect to the Internet via WinRoute.
Declined options
These options define how declined IP addresses (DHCPDECLINE report) will be handled.
These addresses can be either considered released and assigned to other users if needed
(the Offer immediately option) or blocked during a certain time for former clients to be
able to use them (the Declined addresses can be offered after timeout option).
8.3 Dynamic DNS for public IP address of the firewall
Kerio WinRoute Firewall provides (among others) services for remote access from the Internet
to the local network (VPN server — see chapter 23 and the Clientless SSL-VPN interface — see
chapter 24). Also other services can be accessible from the Internet — e.g. the Kerio StaR
interface (see chapter 21), remote administration of WinRoute by the Administration Console
(see chapter 16.2) or any other service (e.g. web server in local network — see chapter 7.4).
These services are available at the firewall’s public IP address. If this IP address is static and
there exists a corresponding DNS record for it, a corresponding name can be used for access
to a given service (e.g. server.company.com). If there is no corresponding DNS record, it is
necessary to remember the firewall’s IP address and use it for access to all services. If the
public IP address is dynamic (i.e. it changes), it is extremely difficult or even impossible to
connect to these services from the Internet.
This problem is solved by WinRoute’s support for dynamic DNS. Dynamic DNS provides DNS
record for a specific name of a server which will always keep the current IP address. This
method thus allows making mapped services always available under the same server name,
regardless of the fact if IP address changes and how often.
How cooperation with dynamic DNS works
Dynamic DNS (DDNS) is a service providing automatic update of IP address in DNS record for
the particular host name. Typically, two versions of DDNS are available:
Chapter 8 Configuration of network services
120
•free — user can choose from several second level domains (e.g. no-ip.org,
ddns.info, etc.) and select a free host name for the domain (e.g.
company.ddns.info).
•paid service — user registers their own domain (e.g. company.com) and the service
provider then provides DNS server for this domain with the option of automatic up-
date of records.
User of the service gets an account which is used for access authentication (this will guarantee
that only authorized users can update DNS records. Update is performed via secured connec-
tion (typically HTTPS) to make sure that the traffic cannot be tapped. Dynamic DNS records
can be updated either manually by the user or (mostly) by a specialized software — WinRoute
in this case.
If WinRoute enables cooperation with dynamic DNS, a request for update of the IP address
in dynamic DNS is sent upon any change of the Internet interface’s IP address (including
switching between primary and secondary Internet connection — see chapter 6.3). This keeps
DNS record for the particular IP address up-to-date and mapped services may be accessed by
the corresponding host name.
Note:
1. Usage of DDNS follows conditions of the particular provider.
2. Dynamic DNS records use very short time-to-live (TTL) and, therefore, they are kept in
cache of other DNS servers or forwarders for a very short time. Probability that the client
receives DNS response with an invalid (old) IP address is, therefore, very low.
3. Some DDNS servers also allow concurrent update of more records. Wildcards are used for
this purpose.
Example: In DDNS there exist two host names, both linked to the public IP address of
the firewall: fw.company.com and server.company.com. If the IP address is changed,
it is therefore possible to send a single request for update of DNS records with name
*.company.com. This requests starts update of DNS records of both names.
DDNS configuration in WinRoute
To set cooperation with the dynamic DNS server, go to the Dynamic DNS folder in Configura-
tion →Advanced Options.
As already mentioned, the first step is to make an account (i.e. required dynamic DNS record
with appropriate access rights) at a DDNS provider. WinRoute now supports these DDNS
providers:
•ChangeIP (http://www.changeip.com/),
•DynDNS (http://www.dyndns.org/),
•No-IP (http://www.no-ip.com/).
8.4 Proxy server
121
Figure 8.14 Setting cooperation with dynamic DNS server
On the Dynamic DNS tab, select a DDNS provider, enter DNS name for which dynamic record
will be kept updated and set user name and password for access to updates of the dynamic
record. If DDNS supports wildcards, they can be used in the host name.
Once this information is defined, it is recommended to test update of dynamic DNS record by
clicking on Update now. This verifies that automatic update works well (the server is available,
set data is correct, etc.) and also updates the corresponding DNS record (IP address of the
firewall could have changed since the registration or the last manual update).
If an error occurs while attempting to update DNS record, an error is reported on the Dynamic
DNS tab providing closer specification of the error (e.g. DDNS server is not available, user
authentication failed, etc.). This report is also recorded in the error log.
8.4 Proxy server
Even though the NAT technology used in WinRoute enables direct access to the Internet from
all local hosts, it contains a standard HTTP proxy server. Under certain conditions the direct
access cannot be used or it is inconvenient . The following list describes the most common
situations:
1. To connect from the WinRoute host it is necessary to use the proxy server of your ISP.
Proxy server included in WinRoute can forward all queries to so called parent proxy server).
2. Internet connection is performed via a dial-up and access to certain Web pages is blocked
(refer to chapter 12.2). If a direct connection is used, the line will be dialed before the
HTTP query could be detected (line is dialed upon a DNS query or upon a client’s request
demanding connection to a Web server). If a user connects to a forbidden Web page,
WinRoute dials the line and blocks access to the page — the line is dialed but the page is
not opened.
Chapter 8 Configuration of network services
122
Proxy server can receive and process clients’ queries locally. The line will not be dialed if
access to the requested page is forbidden.
3. WinRoute is deployed within a network with many hosts where proxy server has been used.
It would be too complex and time-consuming to re-configure all the hosts.
The Internet connection functionality is kept if proxy server is used — it is not necessary
to edit configuration of individual hosts (or only some hosts should be re-configured).
The WinRoute’s proxy server can be used for HTTP, HTTPS and FTP protocols. Proxy server
does not support the SOCKS protocol ( a special protocol used for communication between
the client and the proxy server).
Note: For detailed information on using FTP on the WinRoute’s proxy server, refer to chap-
ter 25.4.
Proxy Server Configuration
To configure proxy server parameters open the Proxy server tab in Configuration →Content
Filtering →HTTP Policy.
Figure 8.15 HTTP proxy server settings
8.4 Proxy server
123
Enable non-transparent proxy server
This option enables the HTTP proxy server in WinRoute on the port inserted in the Port
entry (3128 port is set by the default).
Warning
If you use a port number that is already used by another service or application, WinRoute
will accept this port, however, the proxy server will not be able to run and the following
report will be logged into the Error log (refer to chapter 22.8):
failed to bind to port 3128: another application is using this port
If you are not sure that the port you intend to use is free, click on the Apply button and
check the Error log (check whether the report has or has not been logged) immediately.
Enable connection to any TCP port
This security option enables to allow or block so called tunneling of other application
protocols (than HTTP, HTTPS and FTP) via the proxy server.
If this option is disabled, the proxy server allows to establish connection only to the
standard HTTPS port 443) — it is supposed that secured web pages are being opened. If
the option is enabled, the proxy server can establish connection to any port. It can be
a non-standard HTTPS port or tunneling of another application protocol.
Note: This option does not affect the non-secured traffic performed by HTTP and/or FTP.
In WinRoute, HTTP traffic is controlled by a protocol inspectors which allows only valid
HTTP and FTP queries.
Forward to parent proxy server
Tick this option for WinRoute to forward all queries to the parent proxy server which will
be specified by the following data:
•Server — DNS name or IP address of parent proxy server and the port on which
the server is running (3128 port is used by the default).
•Parent proxy server requires authentication — enable this option if authentication
by username and password is required by the parent proxy server. Specify the
Username and Password login data.
Note: The name and password for authentication to the parent proxy server is
sent with each HTTP request. Only Basic authentication is supported.
The Forward to parent proxy server option specifies how WinRoute will connect to the
Internet (for update checks, downloads of McAfee updates and for connecting to the
online Kerio Web Filter databases).
Set automatic proxy configuration script to
If a proxy server is used, Web browsers on client hosts must be configured correctly. Most
common web browsers (e.g. Internet Explorer,Firefox/SeaMonkey,Opera, etc.) enable
automatic configuration of corresponding parameters by using a script downloaded from
a corresponding website specified by URL.
In the case of WinRoute’s proxy server, the configuration script is saved at
http://192.168.1.1:3128/pac/proxy.pac,
Chapter 8 Configuration of network services
124
where 192.168.1.1 is the IP address of the WinRoute host and number 3128 represents
the port of the proxy server (see above).
The Allow browsers to use configuration script automatically... option adjusts the config-
uration script in accord with the current WinRoute configuration and the settings of the
local network:
•Direct access — no proxy server will be used by browsers
•WinRoute proxy server — IP address of the WinRoute host and the port on which
the proxy server is running will be used by the browser (see above).
Note: The configuration script requires that the proxy server is always available (even if
the Direct access option is used).
Allow browsers to use configuration script automatically...
It is possible to let Internet Explorer be configured automatically by the DHCP server. To
set this, enable the Automatically detect settings option.
WinRoute’s DHCP server must be running (see chapter 8.2), otherwise the function will
not work. TCP/IP parameters at the host can be static — Internet Explorer sends a special
DHCP query when started.
Hint
This method enables to configure all Internet Explorer browsers at all local hosts by a sin-
gle click.
8.5 HTTP cache
Using cache to access Web pages that are opened repeatedly reduces Internet traffic (in case of
line where traffic is counted, it is also remarkable that using of cache decreases total volume
of transferred data). Downloaded files are saved to the hard drive of the WinRoute host so that
it is not necessary to download them from the web server again later.
All objects are stored in cache for a certain time only (Time To Live —TTL). This time defines
whether checks for the most recent versions of the particular objects will be performed upon
a new request of the page. The required object will be found in cache unless the TTL timeout
has expired. If it has expired, a check for a new update of the object will be performed. This
ensures continuous update of objects that are stored in the cache.
The cache can be used either for direct access or for access via the proxy server. If you
use direct access, the HTTP protocol inspector must be applied to the traffic. In the default
configuration of WinRoute, this condition is met for the HTTP protocol at the default port 80
(for details, see chapters 7.3 and 14.3).
To set HTTP cache parameters go to the Cache tab in Configuration →Content Filtering →
HTTP Policy.
Enable cache on transparent proxy
This option enables cache for HTTP traffic that uses the HTTP protocol inspector (direct
access to the Internet).
8.5 HTTP cache
125
Figure 8.16 HTTP cache configuration
Enable cache on proxy server
Enables the cache for HTTP traffic via WinRoute’s proxy server (see chapter 8.4).
HTTP protocol TTL
Default time of object validity within the cache. This time is used when:
•TTL of a particular object is not defined (to define TTL use the URL specific settings
button —see below)
•TTL defined by the Web server is not accepted (the Use server supplied Time-To-
Live entry)
Cache directory
Directory that will be used to store downloaded objects. The cache file under the direc-
tory where WinRoute is installed is used by default.
Chapter 8 Configuration of network services
126
Warning
Changes in this entry will not be accepted unless the WinRoute Firewall Engine is
restarted. Old cache files in the original folder will be removed automatically.
Cache size
Size of the cache file on the disk. Maximal cache size allowed is 2 GB (2047 MB)
Note:
1. If 98 per cent of the cache is full, a so called cleaning will be run — this function
will remove all objects with expired TTL. If no objects are deleted successfully, no
other objects can be stored into the cache unless there is more free space on the disk
(made by further cleaning or by manual removal).
2. The maximal cache size is applied in WinRoute since 6.2.0. In older versions, maximal
cache size allowed was 4 GB (the threshold was cut for technical reasons). If, upon its
startup, the WinRoute Firewall Engine detects that the cache size exceeds 2047 MB,
the size is changed to the allowed value automatically.
3. If the maximum cache size set is larger than the free space on the corresponding
disk, the cache is not initialized and the following error is recorded in the Error log
(see chapter 22.8).
Max HTTP object size
maximal size of the object that can be stored in cache.
With respect to statistics, the highest number of requests are for small objects (i.e. HTML
pages, images, etc.). Big sized objects, such as archives (that are usually downloaded at
once), would require too much memory in the cache.
Cache Options
Advanced options where cache behavior can be defined.
•Continue aborted download — tick this option to enable automatic download of
objects that have been aborted by the user (using the Stop button in a browser).
Users often abort downloads for slow pages. If any user attempts to open the
same page again, the page will be available in the cache and downloads will be
much faster.
•Cache responses ’302 Redirect’ — this option accelerates connection to redirected
web pages.
Under usual circumstances, 302 Redirect responses are not cached. HTTP proto-
col’s return code 302 stands for temporary redirection — such redirection can be
canceled any time or the target URL can change. If user applies the cached re-
sponse to open a web page, the client can be redirected to an obsolete or invalid
URL.
•Use server supplied Time-To-Live — objects will be cached for time specified by
the Web server from which they are downloaded. If TTL is not specified by the
server, the default TTL will be used (see the HTTP protocol TTL item).
8.5 HTTP cache
127
Warning
Some web servers may attempt to bypass the cache by too short/long TTL.
•Ignore server Cache-Control directive —WinRoute will ignore directives for cache
control of Web pages.
Pages often include a directive that the page will not be saved into the cache.
This directive page may be misused for example to bypass the cache. Enable
the Ignore server Cache-Control directive option to make WinRoute accept only
no-store and private directives.
Note: WinRoute examines HTTP header directives of responses, not Web pages.
•Always validate file in cache — with each query WinRoute will check the server for
updates of objects stored in the cache (regardless of whether the client demands
this).
Note: Clients can always require a check for updates from the Web server (regardless of the
cache settings). Use combination of the Ctrl and the F5 keys to do this using either the Internet
Explorer or the Firefox/SeaMonkey browser. You can set browsers so that they will check
for updates automatically whenever a certain page is opened (then you will only refresh the
particular page).
URL Specific Settings
The default cache TTL of an object is not necessarily convenient for each page. You may
require not to cache an object or shorten its TTL (i.e. for pages that are accessed daily).
Use the URL specific settings button to open a dialog where TTL for a particular URL can be
defined.
Figure 8.17 HTTP cache — specific settings for URL
Chapter 8 Configuration of network services
128
Rules within this dialog are ordered in a list where the rules are read one by one from the top
downwards (use the arrow buttons on the right side of the window to reorder the rules).
Description
Text comment on the entry (informational purpose only)
URL
URL for which cache TTL will be specified. URLs can have the following forms:
•complete URL (i.e. www.kerio.com/us/index.html)
•substring using wildcard matching (i.e. *news.com*)
•server name (i.e. www.kerio.com) — represents any URL included at the server
(the string will be substituted for www.kerio.com/*automatically.
TTL
TTL of objects matching with the particular URL.
The 0 days, 0 hours option means that objects will not be cached.
Cache status and administration
WinRoute allows monitoring of the HTTP cache status as well as manipulation with objects in
the cache (viewing and removing).
At the bottom of the Cache tab, basic status information is provided such as the current
cache size occupied and efficiency of the cache. The efficiency status stands for number of
objects kept in the cache (it is not necessary to download these objects from the server) in
proportion to the total number of queries (since the startup of the WinRoute Firewall Engine).
The efficiency of the cache depends especially on user behavior and habits (if users visit certain
webpages regularly, if any websites are accessed by multiple users, etc.) and, in a manner, it
can be also affected by the configuration parameters described above. If the efficiency of
the cache is permanently low (less than 5 per cent), it is recommended to change the cache
configuration.
Figure 8.18 HTTP cache status information
Use the Manage cache content... button to open a dialog where objects kept in cache can be
viewed, searched and/or removed.
To view objects in cache, specify the searched object in the URL entry. Objects can be specified
either by an absolute URL (without protocol) — e.g. www.kerio.com/image/menu.gif or
as a URL substring with *(substituting any number of any symbols and characters) and ?
(question mark substitutes a single character or symbol) wildcard symbols.
8.5 HTTP cache
129
Figure 8.19 HTTP cache administration dialog
Example
Search for the *ker?o*string lists all objects with URL matching the specification, such as
kerio,kerbo, etc.
Each line with an object includes URL of the object, its size in bytes (B) and number of hours
representing time left to the expiration. To keep the list simple and well-organized, up to 100
items are displayed at a single page. The Previous and Next buttons can be used for browsing
through the list pages.
The Remove button can be used to delete the selected object from the cache.
Hint
By clicking and dragging or by clicking and holding the Ctrl or Shift key, it is possible to select
multiple objects.
130
Chapter 9
Bandwidth Limiter
The main problem of shared Internet connection is when one or more users download or
upload big volume of data and occupy great part of the line connected to the Internet (so
called bandwidth). The other users are ten limited by slower Internet connection or also may
be affected by failures of certain services (e.g. if the maximal response time is exceeded).
The gravest problems arise when the line is overloaded so much that certain network services
(such as mailserver, web server or VoIP) must be limited or blocked. This means that, by data
downloads or uploads, even a single user may endanger functionality of the entire network.
The WinRoute’s Bandwidth Limiter module introduces a solution of the most common prob-
lems associated with overloads of the Internet connection. This module is capable of recog-
nizing connections where big data volumes are transmitted and it reserves certain part of the
line’s capacity for these transmissions. The remaining capacity is reserved for the other traffic
(where big data volumes are not transmitted but where for example response time may play
a role).
9.1 How the bandwidth limiter works and how to use it
The Bandwidth Limiter module provides two basic functions:
Speed limits for big data volumes transmissions
WinRoute monitors all connections established between the local network and the Inter-
net. If a connection is considered as a transmission of big data volume, it reduces speed
of such transmission to a defined value so that the other traffic is not affected. The
bandwidth limiter does not apply to local traffic.
Note: Bandwidth limiting does not depend on traffic rules.
Speed limits for users with their quota exceeded
Users who have exceeded their quota for transmitted amount of data are logically consid-
ered as those who are often download or upload big data volumes. WinRoute enables to
reduce speed of data transmission for these users so that other users and network ser-
vices are not affected by their network activities. This restriction is automatically applied
to users who exceed a quota (see chapter 15.1).
9.2 Bandwidth Limiter configuration
The Bandwidth Limiter parameters can be set under Configuration →Bandwidth Limiter.
9.2 Bandwidth Limiter configuration
131
Figure 9.1 Bandwidth Limiter configuration
The Bandwidth Limiter module enables to define reduction of speed of incoming traffic (i.e.
from the Internet to the local network) and of outgoing data (i.e. from the local network to the
Internet) for transmissions of big data volumes and for users with their quota exceeded. These
limits do not depend on each other. This means it is possible to use one of these functions,
both or none.
Warning
In the Bandwidth Limiter module, speed is measured in kilobytes per second (KB/s). while ISPs
usually use kilobits per second (kbps,kbit/s or kb/s), or in megabits per second (Mbps,Mbit/s
or Mb/s). The conversion pattern is 1 KB/s = 8 kbit/s.
A256 kbit/s line’s speed is 32 KB/s, a 1 Mbit/s line’s speed is 128 KB/s.
Setting limit values
The top of the dialog box contains a section where limits for transfers of big data volumes
can be set. These values determine bandwidth that will be reserved for these transfers. The
remaining bandwidth is available for other traffic.
Tests have discovered that the optimal usage of the Internet line capacity is reached if the
value is set to approximately 90 per cent of the bandwidth. It the values are higher, the
bandwidth limiter is not effective (not enough speed is reserved for other connections and
Chapter 9 Bandwidth Limiter
132
services if too much big data volumes are transferred). If they are lower, full line capacity is
often not employed.
Warning
For optimal configuration, it is necessary to operate with real capacity of the line. This value
may differ from the information provided by ISP. One method of how to find out the real value
of the line capacity is to monitor traffic charts (see chapter 20.2) when you can be almost sure
that the line is fully employed.
At the bottom of the dialog box, download and upload speed limits for users with exceeded
traffic quota can be set. The bandwidth defined will be shared by all users with their quota
exceeded. This implies that the total traffic volume of these users is limited by the bandwidth
value set here.
No optimal values are known for these speed limits. WinRoute administrators decide them-
selves what part of the bandwidth will be reserved for these users. It is recommended to set
the values so that activities of these users do not affect other users and services.
Note: It is also possible to block any traffic for a particular users who exceed their quota.
The restriction described above are applied only if the Don’t block further traffic (Only limit
bandwidth...) action is set in configuration of the particular user account. For details, see
chapter 15.1.
Advanced Options
Click on Advanced to define advanced Bandwidth Limiter parameters. These parameters ap-
ply only to large data volume transfers. They do not apply to users with exceeded quota
(bandwidth values set for these users are applied without exception).
Services
Certain services may seem to perform large data volume transfers, although, in fact, they
don’t. Internet telephony (Voice over IP — VoIP) is a typical example. It is possible to
define exceptions for such services so that the bandwidth limiter does not apply to them.
It may also be desired to apply bandwidth limiter only to certain network services (e.g.
when it is helpful to limit transfers via FTP and HTTP).
The Services tab enables definition of services to which bandwidth limiter will be applied:
•Apply to all services — the limits will be applied to all traffic between the local
network and the Internet.
•Apply to the selected services only — the limits will apply only to the selected
network services. Traffic performed by other services is not limited.
•Apply to all except the selected services — services specified in this section will be
excluded from the bandwidth limiter restrictions, whereas the limiter will apply
to any other services.
Click on Select services to open a dialog box where network services can be selected. Hold
the Ctrl or the Shift key to select multiple services. All services defined in Configuration
→Definitions →Services are available (for details, refer to chapter sect-services"/>).
9.2 Bandwidth Limiter configuration
133
Figure 9.2 Bandwidth Limiter — network services
Figure 9.3 Bandwidth Limiter — selection of network services
IP Addresses and Time Interval
It may be also helpful to apply bandwidth limiter only to certain hosts (for example, it
may be undesired to limit a mailserver in the local network or communication with the
corporate web server located in the Internet). This exclusive IP group may contain any IP
Chapter 9 Bandwidth Limiter
134
addresses across the local network and the Internet. Where user workstations use fixed
IP addresses, it is also possible to apply this function to individual users.
It is also possible to apply bandwidth limiter to a particular time interval (e.g. in work
hours).
These parameters can be set on the Constraints tab.
Figure 9.4 Bandwidth Limiter — IP Addresses and Time Range
At the top of the Constraints tab, select a method how bandwidth will be applied to IP
addresses and define the IP address group:
•Apply to all traffic — the IP address group specification is inactive it is irrelevant.
•Apply to the selected address group only — the bandwidth limiter will be applied
only if at least one IP address involved in a connection belongs to the address
group. The other traffic will not be limited.
•Apply to all except the selected address group — the bandwidth limiter will not be
applied if at least one IP address involved in a connection belongs to the address
group. Any other traffic will be limited.
In the lower section of the Constraints tab, a time range within which the bandwidth
would be limited can be set. Click Edit to edit the selected interval or to create a new one
(details in chapter 14.2).
Setting of parameters for detection of large data volume transfers
The Advanced tab enables setting of parameters that will be used for detection of trans-
missions of large data volume — the minimal volume of transmitted data and inactivity
time interval. The default values (200 KB and 5 sec) are optimized in accordance with
long-term testing in full action.
Caution! Changes of these values may reduce Bandwidth Limiter performance dramati-
9.3 Detection of connections with large data volume transferred
135
cally. With exception of special conditions (testing purposes) it is highly recommended not
to change the default values!
Figure 9.5 Bandwidth Limiter — setting parameters for detection of large data volume transfers
For detailed description of the detection of large data volume transmissions, refer to
chapter 9.3.
9.3 Detection of connections with large data volume transferred
This chapter provides description of the method used by the Bandwidth Limiter module to
detect connections where large data volumes are transmitted. This description is an extra
information which is not necessary for usage of the Bandwidth Limiter module.
Network traffic is different for individual services. For example, web browsers usually access
sites by opening one or more connections and using them to transfer certain amount of data
(objects included at the page) and then closes the connections. Terminal services (e.g. Telnet,
SSH, etc.) typically use an open connection to transfer small data volumes in longer intervals.
Large data volume transfers typically uses the method where the data flow continuously with
minimal intervals between the transfer impulses.
Two basic parameters are tested in each connection: volume of transferred data and duration
of the longest idle interval. If the specified data volume is reached without the idleness interval
having been thresholded, the connection is considered as a transfer of large data volume and
corresponding limits are applied.
If the idle time exceeds the defined value, the transferred data counter is set to zero and the
process starts anew. This implies that each connection that once reaches the defined values is
considered as a large data volume transfer.
The value of the limit for the amount of data transmitted and the minimal idleness period are
configuration parameters of the Bandwidth Limiter (see chapter 9.2).
Chapter 9 Bandwidth Limiter
136
Examples:
The detection of connections transferring large data volumes will be better understood
through the following examples. The default configuration of the detection is as follows:
at least 200 KB of data must be transferred while there is no interruption for 5 sec or more.
1. The connection at figure 9.6 is considered as a transmission of large data volume after
transfer of the third load of data. At this point, the connection has transferred 200 KB of
data while the longest idleness interval has been only 3 sec.
Figure 9.6 Connection example — short idleness intervals
2. Connection at figure 9.7 is not considered as a large data volume transfer, since after
150 KB of data have been transferred before an only 5 sec long idleness interval and then,
only other 150 KB of data have been transmitted within the connection.
Figure 9.7 Connection example — long idleness interval
3. The connection shown at figure 9.8 transfers 100 KB of data before a 6 sec idleness in-
terval. For this reason, the counter of transferred data is set to zero. Other three blocks
of data of 100 KB are then transmitted. When the third block of data is transferred, only
200 KB of transmitted data are recorded at the counter (since the last long idleness inter-
val). Since there is only a 3 sec idleness interval between transmission of the second and
the third block of data, the connection is considered as a large data volume transfer.
Figure 9.8 Connection example — long idleness interval at the beginning of the transfer
137
Chapter 10
User Authentication
WinRoute allows administrators to monitor connections (packet, connection, Web pages or
FTP objects and command filtering) related to each user. The username in each filtering rule
represents the IP address of the host(s) from which the user is connected (i.e. all hosts the
user is currently connected from). This implies that a user group represents all IP addresses
its members are currently connected from.
Besides access restrictions, user authentication can be used also for monitoring of their activ-
ities in the Kerio StaR interface (see chapter 21), in logs (see chapter 22), in the list of opened
connections (see chapter 19.2) and in the overview of hosts and users (see chapter 19.1). If
there is no user connected from a certain host, only the IP address of the host will be displayed
in the logs and statistics. In statistics, this host’s traffic will be included in the group of not
logged in users.
10.1 Firewall User Authentication
Any user with their own account in WinRoute can authenticate at the firewall (regardless their
access rights). Users can connect:
•Manually — by opening the WinRoute web interface in their browser
https://server:4081/ or http://server:4080/
(the name of the server and the port numbers are examples only — see chapter 11).
It is also possible to authenticate for viewing of the web statistics (see chapter 21) at
https://server:4081/star or http://server:4080/star
Note: Login to the Web Administration interface at
https://server:4081/admin or http://server:4080/admin
is not equal to user authentication at the firewall (i.e. the user does not get authenti-
cated at the firewall by the login)!
•Automatically — IP addresses of hosts from which they will be authenticated auto-
matically can be associated with individual users. This actually means that whenever
traffic coming from the particular host is detected, WinRoute assumes that it is cur-
rently used by the particular user , and the user is considered being authenticated
from the IP address. However, users may authenticate from other hosts (using the
methods described above).
IP addresses for automatic authentication can be set during definition of user account
(see chapter 15.1).
This authentication method is not recommended for cases where hosts are used by
multiple users (user’s identity might be misused easily).
Chapter 10 User Authentication
138
•Redirection — when accessing any website (unless access to this page is explicitly
allowed to unauthenticated users — see chapter 12.2).
Login by re-direction is performed in the following way: user enters URL pages that
he/she intends to open in the browser. WinRoute detects whether the user has already
authenticated. If not, WinRoute will re-direct the user to the login page automatically.
After a successful login, the user is automatically re-directed to the requested page or
to the page including the information where the access was denied.
Note: Users will be redirected to a secured or unsecured web interface according to
the fact which version of web interface is allowed (see chapter 11.1). If both versions
are allowed, the secured web interface will be used.
•Using NTLM — if Internet Explorer or Firefox/SeaMonkey is used and the user is au-
thenticated in a Windows NT domain or Active Directory, the user can be authenticated
automatically (the login page will not be displayed). For details, see chapter 25.3.
User authentication advanced options
Login/logout parameters can be set on the Authentication Options tab under Users and Groups
→Users.
Figure 10.1 User Authentication Options
10.1 Firewall User Authentication
139
Redirection to the authentication page
If the Always require users to be authenticated when accessing web pages option is en-
abled, user authentication will be required for access to any website (unless the user is
already authenticated). The method of the authentication request depends on the method
used by the particular browser to connect to the Internet:
•Direct access — the browser will be automatically redirected to the authentication
page of the WinRoute’s web interface (see chapter 11.2) and, if the authentication
is successful, to the solicited web page.
•WinRoute proxy server — the browser displays the authentication dialog and then,
if the authentication is successful, it opens the solicited web page.
If the Always require users to be authenticated when accessing web pages option is dis-
abled, user authentication will be required only for Web pages which are not available
(are denied by URL rules) to unauthenticated users (refer to chapter 12.2).
Note: User authentication is used both for accessing a Web page (or/and other services)
and for monitoring of activities of individual users (the Internet is not anonymous).
Force non-transparent proxy server authentication
Under usual circumstances, a user connected to the firewall from a particular computer
is considered as authenticated by the IP address of the host until the moment when they
log out manually or are logged out automatically for inactivity. However, if the client
station allows multiple users connected to the computer at a moment (e.g. Microsoft Ter-
minal Services,Citrix Presentation Server orFast user switching on Windows XP,Windows
Server 2003,Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008), the firewall requires authentica-
tion only from the user who starts to work on the host as the first. The other users will
be authenticated as this user.
In case of HTTP and HTTPS, this technical obstruction can be passed by. In web browsers
of all clients of the multi-user system, set connection to the Internet via the WinRoute’s
proxy server (for details, see chapter 8.4), and enable the Enable non-transparent proxy
server option in WinRoute. The proxy server will require authentication for each new
session of the particular browser.5.
Forcing user authentication on the proxy server for initiation of each session may bother
users working on “single-user” hosts. Therefore, it is desirable to force such authentica-
tion only for hosts used by multiple users. For this purpose, you can use the Apply only
for these IP addresses option.
Automatic authentication (NTLM)
If the Enable user authentication automatically... option is checked and Internet Explorer
(version 5.01 or later) or Firefox/SeaMonkey (core version 1.3 or later) is used, it is possible
to authenticate the user automatically using the NTLM method.
This means that the browser does not require username and password and simply uses
the identity of the first user connected to Windows. However, the NTLM method is not
Session is every single period during which a browser is running. For example, in case of Internet Explorer,Firefox and
5
Opera, a session is terminated whenever all windows and tabs of the browser are closed, while in case of SeaMonkey,
a session is not closed unless the Quick Launch program is stopped (an icon is displayed in the toolbar’s notification
area when the program is running).
Chapter 10 User Authentication
140
available for other operating systems.
For details, refer to chapter 25.3.
Automatically logout users when they are inactive
Timeout is a time interval (in minutes) of allowed user inactivity. When this period ex-
pires, the user is automatically logged out from the firewall. The default timeout value is
120 minutes (2 hours).
This situation often comes up when a user forgets to logout from the firewall. Therefore,
it is not recommended to disable this option, otherwise login data of a user who forgot
to logout might be misused by an unauthorized user.
141
Chapter 11
Web Interface
WinRoute includes a special web server which provides an interface where statistics can be
viewed (Kerio StaR), as well as for setting of some user account parameters and for firewall
administration via web browser (Web Administration). This Web server is available over SSL or
using standard HTTP with no encryption (both versions include identical pages).
Use the following URL (’server’ refers to the name or IP of the WinRoute host, 4080 repre-
sents a standard HTTP interface port) to open the unsecured version of the web interface.
https://server:4080/
To use the encrypted version specify the HTTPS protocol and number of the port of the en-
crypted Web interface (default is 4081):
https://server:4081/
This chapter addresses setting of parameters for the web interface in the WinRoute’s admin-
istration program. Kerio StaR and user web interface are addressed in detail in the Kerio
WinRoute Firewall — User’s Guide.
11.1 Web interface preferences
To define basic WinRoute Web interface parameters go to the Web Interface folder in Configu-
ration →Advanced Options.
Note: In WinRoute for Windows, the Web Interfaces tab includes also options for Kerio SSL-VPN.
For detailed information on this component, see chapter 24.
Enable Web Interface (HTTP)
Use this option to open the unsecured version (HTTP) of the Web interface The default
port for this unsecured interface is 4080.
Note: The main disadvantage of usage of the unsecured web interface is that the network
traffic may be tapped and user login data might be misused. Therefore, the secured web
interface should be preferred.
Enable secured Web Interface (HTTPS)
Use this option to open the secured version (HTTPS) of the Web interface The default port
for this interface is 4081.
Name of the server on which WinRoute is running
Server DNS name that will be used for purposes of the Web interface (e.g.
server.company.com).
Chapter 11 Web Interface
142
Figure 11.1 Configuration of WinRoute’s Web Interface
The name need not be necessarily identical with the host name, however, there must exist
an appropriate entry in DNS for proper name resolution. The SSL certificate for the secure
web interface (see below) should be also issued for the server (i.e. the server name).
The server name is also used in case that WinRoute needs redirect the browser to the
login page (for example if an unauthenticated user attempts to open a web page where
authentication is required — see chapters 10.1 and 12.2).
Notes:
1. If all clients accessing the web interface use the DNS module in WinRoute as a DNS
server, there is no need to add the server name to DNS. The name is already known
and combined with the name of the local domain — see chapter 8.1).
2. In the Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance edition, name of the server
defined on the System Configuration tab is set automatically in this item — see chap-
ter 16.1.
Allow access only from these IP addresses
Select IP addresses which will always be allowed to connect to the Web interface (usually
hosts in the local network). You can also click the Edit button to edit a selected group of
IP addresses or to create a new IP group (details in chapter 14.1).
Access restrictions are applied to both unencrypted and encrypted versions of the Web
interface.
Advanced parameters for the Web interface can be set upon clicking on the Advanced button.
11.1 Web interface preferences
143
Configuration of ports of the Web Interface
Use the TCP ports section to set ports for unencrypted and encrypted versions of the Web
interface (default ports are 4080 for the unencrypted and 4081 for the encrypted version of
the Web interface).
Figure 11.2 Configuration of ports in WinRoute’s Web Interface
Hint: If no WWW server is running on the WinRoute host, the standard port of the HTTP
protocol (i.e. 80) can be used for the unsecured web interface and the standard port of the
HTTPS protocol (i.e. port 443) for the secured web interface. If standard ports are used, the
port number is not necessarily required in URLs for pages of the web interface.
However, in WinRoute for Windows, the standard HTTPS port (443) uses the Clientless SSL-VPN
interface (see chapter 24). Therefore, it cannot be used for secured web interface in the default
configuration.
Warning
If any of the entries are specified by a port which is already used by another service or ap-
plication, and the Apply button (in Configuration →Advanced Options) is clicked, WinRoute
will accept this port, however, the Web interface will not run at the port and an error in the
following format will be reported in the Error log (see chapter 22.8):
Socket error: Unable to bind socket for service to port 80.
(5002) Failed to start service "WebInterface"
bound to address 192.168.1.10.
If you are not sure that specified ports are free, check the Error log immediately after clicking
Apply to find out whether the corresponding error has been logged.
Chapter 11 Web Interface
144
SSL Certificate for the Web Interface
The principle of an encrypted WinRoute Web interface is based on the fact that all communi-
cation between the client and server is encrypted to protect it from wiretapping and misuse
of the transmitted data. The SSL protocol uses an asymmetric encryption first to facilitate
exchange of the symmetric encryption key which will be later used to encrypt the transmitted
data.
The asymmetric cipher uses two keys: a public one for encrypting and a private one for de-
crypting. As their names suggest, the public (encrypting) key is available to anyone wishing to
establish a connection with the server, whereas the private (decrypting) key is available only
to the server and must remain secret. The client, however, also needs to be able to identify
the server (to find out if it is truly the server and not an impostor). For this purpose there is
a certificate, which contains the public server key, the server name, expiration date and other
details. To ensure the authenticity of the certificate it must be certified and signed by a third
party, the certification authority.
Communication between the client and server then follows this scheme: the client generates
a symmetric encryption key for and encrypts it with the public server key (obtained from the
server certificate). The server decrypts it with its private key (kept solely by the server). Thus
the symmetric key is known only to the server and client. This key is then used for encryption
and decipher any other traffic.
Generate or Import Certificate
During WinRoute installation, a testing certificate for the SSL-secured Web interface is created
automatically (it is stored in the sslcert subdirectory under the WinRoute’s installation di-
rectory, in the server.crt file; the private key for the certificate is saved as server.key).
The certificate created is unique. However, it is issued against a non-existing server name and
it is not issued by a trustworthy certificate authority. This certificate is intended to ensure
functionality of the secured Web interface (usually for testing purposes) until a new certificate
is created or a certificate issued by a public certificate authority is imported.
Click on the Change SSL certificate (in the dialog for advanced settings for the Web interface)
to view the dialog with the current server certificate. By selecting the Field (certificate en-
try) option you can view information either about the certificate issuer or about the subject
represented by your server.
You can obtain your own certificate, which verifies your server’s identity, by two means.
You can create your own self-signed certificate. Click Generate Certificate in the dialog where
current server status is displayed. Insert required data about the server and your company
into the dialog entries. Only entries marked with an asterisk (*) are required.
Click on the OK button to view the Server SSL certificate dialog. The certificate will be started
automatically (you will not need to restart your operating system). When created, the certifi-
cate is saved as server.crt and the corresponding private key as server.key.
11.1 Web interface preferences
145
Figure 11.3 SSL certificate of WinRoute’s Web interface
Figure 11.4 Creating a new “self-signed” certificate for WinRoute’s Web interface
A new (self-signed) certificate is unique. It is created by your company, addressed to your
company and based on the name of your server. Unlike the testing version of the certificate,
this certificate ensures your clients security, as it is unique and the identity of your server
is guaranteed by it. Clients will be warned only about the fact that the certificate was not
issued by a trustworthy certification authority. However, they can install the certificate in the
browser without worrying since they are aware of who and why created the certificate. Secure
communication is then ensured for them and no warning will be displayed again because your
certificate has all it needs.
Another option is to purchase a full certificate from a public certification authority (e.g.
Chapter 11 Web Interface
146
Verisign,Thawte,SecureSign,SecureNet,Microsoft Authenticode, etc.).
To import a certificate, open the certificate file (*.crt) and the file including the correspond-
ing private key (*.key). These files are stored in sslcert under the WinRoute’s installation
directory.
The process of certification is quite complex and requires a certain expertise. For detailed
instructions contact Kerio technical support.
11.2 User authentication at the web interface
User authentication is required for access to the WinRoute’s web interface. Any user with their
own account in WinRoute can authenticate to the web interface. Depending on the right to
view statistics (see chapter 15.2), either Kerio StaR is opened or a page with status information
and personal preferences is displayed upon logon.
If more than one Active Directory domain are used (see chapter 15.4), the following rules apply
to the user name:
•Local user account — the name must be specified without the domain (e.g. admin),
•Primary domain — missing domain is acceptable in the name specification (e.g.
jsmith), but it is also possible to include the domain (e.g. jsmith@company.com),
•Other domains — the name specified must include the domain
(e.g. drdolittle@usoffice.company.com).
If none or just one Active Directory domain is mapped, all users can authenticate by their
usernames without the domain specified.
Note: Authentication at the web interface is a basic user authentication method at the firewall.
Other authentication methods are described in chapter 10.1.
147
Chapter 12
HTTP and FTP filtering
WinRoute provides a wide range of features to filter traffic using HTTP and FTP protocols.
These protocols are the most spread and the most used in the Internet.
Here are the main purposes of HTTP and FTP content filtering:
•to block access to undesirable Web sites (i.e. pages that do not relate to employees’
work)
•to block certain types of files (i.e. illegal content)
•to block or to limit viruses, worms and Trojan horses
Let’s focus on filtering options featured by WinRoute. For their detailed description, read the
following chapters.
HTTP protocol
— Web pages filtering:
•access limitations according to URL (substrings contained in URL addresses)
•blocking of certain HTML items (i.e. scripts, ActiveX objects, etc.)
•filtering based on classification by the Kerio Web Filter module (worldwide website
classification database)
•limitations based on occurrence of denied words (strings)
•antivirus control of downloaded objects
FTP protocol
— control of access to FTP servers:
•access to certain FTP servers is denied
•limitations based on or file names
•transfer of files is limited to one direction only (i.e. download only)
•certain FTP commands are blocked
•antivirus control of transferred files
Note: WinRoute provides only tools for filtering and access limitations. Decisions on which
websites and files will be blocked must be made by the administrator (or another qualified
person).
12.1 Conditions for HTTP and FTP filtering
For HTTP and FTP content filtering, the following conditions must be met:
1. Traffic must be controlled by an appropriate protocol inspector.
Chapter 12 HTTP and FTP filtering
148
An appropriate protocol inspector is activated automatically unless its use is denied by
traffic rules. For details, refer to chapter 7.3.
2. Connections must not be encrypted. SSL encrypted traffic (HTTPS and FTPS protocols)
cannot be monitored. In this case you can block access to certain servers using traffic
rules (see chapter 7.3).
3. FTP protocols cannot be filtered if the secured authentication (SASO) is used.
4. Both HTTP and FTP rules are applied also when the WinRoute’s proxy server is used (then,
condition 1 is irrelevant). However, FTP protocol cannot be filtered if the parent proxy
server is used (for details, see chapter 8.4). In such a case, FTP rules are not applied.
5. If the proxy server is used (see chapter 8.4), It is also possible to filter HTTPS servers (e.g.
https://secure.kerio.com/). However, it is not possible to filter individual objects at
these servers.
12.2 URL Rules
These rules allow the administrator to limit access to Web pages with URLs that meet certain
criteria. They include other functions, such as filtering of web pages by occurrence forbidden
words, blocking of specific items (scripts, active objects, etc.) and antivirus switch for certain
pages.
To define URL rules, go to the URL Rules tab in Configuration →Content Filtering →HTTP
Policy.
Figure 12.1 URL Rules
Rules in this section are tested from the top of the list downwards (you can order the list
entries using the arrow buttons at the right side of the dialog window). If a requested URL
passes through all rules without any match, access to the site is allowed. All URLs are allowed
by default (unless denied by a URL rule).
Note: URLs which do not match with any URL rule are available for any authenticated user
(any traffic permitted by default). To allow accessing only a specific web page group and block
12.2 URL Rules
149
access to other web pages, a rule denying access to any URL must be placed at the end of the
rule list.
The following items (columns) can be available in the URL Rules tab:
•Description — description of a particular rule (for reference only). You can use the
checking box next to the description to enable/disable the rule (for example, for a cer-
tain time).
•Action — action which will be performed if all conditions of the rule are met (Permit —
access to the page will be allowed, Deny — connection to the page will be denied and
denial information will be displayed, Drop — access will be denied and a blank page
will be opened, Redirect — user will be redirected to the page specified in the rule).
•Condition — condition which must be met to apply the rule (e.g. URL matches certain
criteria, page is included in a particular category of the Kerio Web Filter database, etc.).
•Properties — advanced options for the rule (e.g. anti-virus check, content filtering,
etc.).
The following columns are hidden by default. To view them, use the Modify columns function
in the context menu — for details, see chapter 3.2.
•IP Groups — IP group to which the rule is applied. The IP groups include addresses of
clients (workstations of users who connect to the Internet through WinRoute).
•Valid Time — time interval during which the rule is applied.
•Users List — list of users and user groups to which the rule applies.
Note: The default WinRoute installation includes several predefined URL rules. These rules are
disabled by default. These rules are available to the WinRoute administrators.
URL Rules Definition
To create a new rule, select a rule after which the new rule will be added, and click Add. You
can later use the arrow buttons to reorder the rule list.
Use the Add button to open a dialog for creating a new rule.
Open the General tab to set general rules and actions to be taken.
Description
Description of the rule (information for the administrator).
If user accessing the URL is
Select which users this rule will be applied on:
•any user — for all users (no authentication required).
selected user(s) — for selected users or/and user groups who have authenticated
to the firewall.
Note:
1. It is often desired that the firewall requires user authentication before letting
them open a web page. This can be set on the Authentication Options tab in
Users (refer to chapter 15.1). Using the do not require authentication option,
Chapter 12 HTTP and FTP filtering
150
Figure 12.2 URL Rule — basic parameters
for example a rule allowing access to certain pages without authentication
can be defined.
2. Unless authentication is required, the do not require authentication option is
ineffective.
•selected user(s) — applied on selected users or/and user groups.
Click on the Set button to select users or groups (hold the Ctrl and the Shift keys
to select more that one user /group at once).
Note: In rules, username represents IP address of the host fro which the user is
currently connected to the firewall (for details, see chapter 10.1).
And URL matches criteria
Specification of URL (or URL group) on which this rule will be applied:
•URL begins with — this item can include either entire URL
(i.e. www.kerio.com/index.html) or only a substring of a URL using an asterisk
12.2 URL Rules
151
(wildcard matching) to substitute any number of characters (i.e. *.kerio.com*)
Server names represent any URL at a corresponding server (www.kerio.com/*).
•is in URL group — selection of a URL group (refer to chapter 14.4) which the URL
should match with
•is rated by Kerio Web Filter rating system — the rule will be applied on all pages
matched with a selected category by the Kerio Web Filter module.
Click on the Select Rating... button to select from Kerio Web Filter categories. For
details, refer to chapter 12.3.
•is any URL where server is given as IP address — by enabling this option users
will not be able to bypass URL based filters by connecting to Web sites by IP
address rather than domain name. This trick is often used by servers offering
illegal downloads.
Warning
If access to servers specified by IP addresses is not denied, users can bypass URL
rules where servers are specified by names.
Action
Selection of an action that will be taken whenever a user accesses a URL meeting a rule:
•Allow access to the Web site
•Deny access to the Web site — requested page will be blocked. The user will be
informed that the access is denied or a blank page will be displayed (according
to settings in the Advanced tab — see below).
Tick the Log option to log all pages meeting this rule in the Filter log (see chapter 22.9).
Go to the Advanced tab to define more conditions for the rule or/and to set options for denied
pages.
Valid at time interval
Selection of the time interval during which the rule will be valid (apart from this inter-
val the rule will be ignored). Use the Edit button to edit time intervals (for details see
chapter 14.2).
Valid for IP address group
Selection of IP address group on which the rule will be applied. Client (source) addresses
are considered. Use the Any option to make the rule independent of clients.
Click on the Edit button to edit IP groups (for details see chapter 14.1).
Valid if MIME type is
The rule will be valid for a certain MIME type only (for example, text/html — HTML
documents, image/jpeg — images in the JPEG format, etc.).
You can either select one of the predefined MIME types or define a new one. An asterisk
substitutes any subtype (i.e. image/*). An asterisk stands for any MIME type — the rule
will be independent of the MIME type.
Chapter 12 HTTP and FTP filtering
152
Figure 12.3 URL Rule — advanced parameters
Denial options
Advanced options for denied pages. Whenever a user attempts to open a page that is
denied by the rule, WinRoute will display:
•A page informing the user that access to the required page is denied as it is
blocked by the firewall. This page can also include an explanation of the denial
(the Denial text item).
The Unlock button will be displayed in the page informing about the denial if the
Users can Unlock this rule is enabled. Using this button users can force WinRoute
to open the required page even though this site is denied by a URL rule. The rule
will be opened for certain time (10 minutes by default). Each user can unlock
a limited number of denied pages (up to 10 pages at once). All unlocked pages
are logged in the Security log (see chapter 22.11).
Rules can be unlocked only by users with corresponding rights (see chapter 15.1).
This implies that unauthenticated (anonymous) users can never unlock rules.
Note:
1. If any modifications are done within URL rules, all unlock rules are removed
immediately.
2. For security reasons, no HTML tags are allowed in the restriction text. If the
plaintext format is not sufficient, it is recommended to use redirection to
12.2 URL Rules
153
another page (see below).
•A blank page — user will not be informed why access to the required page was
denied.
•Another page — user’s browser will be redirected to the specified URL. This op-
tion can be helpful for example to define a custom page with a warning that
access to the particular page is denied.
The Content Rules tab allows to set rules for filtering of certain web page elements. Parameters
on this tab can be set only for rules allowing access (on the General tab, the Allow access to
the web site option is checked).
Figure 12.4 Options for Websites with content meeting a URL rule
WWW content scanning options
In this section you can define advanced parameters for filtering of objects contained in
web pages which meet the particular rule (for details refer to chapter 15.2). Specific
settings in URL rules beat user account settings.
Deny Web pages containing ...
Use this option to deny users to access Web pages containing words/strings defined on
the Forbidden Words tab in the Configuration/Content Filtering →HTTP Policy.
For detailed information on forbidden words, see chapter 12.4.
Scan content for viruses according to scanning rules
Antivirus check according to settings in the Configuration →Content Filtering →Antivirus
section will be performed (see chapter 13.3) if this option is enabled.
Chapter 12 HTTP and FTP filtering
154
HTTP Inspection Advanced Options
Click on the Advanced button in the HTTP Policy tab to open a dialog where parameters for
the HTTP inspection module can be set.
Figure 12.5 HTTP protocol inspector settings
Use the Enable HTTP Log and Enable Web Log options to enable/disable logging of HTTP
queries (opened web pages) to the HTTP log (see chapter 22.10) and to the Web log (refer to
chapter 22.14).
Log format can be chosen for the Enable HTTP Log item: Apache access log
(http://www.apache.org/) or Squid proxy log (http://www.squid-cache.org/). This may
be important especially when the log would be processed by a specific analysis tool.
Both HTTP and Web logs are enabled by default. The Apache option is selected by default for
its better reference.
Use the Apply filtering rules also for local server to specify whether content filtering rules will
be applied to local WWW servers which are available from the Internet (see chapter 7). This
option is disabled by default — the protocol inspector only scans HTTP protocol syntax and
performs logging of queries ( WWW pages) according to the settings.
12.3 Content Rating System (Kerio Web Filter)
The Kerio Web Filter module enables WinRoute to rate web page content. Each page is sorted
into predefined categories. Access to the page will be either permitted or denied according to
this classification.
Kerio Web Filter uses a dynamic worldwide database which includes URLs and classification of
web pages. This database is maintained by special servers that perform page ratings. When-
ever a user attempts to access a web page, WinRoute sends a request on the page rating.
12.3 Content Rating System (Kerio Web Filter)
155
According to the classification of the page the user will be either allowed or denied to access
the page. To speed up URL rating the data that have been once acquired can be stored in the
cache and kept for a certain period.
Note: A special license is bound with Kerio Web Filter (subscription). Unless WinRoute includes
subscription for this module, the module behaves as a trial version only (this means that it is
automatically disabled after 30 days from the WinRoute installation and options in the Kerio
Web Filter tab will not be available). For detailed information about the licensing policy, read
chapter 44.
Kerio Web Filter configuration
The Kerio Web Filter module can be set and configured through the Kerio Web Filter tab in
Configuration →Content Filtering →HTTP Policy.
Figure 12.6 Kerio Web Filter configuration
Enable Kerio Web Filter
use this option to enable/disable the Kerio Web Filter module for classification of web-
sites.
If Kerio Web Filter is disabled:
•the other options in the Kerio Web Filter tab are not available,
•all URL rules which use the Kerio Web Filter classification are disabled (for details,
refer to chapter 12.3).
Chapter 12 HTTP and FTP filtering
156
Categorize each page regardless of HTTP rules
If this option is enabled, Kerio Web Filter categorization will be applied to any web pages
(i.e. to all HTTP requests processed by the HTTP protocol inspector).
Categorization of all pages is necessary for statistics of the categories of visited web
pages (see chapter 21). If you do not intend to keep these statistics, it is recommended
disable this option (categorization of all web pages might be demanding and it might
decrease WinRoute performance).
Servers (Web sites) not to be rated by the module can be specified in Kerio Web Filter white list.
Use the Add button to open a dialog where a new item (server or a Web page) can be added.
Server
Use the Server item to specify web sites not to be classified by the Kerio Web Filter. The
following items can be specified:
•server name (e.g. www.kerio.com). Server name represents any URL at a corre-
sponding server,
•address of a particular webpage without protocol specification (http://) — e.g.
www.kerio.com/index.html,
•URL using wildcard matching (e.g. *.ker?o.*). An asterisk stands for any num-
ber of characters (even zero), a*.ker?o.*question-mark represents just one
symbol.
Description
Comments for the items defined. For reference only.
Kerio Web Filter use
To enable classification of Websites by the Kerio Web Filter module, this module must be
running and all corresponding parameters must be set.
Whenever WinRoute processes a URL rule that requires classification of pages, the Kerio Web
Filter module is activated. The usage will be better understood through the following example
that describes a rule denying all users to access pages containing job offers.
On the URL Rules tab in Configuration →Content Filtering →HTTP Rules, define a rule by using
image 12.7 as guidance:
The is rated by Kerio Web Filter rating system is considered the key parameter. The URL of each
opened page will be rated by the ISS OrangeWeb Filter module. Access to each page matching
with a rating category included in the database will be denied.
Use the Select Rating button to open a dialog where Kerio Web Filter rating categories can be
chosen. Select the Job Search / Job offers rating category (pages including job offers).
12.3 Content Rating System (Kerio Web Filter)
157
Figure 12.7 Kerio Web Filter rule
Chapter 12 HTTP and FTP filtering
158
Figure 12.8 Selection of Kerio Web Filter categories
Note:
1. You can define multiple URL rules that will use the Kerio Web Filter rating technology.
Multiple categories may be used for each rule.
2. We recommend you to unlock rules that use the Kerio Web Filter rating system (the Users
can Unlock this rule option in the Advanced tab). This option will allow users to unlock
pages blocked for incorrect classification. All unlock queries are logged into the Filter log
— here you can monitor whether unlock queries were appropriate or not.
12.4 Web content filtering by word occurrence
WinRoute can also filter Web pages that include undesirable words.
This is the filtering principle: Denied words are matched with values, called weight (repre-
sented by a whole positive integer). Weights of these words contained in a required page are
summed (weight of each word is counted only once regardless of how many times the word is
included in the page). If the total weight exceeds the defined limit (so called threshold value),
the page is blocked.
12.4 Web content filtering by word occurrence
159
So called forbidden words are used to filter out web pages containing undesirable words. URL
rules (see chapter 12.2) define how pages including forbidden content will be handled.
Warning
Definition of forbidden words and threshold value is ineffective unless corresponding URL
rules are set!
Definition of rules filtering by word occurrence
First, suppose that some forbidden words have been already defined and a threshold value
has been set (for details, see below).
On the URL Rules tab under Configuration →Content Filtering →HTTP Policy, create a rule (or
a set of rules) to allow access to the group of web pages which will be filtered by forbidden
words. Go to the Content Rules tab under HTTP Rule to enable the web content filter.
Take a rule that will filter all web sites by occurrence of forbidden words as an example.
•On the General tab, allow all users to access any web site.
Figure 12.9 A rule filtering web pages by word occurrence (allow access)
Chapter 12 HTTP and FTP filtering
160
•On the Content Rules tab, check the Deny Web pages containing... option to enable
filtering by word occurrence.
Figure 12.10 A rule filtering web pages by word occurrence (word filtering)
Word groups
To define word groups go to the Word Groups tab in Configuration →Content Filtering →
HTTP Policy, the Forbidden Words tab. Words are sorted into groups. This feature only makes
WinRoute easier to follow. All groups have the same priority and all of them are always tested.
Figure 12.11 Groups of forbidden words
12.4 Web content filtering by word occurrence
161
Individual groups and words included in them are displayed in form of trees. To enable
filtering of particular words use checkboxes located next to them. Unchecked words will be
ignored. Due to this function it is not necessary to remove rules and define them again later.
Note: The following word groups are predefined in the default WinRoute installation:
•Pornography — words that typically appear on pages with erotic themes,
•Warez / Cracks — words that typically appear on pages offering downloads of illegal
software, license key generators etc.
All key words in predefined groups are disabled by default. A WinRoute administrator can
enable filtering of the particular words and modify the weight for each word.
Threshold value for Web page filtering
The value specified in Deny pages with weight over represents so called threshold weight
value for each page (i.e. total weight of all forbidden words found at the page). If the
total weight of the tested page exceeds this limit, access to the page will be denied (each
word is counted only once, regardless of the count of individual words).
Definition of forbidden words
Use the Add button to add a new word into a group or to create a new group.
Figure 12.12 Definition of a forbidden word or/and a word group
Group
Selection of a group to which the word will be included. You can also add a new name to
create a new group.
Keyword
Forbidden word that is to be scanned for. This word can be in any language and it should
follow the exact form in which it is used on websites (including diacritics and other special
symbols and characters). If the word has various forms (declension, conjugation, etc.), it
is necessary to define separate words for each word in the group. It is also possible to set
various weight of words.
Chapter 12 HTTP and FTP filtering
162
Weight
Word weight the level of how the word affects possible blocking or allowing of access
to websites. The weight should respect frequency of the particular word in the language
(the more common word, the lower weight) so that legitimate webpages are not blocked.
Description
A comment on the word or group.
12.5 FTP Policy
To define rules for access to FTP servers go to Configuration →Content Filtering →FTP Rules.
Figure 12.13 FTP Rules
Rules in this section are tested from the top of the list downwards (you can order the list
entries using the arrow buttons at the right side of the dialog window). Testing is stopped
when the first convenient rule is met. If the query does not match any rule, access to the FTP
server is implicitly allowed.
Note:
1. The default WinRoute configuration includes a set of predefined rules for FTP traffic. These
rules are disabled by default. These rules are available to the WinRoute administrators.
2. A rule which blocks completion of interrupted download processes (so called resume func-
tion executed by the REST FTP command). This function is essential for proper function-
ality of the antivirus control: for reliable scanning, entire files must be scanned.
If undesirable, this rule can be disabled. This is not recommended as it might jeopardize
scanning reliability. However, there is a more secure way to limit this behavior: create
a rule which will allow unlimited connections to a particular FTP server. The rule will take
effect only if it is placed before the Resume rule.
For details on antivirus scan of FTP protocol, refer to chapter 13.3.
12.5 FTP Policy
163
FTP Rules Definition
To create a new rule, select a rule after which the new rule will be added, and click Add. You
can later use the arrow buttons to reorder the rule list.
Checking the box next to the rule can be used to disable the rule. Rules can be disabled
temporarily so that it is not necessary to remove rules and create identical ones later.
Note: FTP traffic which does not match any FTP rule is allowed (any traffic permitted by de-
fault). To allow accessing only a specific group of FTP servers and block access to other web
pages, a rule denying access to all FTP servers must be placed at the end of the rule list.
FTP rule dialog:
Figure 12.14 FTP Rule — basic parameters
Chapter 12 HTTP and FTP filtering
164
Open the General tab to set general rules and actions to be taken.
Description
Description of the rule (information for the administrator).
If user accessing the FTP server is
Select which users this rule will be applied on:
•any user — the rule will be applied on all users (regardless whether authenticated
on the firewall or not).
•any user authenticated on the firewall — applied on all authenticated users.
•selected user(s) — applied on selected users or/and user groups.
Click on the Set button to select users or groups (hold the Ctrl and the Shift keys
to select more that one user /group at once).
Note: Rules designed for selected users (or all authenticated users) are irrelevant unless
combined with a rule that denies access of non-authenticated users.
And the FTP server is
Specify FTP servers on which this rule will be applied:
•any server —any FTP server
•server — IP address of DNS name of a particular FTP server.
If an FTP server is defined through a DNS name, WinRoute will automatically per-
form IP address resolution from DNS. The IP address will be resolved immediately
when settings are confirmed by the OK button (for all rules where the FTP server
was defined by a DNS name).
Warning
Rules are disabled unless a corresponding IP address is found!
•IP address from group — selection of IP addresses of FTP servers that will be
either denied or allowed.
Click on the Edit button to edit IP groups (for details see chapter 14.1).
Action
Select an action that will be taken when requirements for users and the FTP server are
met:
•Allow —WinRoute allows connection to selected FTP servers under conditions set
in the Advanced tab— see below).
•Deny —WinRoute will block certain FTP commands or FTP connections (according
to the settings within the Advanced tab).
Check the Log option to log all FTP connections meeting this rule in the Filter log (see
chapter 22.9).
Go to the Advanced tab to define other conditions that must be met for the rule to be applied
and to set advanced options for FTP communication.
12.5 FTP Policy
165
Figure 12.15 FTP Rule — advanced settings
Valid at time interval
Selection of the time interval during which the rule will be valid (apart from this inter-
val the rule will be ignored). Use the Edit button to edit time intervals (for details see
chapter 14.2).
Valid for IP address group
Selection of IP address group on which the rule will be applied. Client (source) addresses
are considered. Use the Any option to make the rule independent of clients.
Click on the Edit button to edit IP groups (for details see chapter 14.1).
Content
Advanced options for FTP traffic content.
Use the Type option to set a filtering method:
•Download,Upload,Download / Upload — transport of files in one or both direc-
tions.
If any of these options is chosen, you can specify names of files on which the
rule will be applied using the File name entry. Wildcard matching can be used to
specify a file name (i.e. *.exe for executables).
•FTP command — selection of commands for the FTP server on which the rule will
be applied
•Any — denies all traffic (any connection or command use)
Chapter 12 HTTP and FTP filtering
166
Scan content for viruses according to scanning rules
Use this option to enable/disable scanning for viruses for FTP traffic which meet this rule.
This option is available only for allowing rules — it is meaningless to apply antivirus
check to denied traffic.
167
Chapter 13
Antivirus control
WinRoute provides antivirus check of objects (files) transmitted by HTTP, FTP, SMTP and POP3
protocols. In case of HTTP and FTP protocols, the WinRoute administrator can specify which
types of objects will be scanned.
WinRoute is also distributed in a special version which includes integrated McAfee antivirus.
Besides the integrated module, WinRoute also supports many external antiviruses of third
parties. Antivirus licenses must meet the license policy of a corresponding company (usually,
the license is limited by the same or higher number of users as WinRoute is licensed for, or
a server license).
WinRoute allows to use both the integrated McAfee antivirus and a selected external antivirus.
In such a case, transferred files are checked by both antiviruses (so called dual antivirus con-
trol). This feature reduces the risk of letting in a harmful file.
However, using of two antiviruses at a time also decreases the speed of firewall’s performance.
It is therefore highly recommended to consider thoroughly which method of antivirus check
should be used and to which protocols it should be applied and, if possible and desired, to try
the configuration in the trial version of WinRoute before purchasing a license.
Note:
1. However, supported external antiviruses as well as versions and license policy of individ-
ual programs may change as the time flows. For up-to-date information please refer to
(http://www.kerio.com/firewall).
2. External McAfee Anti-Virus programs are not supported by WinRoute.
13.1 Conditions and limitations of antivirus scan
Antivirus check of objects transferred by a particular protocol can be applied only to traffic
where a corresponding protocol inspector which supports the antivirus is used (see chap-
ter 14.3). This implies that the antivirus check is limited by the following factors:
•Antivirus check cannot be used if the traffic is transferred by a secured channel
(SSL/TLS). In such a case, it is not possible to decipher traffic and separate transferred
objects.
•Within email antivirus scanning (SMTP and POP3 protocols), the firewall only removes
infected attachments — it is not possible to drop entire email messages. In case of
SMTP protocol, only incoming traffic is checked (i.e. traffic from the Internet to the
local network — incoming email at the local SMTP server). Check of outgoing traffic
causes problems with temporarily undeliverable email.
Chapter 13 Antivirus control
168
For details, see chapter 13.4.
•Object transferred by other than HTTP, FTP, SMTP and POP3 protocols cannot be
checked by an antivirus.
•If a substandard port is used for the traffic, corresponding protocol inspector will not
be applied automatically. In that case, simply define a traffic rule which will allow this
traffic using a corresponding protocol inspector (for details, see chapter 7.3).
Example: You want to perform antivirus checks of the HTTP protocol at port 8080.
1. Define the HTTP 8080 service (TCP protocol, port 8080).
2. Create a traffic rule which will allow this service applying a corresponding protocol
inspector.
Figure 13.1 Traffic rule for HTTP protocol inspection at non-standard ports
Add the new rule before the rule allowing access to any service in the Internet (if
such a rule exists). If the NAT (source address translation) technology is used for
Internet connection, address translation must be set for this rule as well.
Note: A corresponding protocol inspector can be also specified within the ser-
vice definition, or both definition methods can be used. Both methods yield the
same result, however, the corresponding traffic rule is more transparent when the
protocol inspector is defined in it.
13.2 How to choose and setup antiviruses
To select antiviruses and set their parameters, open the Antivirus tab in Configuration →
Content Filtering →Antivirus. Ob this tab, you can select the integrated McAfee module, an
external antivirus, or both.
If both antiviruses are used, each transferred object (downloaded file, an email attachment,
etc.) will be first checked by the integrated McAfee antivirus module and then by the other
antivirus (a selected external antivirus).
Integrated McAfee
To enable the integrated McAfee antivirus, enable Use integrated McAfee antivirus engine in
the Antivirus tab. This option is not available unless the license key for WinRoute includes
a license for the McAfee antivirus or in trial versions. For detailed information about the
licensing policy, read chapter 44.
Use the Integrated antivirus engine section in the Antivirus tab to set update parameters for
McAfee.
13.2 How to choose and setup antiviruses
169
Figure 13.2 Antivirus selection (integrated antivirus)
Figure 13.3 Scheduling McAfee updates
Check for update every ... hours
Time interval of checks for new updates of the virus database and the antivirus engine
(in hours).
If any new update is available, it will be downloaded automatically by WinRoute.
If the update attempt fails (i.e. the server is not available), detailed information about the
attempt will be logged into the Error log (refer to chapter 22.8).
Each download (update) attempt sets the Last update check performed value to zero.
Warning
To make the antivirus control as mighty as possible, it is necessary that the antivirus
module is always equipped by the most recent version of the virus database. Therefore,
it is recommended to keep automatic updates running and not to set too long intervals
between update checks (update checks should be performed at least twice a day).
Current virus database is ...
Information regarding the age of the current database.
Note: If the value is too high, this may indicate that updates of the database have failed
several times. In such cases, we recommend you to perform a manual update check by
the Update now button and view the Error log.
Chapter 13 Antivirus control
170
Last update check performed ... ago
Time that has passed since the last update check.
Virus database version
Database version that is currently used.
Scanning engine version
McAfee scanning engine version used by WinRoute.
Update now
Use this button for immediate update of the virus database and of the scanning engine.
After you run the update check using the Update now... button, an informational window
displaying the update check process will be opened. You can use the OK button to close
it — it is not necessary to wait until the update is finished.
If updated successfully, the version number of the new virus database or/and the new
antivirus version(s), as well as information regarding the age of the current virus database
will be displayed. If the update check fails (i.e. the server is not available), an error will be
reported and detailed information about the update attempt will be logged into the Error
log.
Each download (update) attempt sets the Last update check performed value to zero.
External antivirus
For external antivirus, enable the Use external antivirus option in the Antivirus tab and select
an antivirus to be employed from the combo box. This menu provides all external antivirus
programs supported in WinRoute by special plugins.
Warning
External antivirus must be installed before it is set in WinRoute, otherwise it is not available
in the combo box. It is recommended to stop the WinRoute Firewall Engine service before an
antivirus installation.
Figure 13.4 Antivirus selection (external antivirus)
13.2 How to choose and setup antiviruses
171
Use the Options button to set advanced parameters for the selected antivirus. Dialogs for in-
dividual antiviruses differ (some antivirus programs may not require any additional settings).
For detailed information on installation and configuration of individual antivirus programs,
refer to http://www.kerio.com/firewall/third-party.
Click Apply to test the selected antivirus. If the test is passed successfully, the antivirus will
be used from the moment on. If not, an error is reported and no antivirus will be set. Detailed
information about the failure will be reported in the Error log (see chapter 22.8).
Antivirus settings
Check items in the Settings section of the Antivirus tab to enable antivirus check for individual
application protocols. By default, antivirus check is enabled for all supported modules.
In Settings, maximum size of files to be scanned for viruses at the firewall can be set. Scanning
of large files are demanding for time, the processor and free disk space, which might affect
the firewall’s functionality dramatically. It might happen that the connection over which the
file is transferred is interrupted when the time limit is exceeded.
The optimal value of the file size depends on particular conditions (the server’s performance,
load on the network, type of the data transmitted, antivirus type, etc.). Caution! We strongly
discourage administrators from changing the default value for file size limit. In any case, do
not set the value to more than 4 MB.
Figure 13.5 Selecting application protocols to be scanned and setting file size limits
Parameters for HTTP and FTP scanning can be set in the HTTP and FTP scanning (refer to
chapter 13.3), while SMTP and POP3 scanning can be configured in the Email scanning tab (see
chapter 13.4).
Warning
1. In case of SMTP protocol, only incoming traffic is checked (i.e. traffic from the Internet to
the local network — incoming email at the local SMTP server). Checks of outgoing SMTP
traffic (from the local network to the Internet) might cause problems with temporarily
undeliverable email — for example in cases where the destination SMTP server uses so
called greylisting.
To perform smooth checks of outgoing traffic, define a corresponding traffic rule using
the SMTP protocol inspector. Such rule may be useful for example if clients in the local
Chapter 13 Antivirus control
172
network send their email via an SMTP server located in the Internet. Checking of outgoing
SMTP traffic is not apt for local SMTP servers sending email to the Internet.
An example of a traffic rule for checking of outgoing SMTP traffic is shown at figure 13.6.
Figure 13.6 An example of a traffic rule for outgoing SMTP traffic check
2. Substandard extensions of the SMTP protocol can be used in case of communication of
two Microsoft Exchange mailservers. Under certain conditions, email messages are trans-
mitted in form of binary data. In such a case, WinRoute cannot perform antivirus check of
individual attachments.
In such cases, it is recommended to use an antivirus which supports Microsoft Exchange
and not to perform antivirus check of SMTP traffic of a particular server in WinRoute. To
achieve this, disable antivirus check for SMTP protocol or define a corresponding traffic
rule where no protocol inspector will be applied (see chapter 7.7).
13.3 HTTP and FTP scanning
As for HTTP and FTP traffic, objects (files) of selected types are scanned.
The file just transmitted is saved in a temporary file on the local disk of the firewall. WinRoute
caches the last part of the transmitted file (segment of the data transferred) and performs
an antivirus scan of the temporary file. If a virus is detected in the file, the last segment of
the data is dropped. This means that the client receives an incomplete (damaged) file which
cannot be executed so that the virus cannot be activated. If no virus is found, WinRoute sends
the client the rest of the file and the transmission is completed successfully.
Optionally, a warning message informing about a virus detected can be sent to the user who
tried to download the file (see the Notify user by email option).
Warning
1. The purpose of the antivirus check is only to detect infected files, it is not possible to heal
them!
2. If the antivirus check is disabled in HTTP and FTP filtering rules, objects and files matching
corresponding rules are not checked. For details, refer to chapters 12.2 and 12.5).
3. Full functionality of HTTP scanning is not guaranteed if any non-standard extensions to
web browsers (e.g. download managers, accelerators, etc.) are used!
13.3 HTTP and FTP scanning
173
To set parameters of HTTP and FTP antivirus check, open the HTTP, FTP scanning tab in
Configuration →Content Filtering →Antivirus.
Figure 13.7 Settings for HTTP and FTP scanning
Use the If a virus is found... entry to specify actions to be taken whenever a virus is detected
in a transmitted file:
•Move the file to quarantine — the file will be saved in a special directory on the
WinRoute host. WinRoute administrators can later try to heal the file using an an-
tivirus program and if the file is recovered successfully, the administrator can provide
it to the user who attempted to download it.
The quarantine subdirectory under the WinRoute directory is used for the quarantine
(the typical path is C:\Program Files\Kerio\WinRoute Firewall\quarantine)
Infected files (files which are suspected of being infected) are saved into this directory
with names which are generated automatically. Name of each file includes information
about protocol, date, time and connection number used for the transmission.
Chapter 13 Antivirus control
174
Warning
When handling files in the quarantine directory, please consider carefully each action
you take, otherwise a virus might be activated and the WinRoute host could be attacked
by the virus!
•Alert the client —WinRoute alerts the user who attempted to download the file by
an email message warning that a virus was detected and download was stopped for
security reasons.
WinRoute sends alert messages under the following circumstances: The user is authen-
ticated and connected to the firewall, a valid email address is set in a corresponding
user account (see chapter 15.1) and the SMTP server used for mail sending is config-
ured correctly (refer to chapter 18.3).
Note: Regardless of the fact whether the Alert the client option is used, alerts can
be sent to specified addresses (e.g. addresses of network administrators) whenever
a virus is detected. For details, refer to chapter 19.4.
In the If the transferred file cannot be scanned section, actions to be taken when the antivirus
check cannot be applied to a file (e.g. the file is compressed and password-protected, damaged,
etc.):
•Deny transmission of the file —WinRoute will consider these files as infected and deny
their transmission.
Hint
It is recommended to combine this option with the Move the file to quarantine function
— the WinRoute administrator can extract the file and perform manual antivirus check
in response to user requests.
•Allow the file to be transferred —WinRoute will treat compressed password-protected
files and damaged files as trustful (not infected).
Generally, use of this option is not secure. However, it can be helpful for example
when users attempt to transmit big volume of compressed password-protected files
and the antivirus is installed on the workstations.
HTTP and FTP scanning rules
These rules specify when antivirus check will be applied. By default (if no rule is defined), all
objects transmitted by HTTP and FTP are scanned.
WinRoute contains a set of predefined rules for HTTP and FTP scanning. By default, all exe-
cutable files as well as all Microsoft Office files are scanned. The WinRoute administrator can
change the default configuration.
Scanning rules are ordered in a list and processed from the top. Arrow buttons on the right can
be used to change the order. When a rule which matches the object is found, the appropriate
action is taken and rule processing is stopped.
New rules can be created in the dialog box which is opened after clicking the Add button.
13.3 HTTP and FTP scanning
175
Figure 13.8 Definition of an HTTP/FTP scanning rule
Description
Description of the rule (for reference of the WinRoute administrator only)
Condition
Condition of the rule:
•HTTP/FTP filename
— this option filters out certain filenames (not entire URLs) transmitted by FTP
or HTTP (e.g. *.exe,*.zip, etc.).
If only an asterisk is used for the specification, the rule will apply to any file
transmitted by HTTP or FTP.
The other two conditions can be applied only to HTTP:
•MIME type
— MIME types can be specified either by complete expressions (e.g. image/jpeg)
or using a wildcard matching (e.g. application/*).
•URL — URL of the object (e.g. www.kerio.com/img/logo.gif), a string specified
by a wildcard matching (e.g. *.exe) or a server name (e.g. www.kerio.com).
Server names represent any URL at a corresponding server (www.kerio.com/*).
If a MIME type or a URL is specified only by an asterisk, the rule will apply to any HTTP
object.
Action
Settings in this section define whether or not the object will be scanned.
If the Do not scan alternative is selected, antivirus control will not apply to transmission
of this object.
The new rule will be added after the rule which had been selected before Add was clicked. You
can use the arrow buttons on the right to move the rule within the list.
Checking the box next to the rule can be used to disable the rule. Rules can be disabled
temporarily so that it is not necessary to remove rules and create identical ones later.
Chapter 13 Antivirus control
176
If the object does not match with any rule, it will be scanned automatically. If only selected
object types are to be scanned, a rule disabling scanning of any URL or MIME type must be
added to the end of the list (the Skip all other files rule is predefined for this purpose).
13.4 Email scanning
SMTP and POP3 protocols scanning settings are defined through this tab. If scanning is enabled
for at least one of these protocols, all attachments of transmitted messages are scanned.
Individual attachments of transmitted messages are saved in a temporary directory on the
local disk. When downloaded completely, the files are scanned for viruses. If no virus is
found, the attachment is added to the message again. If a virus is detected, the attachment is
replaced by a notice informing about the virus found.
Note: Warning messages can also be sent to specified email addresses (e.g. to network admin-
istrators) when a virus is detected. For details, refer to chapter 19.4.
Warning
1. Antivirus control within WinRoute can only detect and block infected attachments. At-
tached files cannot be healed by this control!
2. Within antivirus scanning, it is possible to remove only infected attachments, entire email
messages cannot be dropped. This is caused by the fact that the firewall cannot handle
email messages like mailservers do. It only maintains network traffic coming through. In
most cases, removal of an entire message would lead to a failure in communication with
the server and the client might attempt to send/download the message once again. Thus,
one infected message might block sending/reception of any other (legitimate) mail.
3. In case of SMTP protocol, only incoming traffic is checked (i.e. traffic from the Internet to
the local network — incoming email at the local SMTP server). Checks of outgoing SMTP
traffic (i.e. from the local network to the Internet) might cause problems with temporarily
undeliverable email (for example in cases where the destination SMTP server uses so called
greylisting).
To check also outgoing traffic (e.g. when local clients connect to an SMTP server without
the local network), define a corresponding traffic rule using the SMTP protocol inspector.
For details, see chapter 13.2.
Advanced parameters and actions that will be taken when a virus is detected can be set in the
Email scanning tab.
In the Specify an action which will be taken with attachments... section, the following actions
can be set for messages considered by the antivirus as infected:
•Move message to quarantine — untrustworthy messages will be moved to a special
directory on the WinRoute host. The WinRoute administrator can try to heal infected
files and later send them to their original addressees.
13.4 Email scanning
177
Figure 13.9 Settings for SMTP and POP3 scanning
The quarantine subdirectory under the WinRoute directory is used for the quarantine
(the typical path is C:\Program Files\Kerio\WinRoute Firewall\quarantine)
Messages with untrustworthy attachments are saved to this directory under names
which are generated automatically by WinRoute. Each filename includes information
about protocol, date, time and the connection number used for transmission of the
message.
•Prepend subject message with text — use this option to specify a text to be attached
before the subject of each email message where at least one infected attachment is
found. This text informs the recipient of the message and it can be also used for
automatic message filtering.
Note: Regardless of what action is set to be taken, the attachment is always removed and
a warning message is attached instead.
Use the TLS connections section to set firewall behavior for cases where both mail client and
the server support TLS-secured SMTP or POP3 traffic.
In case that TLS protocol is used, unencrypted connection is established first. Then, client
and server agree on switching to the secure mode (encrypted connection). If the client or the
server does not support TLS, encrypted connection is not used and the traffic is performed in
a non-secured way.
If the connection is encrypted, firewall cannot analyze it and perform antivirus check for
transmitted messages. WinRoute administrator can select one of the following alternatives:
Chapter 13 Antivirus control
178
•Enable TLS. This alternative is suitable for such cases where protection from wiretap-
ping is prior to antivirus check of email.
Hint
In such cases, it is recommended to install an antivirus engine at individual hosts that
would perform local antivirus check.
•Disable TLS. Secure mode will not be available. Clients will automatically assume
that the server does not support TLS and messages will be transmitted through an
unencrypted connection. Firewall will perform antivirus check for all transmitted mail.
The If an attachment cannot be scanned section defines actions to be taken if one or multi-
ple files attached to a message cannot be scanned for any reason (e.g. password-protected
archives, damaged files, etc.):
•Reject the attachment —WinRoute reacts in the same way as when a virus was detected
(including all the actions described above).
•Allow delivery of the attachment —WinRoute behaves as if password-protected or
damaged files were not infected.
Generally, this option is not secure. However, it can be helpful for example when
users attempt to transmit big volume of compressed password-protected files (typi-
cally password-protected archives) and the antivirus is installed on the workstations.
13.5 Scanning of files transferred via Clientless SSL-VPN (Windows)
If WinRoute is installed on Windows, the antivirus check is performed also for transfers of files
between the local network and a remote client via Clientless SSL-VPN (see chapter 24). The
SSL-VPN Scanningtab allows to set advanced parameters for scanning of files transferred via
this interface. For the Kerio WinRoute Firewall Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance
administration, the SSL-VPN Scanning tab is not available.
Figure 13.10 Settings for scanning of files transferred via Clientless SSL-VPN
13.5 Scanning of files transferred via Clientless SSL-VPN (Windows)
179
Transfer directions
Use the top section of the SSL-VPN Scanning tab to set to which transfer direction the
antivirus check will be applied. By default, only files downloaded from a remote client to
a local host are scanned to avoid slowdown (local network is treated as trustworthy).
If the antivirus check fails
Options in the lower section of the tab specify an action which will be performed if a file
cannot be scanned for any reason (encrypted or corrupted files, etc.). By default, transfer
of such files is denied.
180
Chapter 14
Definitions
14.1 IP Address Groups
IP groups are used for simple access to certain services (e.g. WinRoute’s remote administration,
Web server located in the local network available from the Internet, etc.). When setting access
rights a group name is used. The group itself can contain any combination of computers (IP
addresses), IP address ranges, subnets or other groups.
Creating and Editing IP Address Groups
You can define IP address groups in the Configuration →Definitions →Address Groups section.
Figure 14.1 WinRoute’s IP groups
Click on Add to add a new group (or an item to an existing group) and use Edit or Delete to
edit or delete a selected group or item.
The following dialog window is displayed when you click on the Add button:
Name
The name of the group. Add a new name to create a new group. Insert the group name
to add a new item to an existent group.
14.2 Time Ranges
181
Figure 14.2 IP group definition
Type
Type of the new item:
•Host (IP address or DNS name of a particular host),
•Network / Mask (subnet with a corresponding mask),
•IP range (an interval of IP addresses defined by starting and end IP address in-
cluding the both limit values),
•Address group (another group of IP addresses — groups can be cascaded),
•Firewall (a special group including all the firewall’s IP addresses, see also chap-
ter 7.3).
IP address, Mask...
Parameters of the new item (related to the selected type).
Description
Commentary for the IP address group. This helps guide the administrator.
Note: Each IP group must include at least one item. Groups with no item will be removed
automatically.
14.2 Time Ranges
Time ranges in WinRoute are closely related to traffic policy rules (see chapter 7). WinRoute
allows the administrator to set a time period where each rule will be applied. These time
ranges are actually groups that can consist of any number of various intervals and single
actions.
Using time ranges you can also set dial-up parameters — see chapter 5.
To define time ranges go to Configuration →Definitions →Time Ranges.
Chapter 14 Definitions
182
Figure 14.3 WinRoute’s time intervals
Time range types
When defining a time interval three types of time ranges (subintervals) can be used:
Absolute
The time interval is defined with the initial and expiration date and it is not repeated
Weekly
This interval is repeated weekly (according to the day schedule)
Daily
It is repeated daily (according to the hour schedule)
Defining Time Intervals
Time ranges can created, edited and removed in Configuration →Definitions →Time Ranges.
Clicking on the Add button will display the following dialog window:
Name
Name (identification) of the time interval. Insert a new name to create a new time range.
Insert the name of an existent time range to add a new item to this range.
Description
Time ranges description, for the administrator only
Time Range Type
Time range type: Daily,Weekly or Absolute. The last type refers to the user defined initial
and terminal date.
From, To
The beginning and the end of the time range. Beginning and end hours, days or dates can
be defined according to the selected time range type
14.3 Services
183
Figure 14.4 Time range definition
Valid on
Defines days when the interval will be valid. You can either select particular weekdays
(Selected days) or use one of the predefined options (All Days,Weekday — from Monday
to Friday, Weekend — Saturday and Sunday).
Note:
1. each time range must contain at least one item. Time ranges with no item will be removed
automatically.
2. Time intervals cannot be cascaded.
14.3 Services
WinRoute services enable the administrator to define communication rules easily (by permit-
ting or denying access to the Internet from the local network or by allowing access to the local
network from the Internet). Services are defined by a communication protocol and by a port
number (e.g. the HTTP service uses the TCP protocol with the port number 80). You can also
match so-called protocol inspector with certain service types (for details see below).
Services can be defined in Configurations →Definitions →Services. Some standard services,
such as HTTP, FTP, DNS etc., are already predefined in the default WinRoute installation.
Chapter 14 Definitions
184
Figure 14.5 WinRoute’s network services
Clicking on the Add or the Edit button will open a dialog for service definition.
Figure 14.6 Network service definition
Name
Service identification within WinRoute. It is strongly recommended to use a concise name
to keep the program easy to follow.
14.3 Services
185
Description
Comments for the service defined. It is strongly recommended describing each definition,
especially with non-standard services so that there will be minimum confusion when
referring to the service at a later time.
Protocol
The communication protocol used by the service.
Most standard services uses the TCP or the UDP protocol, or both when they can be
defined as one service with the TCP/UDP option. Other options available are ICMP and
other.
The other options allows protocol specification by the number in the IP packet header.
Any protocol carried in IP (e.g. GRE — protocol number is 47) can be defined this way.
Figure 14.7 Setting a protocol in service definition
Protocol inspector
WinRoute protocol inspector (see below) that will be used for this service.
Warning
Each inspector should be used for the appropriate service only. Functionality of the
service might be affected by using an inappropriate inspector.
Source Port and Destination Port
If the TCP or UDP communication protocol is used, the service is defined with its port
number. In case of standard client-server types, a server is listening for connections on
a particular port (the number relates to the service), whereas clients do not know their
port in advance (port are assigned to clients during connection attempts). This means
that source ports are usually not specified, while destination ports are usually known in
case of standard services.
Note: Specification of the source port may be important, for example during the definition
of communication filter rules. For details, refer to chapter 7.3.
Source and destination ports can be specified as:
•Any — all the ports available (1-65535)
•Equal to —a particular port (e.g.80)
•Greater than,Less than — all ports with a number that is either greater or less
than the number defined
•Not equal to — all ports that are not equal to the one defined
•In range — all ports that fit to the range defined (including the initial and the
terminal ones)
•List — list of the ports divided by commas (e.g. 80,8000,8080)
Chapter 14 Definitions
186
Figure 14.8 Service definition — source and destination port setting
Protocol Inspectors
WinRoute includes special subroutines that monitor all traffic using application protocols, such
as HTTP, FTP or others. The modules can be used to modify (filter) the communication or adapt
the firewall’s behavior according to the protocol type. Benefits of protocol inspectors can be
better understood through the two following examples:
1. HTTP protocol inspector monitors traffic between clients (browsers) and Web servers. It
can be used to block connections to particular pages or downloads of particular objects
(i.e. images, pop-ups, etc.).
2. With active FTP, the server opens a data connection to the client. Under certain conditions
this connection type cannot be made through firewalls, therefore FTP can only be used
in passive mode. The FTP protocol inspector distinguishes that the FTP is active, opens
the appropriate port and redirects the connection to the appropriate client in the local
network. Due to this fact, users in the local network are not limited by the firewall and
they can use both FTP modes (active/passive).
The protocol inspector is enabled if it is set in the service definition and if the correspond-
ing traffic is allowed. Each protocol inspector applies to a specific protocol and service. In
the default WinRoute configuration, all available protocol inspectors are used in definitions
of corresponding services (so they will be applied to corresponding traffic automatically), ex-
cept protocol inspectors for SIPand H.323 (SIP and H.323 are complex protocols and protocol
inspectors may work incorrectly in some configurations).
To apply a protocol inspector explicitly to another traffic, it is necessary to define a new service
where this inspector will be used or to set the protocol inspector directly in the corresponding
traffic rule.
Example
You want to perform inspection of the HTTP protocol at port 8080. Define a new service: TCP
protocol, port 8080,HTTP protocol inspector. This ensures that HTTP protocol inspector will
be automatically applied to any TCP traffic at port 8080 and passing through WinRoute.
14.4 URL Groups
187
Note:
1. Generally, protocol inspectors cannot be applied to secured traffic (SSL/TLS). In this case,
WinRoute “perceives” the traffic as binary data only. This implies that such traffic cannot
be deciphered.
2. Under certain circumstances, appliance of a protocol inspector is not desirable. There-
fore, it is possible to disable a corresponding inspector temporarily. For details, refer to
chapter 7.7.
14.4 URL Groups
URL Groups enable the administrator to define HTTP rules easily (see chapter 12.2). For exam-
ple, to disable access to a group of web pages, you can simply define a URL group and assign
permissions to the URL group, rather than defining permissions to each individual URL rule.
A URL group rule is processed significantly faster than a greater number of separate rules for
individual URLs. It is also possible to cascade URL groups.
URL groups can be defined in Configuration →Definitions →URL Groups.
Figure 14.9 URL Groups
The default WinRoute installation already includes predefined URL groups:
•Ads/Banners — common URLs of pages that contain advertisements, banners, etc.
•Search engines — top Internet search engines.
•Windows Updates — URL of pages requested for automatic updates of Windows.
These URL groups are used in predefined URL rules (see chapter 12.2). WinRoute administra-
tors can use predefined groups in their custom rules or/and edit them if needed.
Chapter 14 Definitions
188
Matching fields next to each item of the group can be either checked to activate or unchecked
to disable the item. This way you can deactivate items with no need to remove them and to
define them again.
Click on the Add button to display a dialog where a new group can be created or a new item
can be added to existing groups.
Figure 14.10 URL group definition
Name
Name of the group in which the new item will be added. Options of the Name entry are
as follows:
•select a group to which the URL will be added,
•add a name to create a new group where the item will be included.
Type
Type of the item — URL or URL group (groups can be cascaded).
URL / URL Group
URL or URL group that will be added to the group (depending on the item type).
URL can be specified as follows:
•full address of a server, a document or a web page without protocol specification
(http://)
•use substrings with the special *and ?characters. An asterisk stands for any
number of characters, a question-mark represents one character.
Examples:
•www.kerio.com/index.html — a particular page
•www.*— all URL addresses starting with www. www.*
•www.kerio.com — all URLs at the www.kerio.com server (this string is equal to
the www.kerio.com/*string)
•*sex*— all URL addresses containing the sex string
•*sex??.cz*— all URL addresses containing such strings as sexxx.cz,
sex99.cz, etc.
14.4 URL Groups
189
Description
The item’s description (comments and notes for the administrator).
190
Chapter 15
User Accounts and Groups
User accounts in WinRoute improve control of user access to the Internet from the local net-
work. User accounts can be also used to access the WinRoute administration using the Admin-
istration Console or the Web Administration interface.
WinRoute supports several methods of user accounts and groups saving, combining them with
various types of authentication, as follows:
Internal user database
User accounts and groups and their passwords are saved in WinRoute. During authenti-
cation, usernames are compared to the data in the internal database.
This method of saving accounts and user authentication is particularly adequate for net-
works without a proper domain, as well as for special administrator accounts (user can
authenticate locally even if the network communication fails).
On the other hand, in case of networks with proper domains (Windows NT or Active
Directory), local accounts in WinRoute may cause increased demands on administration
since accounts and passwords must be maintained twice (at the domain and in WinRoute).
Internal user database with authentication within the domain
User accounts are stored in WinRoute. However, users are authenticated at Windows NT
or Active Directory domain (i.e. password is not stored in the user account in WinRoute).
Obviously, usernames in WinRoute must match with the usernames in the domain.
This method is not so demanding as far as the administration is concerned. When, for
example, a user wants to change the password, it can be simply done at the domain and
the change will be automatically applied to the account in WinRoute. In addition to this,
it is not necessary to create user accounts in WinRoute by hand, as they can be imported
from a corresponding domain.
Import of user accounts from Active Directory
If Active Directory (Windows 2000 Server or Windows Server 2003/2008) is used, auto-
matic import of user accounts from it can be enabled. It is not necessary to define ac-
counts in WinRoute, nor import them, since it is possible to configure templates by which
specific parameters (such as access rights, content rules, transfer quotas, etc.) will be set
for new WinRoute users. A corresponding user account will be automatically imported
upon the first login of the user to WinRoute. Parameters set by using a template can be
modified for individual accounts if necessary.
Note: This type of cooperation with Active Directory applies especially to older versions
of WinRoute and makes these versions still compatible. In case of the first installation of
WinRoute, it is recommended to apply transparent cooperation with Active Directory.
15.1 Viewing and definitions of user accounts
191
Transparent cooperation with Active Directory (Active Directory mapping)
WinRoute can use accounts and groups stored in Active Directory directly — no import to
the local database is performed. Specific WinRoute parameters are added by the template
of the corresponding account. These parameters can also be edited individually.
This type is the least demanding from the administrator’s point of view (all user accounts
and groups are managed in Active Directory) and it is the only one that allows using
accounts from multiple Active Directory domains.
Note: In cases when users are authenticated at the domain (all described types excluding the
first one), it is recommended to create at least one local account in WinRoute that has both
read and write rights, or keep the original Admin account. This account provides connection
to the WinRoute administration in case of the network or domain server failure.
15.1 Viewing and definitions of user accounts
To define local user accounts, import accounts to the local database or/and configure ac-
counts mapped from the domain, go to the User Accounts tab in the Users and Groups →Users
section.
Figure 15.1 WinRoute user accounts
Domain
Use the Domain option to select a domain for which user accounts as well as other para-
meters will be defined. This item provides a list of mapped Active Directory domains (see
chapter 15.4) and the local (internal) user database.
Search
The Search engine can be used to filter out user accounts meeting specified criteria.
The searching is interactive — each symbol typed or deleted defines the string which is
evaluated immediately and all accounts including the string in either Name,Full name
or Description are viewed. The icon next to the entry can be clicked to clear the filtering
string and display all user accounts in the selected domain (if the Search entry is blank,
the icon is hidden).
Chapter 15 User Accounts and Groups
192
The searching is helpful especially when the domain includes too many accounts which
might make it difficult to look up particular items.
Hiding / showing disabled accounts
It is possible to disable accounts in WinRoute. Check the Hide disabled user accounts to
show only active (enabled) accounts.
Account template
Parameters shared by the most accounts can be defined by a template. Templates simplify
administration of user accounts — shared parameters are set just once, when defining the
template. It is also possible to configure some accounts (such as administrator accounts)
separately, without using the template.
Templates apply to specific domains (or to the local user database). Each template in-
cludes parameters of user rights, data transfer quota and rules for content rules (for
detailed description of all these parameters, refer to chapter 15.2).
Local user accounts
If the Local user database is selected in the Domain item, user accounts in WinRoute are listed
(complete information on these accounts are stored in the WinRoute configuration database).
The following options are available for accounts in the local database:
Add, Edit, Remove
Click Add,Edit or Remove to create, modify or delete local user accounts (for details, see
chapter 15.2). It is also possible to select more than one account by using the Ctrl and
Shift keys to perform mass changes of parameters for all selected accounts.
Importing accounts from a domain
Accounts can be imported to the local database from the Windows NT domain or from
Active Directory. Actually, this process includes automatic copying of domain accounts
(account authenticating at the particular domain) to newly created local accounts. For
detailed information about import of user accounts, refer to chapter 15.3.
Import of accounts is recommended in case of the Windows NT domain. If Active Direc-
tory domain is used, it is recommended to use the transparent cooperation with Active
Directory (domain mapping — see chapter 15.4).
Accounts mapped from the Active Directory domain
If any of the Active Directory domain is selected as Domain, user accounts in this domain are
listed.
Edit User
For mapped accounts, specific WinRoute parameters can be set (refer to chapter 15.2).
These settings are stored in the WinRoute’s configuration database. Information stored in
Active Directory (username, full name, email address) and authentication method cannot
be edited.
15.2 Local user accounts
193
Note: It is also possible to select more than one account by using the Ctrl and Shift
keys to perform mass changes of parameters for all selected accounts.
In mapped Active Directory domains, it is not allowed to create or/and remove user accounts.
These actions must be performed in the Active Directory database on the relevant domain
server. It is also not possible to import user accounts — such an action would take no effect
in case of a mapped domain.
15.2 Local user accounts
Local accounts are accounts created in WinRoute or imported from a domain. These accounts
are stored in the WinRoute configuration database (see chapter 25.2). These accounts can
be useful especially in domainless environments or for special purposes (typically for the
firewall’s administration).
Regardless on the method used for creation of the account, each user can be authenticated
through the WinRoute’s internal database, Active Directory or Windows NT domain.
The basic administrator account (Admin) is created during the WinRoute installation process.
This account has full rights for WinRoute administration. It can be removed if there is at least
one other account with full administration rights.
Warning
1. All passwords should be kept safe and secret, otherwise they might be misused by an
unauthorized person.
2. If all accounts with full administration rights are removed and you logout from the
WinRoute administration, it is not possible to connect to the WinRoute administration
any longer. Under these conditions, a local user account (Admin with a blank password)
will be created automatically upon the next start of the WinRoute Firewall Engine.
3. Provided that you forget your administration password, contact the Kerio Technologies
technical support (see chapter 26).
Creating a local user account
Open the User Accounts tab in the User and groups →Users section. In the Domain combo
box, select Local User Database.
Click on the Add button to open a guide to create a new user account.
Chapter 15 User Accounts and Groups
194
Figure 15.2 Local user accounts in WinRoute
Step 1 — basic information
Figure 15.3 Creating a user account — basic parameters
Name
Username used for login to the account.
15.2 Local user accounts
195
Warning
The user name is not case-sensitive. We recommend not to use special characters (non-
English languages) which might cause problems when authenticating at the firewall’s web
interfaces.
Full name
A full name of the user (usually first name and surname).
Description
User description (e.g. a position in a company).
The Full Name and the Description items have informative values only. Any type of infor-
mation can be included or the field can be left empty.
Email address
Email address of the user that alerts (see chapter 19.4) and other information (e.g. alert
if a limit for data transmission is exceeded, etc.) will be sent to. A valid email address
should be set for each user, otherwise some of the WinRoute features may not be used
efficiently.
Note: A relay server must be set in WinRoute for each user, otherwise sending of alert
messages to users will not function. For details, refer to chapter 18.3.
Authentication
User authentication (see below)
Account is disabled
Temporary blocking of the account so that you do not have to remove it.
Note: For example, this option can be used to create a user account for a user that will
not be used immediately (e.g. an account for a new employee who has not taken up yet).
Domain template
Define parameters for the corresponding user account (access rights, data transfer quotas
and content rules). These parameters can be defined by the template of the domain (see
chapter 15.1) or they can be set especially for the corresponding account.
Using a template is suitable for common accounts in the domain (common user accounts).
Definition of accounts is simpler and faster, if a template is used.
Individual configuration is recommended especially for accounts with special rights (e.g.
WinRoute administration accounts). Usually, there are not many such accounts which
means their configuration comfortable.
Authentication options:
Internal user database
User account information is stored locally to WinRoute. In such a case, specify the Pass-
word and Confirm password items (later, the password can be edited in the Web interface
— see the Kerio WinRoute Firewall — User’s Guide).
Chapter 15 User Accounts and Groups
196
Warning
1. Passwords may contain printable symbols only (letters, numbers, punctuation
marks). Password is case-sensitive. We recommend not to use special characters
(non-English languages) which might cause problems when authenticating via the
Web interface.
2. NTLM authentication cannot be used for automatic authentication method by NTLM
(refer to chapter 25.3).. These accounts also cannot be used for authentication to the
Clientless SSL-VPN interface (see chapter 24).
NT domain / Kerberos 5
Users are authenticated through the Windows NT domain (Windows NT 4.0) or through
the Active Directory (Windows 2000/2003/2008).
Go to the Users section of the Active Directory / NT domain tab to set parameters for user
authentication through the Windows NT domain or/and through the Active Directory. If
Active Directory authentication is set also for Windows NT domain, then Active Directory
will be preferred.
Note: User accounts with this type of authentication set will not be active unless au-
thentication through Active Directory or/and NT domain is enabled. For details, see
chapter 15.3.
Step 2 — groups
Figure 15.4 Creating a new user account — groups
Groups into which the user will be included can be added or removed with the Add or the
Remove button within this dialog (to create new groups go to User and Groups →Groups —
see chapter 15.5). Follow the same guidelines to add users to groups during group definition.
It is not important whether groups or users are defined first.
Hint
While adding new groups you can mark more than one group by holding either the Ctrl or
theShift key.
15.2 Local user accounts
197
Step 3 — access rights
Figure 15.5 Creating a new user account — user rights
Each user must be assigned one of the following three levels of access rights.
No access to administration
The user has no rights to access the WinRoute administration. This setting is commonly
used for the majority of users.
Read only access to administration
The user can access WinRoute. He or she can read settings and logs but cannot edit them.
Full access to administration
These users have full rights to administration and are equal to the Admin account. If
there is at least one user with the full access to the administration, the default Admin
account can be removed.
Additional rights:
User can override WWW content rules
User can customize personal web content filtering settings independently of the global
configuration (for details, refer to Step 5).
User can unlock URL rules
If this option is checked, the user is allowed to bypass the rule denying access to the
queried website — at the page providing information about the denial, the Unlock button
Chapter 15 User Accounts and Groups
198
is displayed. The unlock feature must also be enabled in the corresponding URL rule (for
details, refer to chapter 12.2).
User can dial RAS connection
If the Internet connection uses dial-up lines, users with this right will be allowed to dial
and hang up these lines in the Web interface (see chapter 11).
User can connect using VPN
The user is allowed to connect through WinRoute’s VPN server (using Kerio VPN Client).
For detailed information, see chapter 23.
User can use Clientless SSL-VPN
The user will be allowed to access shared files and folders in the local network via the
Clientless SSL-VPN web interface.
The Clientless SSL-VPN interface and the corresponding user right in WinRoute is available
for Windows only. For details, see chapter 24.
User is allowed to use P2P networks
Traffic of this user will not be blocked if P2P (Peer-to-Peer) networks are detected. For
details, see chapter 17.1.
User is allowed to view statistics
This user will be allowed to view firewall statistics in the web interface (see chapter 11).
Hint
Access rights can also be defined by a user account template.
Step 4 — data transmission quota
Daily and monthly limit for volume of data transferred by a user, as well as actions to be taken
when the quota is exceeded, can be set in this section.
Transfer quota
Setting of daily, weekly and monthly limit of volume of transferred data for the user.
Use the Direction combo box to select which transfer direction will be controlled (down-
load — incoming data, upload — outgoing data, all traffic — both incoming and outgoing
data).
The limit can be set in the Quota entry using megabytes or gigabytes.
Quota exceed action
Set actions which will be taken whenever a quota is exceeded:
•Block any further traffic — the user will be allowed to continue using the opened
connections, however, will not be allowed to establish new connections (i.e. to
connect to another server, download a file through FTP, etc.)
•Don’t block further traffic (Only limit bandwidth...) — Internet connection speed
(so called bandwidth) will be limited for the user. Traffic will not be blocked but
the user will notice that the Internet connection is slower than usual (this should
15.2 Local user accounts
199
Figure 15.6 Creating a new user account — data transmission quota
make such users to reduce their network activities). For detailed information, see
chapter 9.
Check the Notify user by email when quota is exceeded option to enable sending of warn-
ing messages to the user in case that a quota is exceeded. A valid email address must be
specified for the user (see Step 1). SMTP Relay must be set in WinRoute (see chapter 18.3).
If you wish that your WinRoute administrator is also notified when a quota is almost
exceeded, set the alert parameters in Configuration →Accounting. For details, refer to
chapter 19.4.
Note:
1. If a quota is exceeded and the traffic is blocked in result, the restrictions will continue
being applied until the end of the quota period (day or month). To cancel these
restrictions before the end of a corresponding period, the following actions can be
taken:
•disable temporarily a corresponding limit, raise its value or switch to the
Chapter 15 User Accounts and Groups
200
Don’t block further traffic mode
•resetting of the data volume counter of the user (see chapter 20.1).
2. Actions for quota-exceeding are not applied if the user is authenticated at the firewall.
This would block all firewall traffic as well as all local users. However, transferred
data is included in the quota!
Hint
Data transfer quota and actions applied in response can also be set by a user account template.
Step 5 — web content rules and language preferences
Figure 15.7 Creating a new user account — Web site content rules
In the WWW content scanning options section, special content filter rules settings for individual
users can be defined. By default, all elements are allowed. WinRoute allows to block the
following web elements:
ActiveX objects
Active objects at web pages. This option allows/blocks <object> and <embed> HTML
tags.
<Script> HTML tags
The executive code in JavaScript,VBScript, etc.
15.2 Local user accounts
201
Pop-up windows
Automatic opening of new browser windows — usually pop-up windows with advertise-
ments.
This option will allow / block the window.open() method in JavaScript.
<Applet> HTML tags
Applets in Java.
Cross-domain referers
This option allows / blocks the Referer item included in an HTTP header.
The Referer item includes pages that have been viewed prior to the current page. This
option allows to block Referer in case that it includes a server name different from the
one defined in the particular HTTP request.
The Cross-domain referer function protects users’ privacy (the Referer item can be mon-
itored to see which pages are opened by each user).
The Language options section allows setting of preferred language of the WinRoute’s web inter-
face (including the Kerio StaR interface). The browser detected option sets preferred language
in accordance with settings in user’s web browser and uses the language with the highest pref-
erence rate available. English will be used if none of other preferred languages is available.
Preferred language also applies to email alerts sent by the firewall (notices of reaching of data
transfer quota, detected viruses, detected P2P networks, etc.). If language is detected and
set by using user’s web browser preferences, language set as preferred for the previous user’s
login to the web interface will be used. If the user has not logged into the web interface before,
alerts will be in English.
Note: These settings can be customized at a corresponding page of the WinRoute’s Web in-
terface (see Kerio WinRoute Firewall — User’s Guide). If the user can override content rules,
any changes can be made. Users who are not allowed to override rules can enable or/and dis-
able only features which are available for them (set in their personal configuration). Language
preferences can always be changed.
Hint
Content rules can also be defined by a user account template.
Step 6 — user’s IP addresses
If a user works at a reserved workstation (i.e. this computer is not by any other user) with
a fixed IP address (static or reserved at the DHCP server), the user can use automatic login
from the particular IP address. This implies that whenever a connection attempt from this IP
address is detected, WinRoute assumes that the connection is performed by the particular user
and it does not require authentication. The user is logged-in automatically and all functions
are available as if connected against the username and password.
This implies that only one user can be automatically authenticated from a particular IP ad-
dress. When a user account is being created, WinRoute automatically detects whether the
specified IP address is used for automatic login or not.
Chapter 15 User Accounts and Groups
202
Figure 15.8 Creating a new user account — IP addresses for VPN client and automatic logins
Automatic login can be set for the firewall (i.e. for the WinRoute host) or/and for any other
host(s) (i.e. when the user connects also from an additional workstation, such as notebooks,
etc.). An IP address group can be used for specification of multiple hosts (refer to chapter 14.1).
Warning
Automatic login decreases user’s security. If an unauthorized user works on the computer for
which automatic login is enabled, he/she uses the identity of the host’s user who is authen-
ticated automatically. Therefore, automatic login should be accompanied by another security
feature, such as by user login to the operating system.
IP address which will be always assigned to the VPN client of the particular user can be speci-
fied under VPN client address. Using this method, a fixed IP address can be assigned to a user
when he/she connects to the local network via the Kerio VPN Client. It is possible to add this
IP to the list of IP addresses from which the user will be authenticated automatically.
For detailed information on the Kerio Technologies’ proprietary VPN solution, refer to chap-
ter 23.
Editing User Account
The Edit button opens a dialog window where you can edit the parameters of the user account.
This dialog window contains all of the components of the account creation guide described
above, divided into tabs in one window.
15.3 Local user database: external authentication and import of accounts
203
15.3 Local user database: external authentication and import of accounts
User in the local database can be authenticated either at the Active Directory domain or at the
Windows NT domain (see chapter 15.2, step one). To apply these authentication methods, the
WinRoute host must belong to the corresponding domain.
If WinRoute is installed on Windows, the host can be added to the domain or domain member-
ship can be changed only in the operating system (in the computer properties).
In the Software Appliance / VMware appliance edition, domain membership can be set right in
the firewall’s administration:
•in the Web Administration interface, section Domains and authentication, the Active
Directory tab.
•the Administration Console, section Users, the Active Directory tab.
WinRoute in Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance can be connected only to the
Active Directory domain, never to the Windows NT domain.
Importing user accounts
To the local user database, you can import selected accounts from theActive Directory or the
Windows NT domain (import from Windows NT is available only in WinRoute on Windows).
Each import of a user account covers creating of a local account with the identical name and
the same domain authentication parameters. Specific WinRoute parameters (such as access
rights, content rules, data transfer quotas, etc.) can be set by using the template for the local
user database (see chapter 15.1) or/and they can be defined individually for special accounts.
The Active Directory / Windows NT authentication type is set for all accounts imported..
Note: This method of user accounts import is recommended especially when Windows NT
domain is used (domain server with the Windows NT Server operating system). If Active Direc-
tory domain is used, it is easier and recommended to use the transparent support for Active
Directory (domain mapping — see chapter15.4).
To import user accounts, click on the Import button below the list of user accounts (as Domain,
Local user database must be used, otherwise the button is inactive).
In the import dialog, select the type of the domain from which accounts will be imported and,
with respect to the domain type, specify the following parameters:
•Active Directory — for import of accounts, Active Directory domain name, DNS name
or IP address of the domain server as well as login data for user database reading (any
account belonging to the domain) are required.
•NT domain — domain name is required for import. The WinRoute host must be a mem-
ber of this domain.
Note: Import of user accounts from Windows NT is available only in WinRoute on
Windows.
When connection with the corresponding domain server is established successfully, all ac-
counts in the selected domain are listed. When accounts are selected and the selection is
confirmed, the accounts are imported to the local user database.
Chapter 15 User Accounts and Groups
204
Figure 15.9 Import of accounts from Active Directory
Figure 15.10 Importing accounts from the Windows NT domain
15.4 User accounts in Active Directory — domain mapping
In WinRoute, it is possible to directly use user accounts from one or more Active Directory
domain(s). This feature is called either transparent support for Active Directory or Active
Directory domain(s) mapping. The main benefit of this feature is that the entire administration
of all user accounts and groups is maintained in Active Directory only (using standard system
tools). In WinRoute, a template can be defined for each domain that will be used to set specific
WinRoute parameters for user accounts (access rights, data transfer quotas, content rules —
see chapter 15.1). If needed, these parameters can also be set individually for any accounts.
Note: The Windows NT domain cannot be mapped as described. In case of the Windows NT
domain, it is recommended to import user accounts to the local user database (refer to 15.3)
Domain mapping requirements
The following conditions must be met to enable smooth functionality of user authentication
through Active Directory domains:
•For mapping of one domain:
1. The WinRoute host must be a member of the corresponding Active Directory do-
main.
2. Hosts in the local network (user workstations) should use the WinRoute’s DNS
forwarder as the primary DNS server, because it can process queries for Active
15.4 User accounts in Active Directory — domain mapping
205
Directory and forward them to the corresponding domain server. If another DNS
server is used, user authentication in the Active Directory may not work correctly.
•For mapping of multiple domains:
1. The WinRoute host must be a member of one of the mapped domains. This domain
will be set as primary.
2. It is necessary that the primary domain trusts any other domains mapped in
WinRoute (for details, see the documentation regarding the operating system on
the corresponding domain server).
3. For DNS configuration, the same rules as in mapping of a single domain are ap-
plied (the WinRoute’s DNS forwarder is the best option ).
Domain mapping settings
To set Active Directory domain mapping, go to:
•the Administration Console, section Users and groups →Users, the Active Directory
tab,
•in the Web Administration interface, section Users and Groups →Domains and authen-
tication, the Active Directory.
Connecting the firewall to a domain (Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance)
The upper section of the Active Directory tab provides information about domain membership
of the firewall’s host.
In the Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance edition, it is possible to add the firewall
to a domain, change domain membership or disconnect the firewall from the domain.
This can be done in the easy-to-use wizard.
Figure 15.11 Adding firewall to a domain
Chapter 15 User Accounts and Groups
206
The first page of the wizard requires the full name of the Active Directory domain (e.g.
company.com) and name and password of a user with rights to add hosts to domains.
If WinRoute cannot find the domain server of the specified domain automatically, it requires
specification of its IP address in the next step. Then the user gets informed about the result
of the attempt to add the firewall to the domain.
Primary domain mapping
To set mapping of the primary domain (the domain of which the firewall host is a member),
use option Use domain user database. For connection to the domain server, it is required to
enter username and password of an account with read rights for the user database (any user
account of the domain can be used, unless it is blocked).
Figure 15.12 Primary domain mapping
Advanced Options
Method of cooperation between WinRoute and the Active Directory can be customized by some
advanced options.
Domain mapping vs domain user authentication
The recommended method of cooperation with the Active Directory is domain mapping
(user accounts are saved and managed only in the Active Directory). However, this can
be undesirable under certain circumstances. For example if the Active Directory is imple-
mented in a network where the Windows NT domain or no domain has been used, user
accounts are already created in the WinRoute’s local database. In such case, the best so-
lution is to keep the local accounts and set only authentication in the Active Directory (so
that users can use the same password both for the domain and the firewall).
15.4 User accounts in Active Directory — domain mapping
207
Figure 15.13 Advanced options for cooperation with the Active Directory.
If WinRoute is installed on Windows, it is possible to allow authentication compatible with
older systems (i.e. authentication via the Windows NT domain). This option is required
if the domain server uses Windows NT or if any of the clients in the local network uses
Windows of older edition than Windows 2000. In Software Appliance / VMware Virtual
Appliance, this option is not available (authentication in Windows NT domain is not sup-
ported).
Then, the settings include an option of automatic import of user accounts from the Active
Directory to the local database (upon the first logon of user to the firewall by their domain
name and password, an account with the same name will be created in the local database
automatically). This option is available above all to keep the environment compatible with
older WinRoute versions. In new installations it is strongly recommended to use domain
mapping — administration of users is much more simple and much less time consuming.
For details, see the Administrator’s Guide for older versions of WinRoute (versions 6.7.0
or lower).
Selection of a domain server
In the default configuration, WinRoute automatically detects domain servers for the spec-
ified domain and uses the first detected server for connection to the Active Directory.
Automatic detection simplifies configuration significantly (it is not necessary to specify
IP addresses of individual domain servers).
If necessary, you can specify name of IP address of a specific domain server. In such case,
WinRoute will not perform automatic detection and will always connect to the specified
server only.
Chapter 15 User Accounts and Groups
208
Secured connection to the domain server
For higher security (to prevent from tapping of traffic and exploiting user passwords),
connection to the Active Directory can be encrypted. Enabling of encrypted connection
requires corresponding settings on the particular domain server (or on all servers of the
particular domain if automatic detection is used).
Mapping of other domains
To map user accounts from multiple Active Directory domains, add domains in advanced
settings available on the Other Mapping tab.
Users of other domains must login by username including the domain (e.g.
drdolittle@usoffice.company.com). User accounts with no domain specified (e.g.
wsmith), will be searched in the primary domain or in the local database.
Figure 15.14 Adding another Active Directory domain
15.4 User accounts in Active Directory — domain mapping
209
Use buttons Add or Edit to open a dialog for a new domain definition and enter parameters of
the mapped domain. For details, see above (Primary domain mapping and Advanced options).
Collision of Active Directory with the local database and conversion of accounts
During Active Directory domain mapping, collision with the local user database may occur if
a user account with an identical name exists both in the domain and in the local database. If
multiple domains are mapped, a collision may occur only between the local database and the
primary domain (accounts from other domains must include domain names which make the
name unique).
If a collision occurs, a warning is displayed at the bottom of the User Accounts tab. Click
on the link in the warning to convert selected user accounts (to replace local accounts by
corresponding Active Directory accounts).
Figure 15.15 Conversion of user accounts
The following operations will be performed automatically within each conversion:
•substitution of any appearance of the local account in the WinRoute configuration (in
traffic rules, URL rules, FTP rules, etc.) by a corresponding account from the Active
Directory domain,
•removal of the account from the local user database.
Accounts not selected for the conversion are kept in the local database (the collision is still
reported). Colliding accounts can be used — the accounts are considered as two independent
accounts. However, under these circumstances, Active Directory accounts must be always
specified including the domain (even though it belongs to the primary domain); username
without the domain specified represents an account belonging to the local database. However,
as long as possible, it is recommended to remove all collisions by the conversion.
Note: In case of user groups, collisions do not occur as local groups are always independent
from the Active Directory (even if the name of the local group is identical with the name of the
group in the particular domain).
Chapter 15 User Accounts and Groups
210
15.5 User groups
User accounts can be sorted into groups. Creating user groups provides the following benefits:
•Specific access rights can be assigned to a group of users. These rights complement
rights of individual users.
•Each group can be used when traffic and access rules are defined. This simplifies the
definition process so that you will not need to define the same rule for each user.
User groups Definitions
User groups can be defined in User and Groups →Groups.
Figure 15.16 WinRoute user groups
Domain
Use the Domain option to select a domain for which user accounts or other parameters
will be defined. This item provides a list of mapped Active Directory domains (see chap-
ter 15.4) and the local user database.
In WinRoute, it is possible to create groups only in the local user database. It is not
possible to create groups in mapped Active Directory domains. It also not possible to
import groups from the Windows NT domain or from Active Directory.
In case of groups mapped in Active Directory domains, it is possible to set only access
rules (see below — step 3 of the user group definition wizard).
Search
The Search engine can be used to filter out user groups meeting specified criteria.
The searching is interactive — each symbol typed or deleted defines the string which is
evaluated immediately and all groups including the string in either Name or Description
are viewed. The icon next to the entry can be clicked to clear the filtering string and
display all groups in the selected domain (if the Search entry is blank, the icon is hidden).
15.5 User groups
211
The searching is helpful especially when the domain includes too many groups which
might make it difficult to look up particular items.
Creating a new local user group
In the Domain combo box in Groups, select Local User Database.
Click Add to start a wizard where a new user group can be created.
Step 1 — Name and description of the group
Figure 15.17 Creating a user group — basic parameters
Name
Group name (group identification).
Description
Group description. It has an informative purpose only and may contain any information
or the field can be left empty.
Step 2 — group members
Figure 15.18 Creating a user group — adding user accounts to the group
Chapter 15 User Accounts and Groups
212
Using the Add and Remove buttons you can add or remove users to/from the group. If user
accounts have not been created yet, the group can be left empty and users can be added during
the account definition (see chapter 15.1).
Hint
When adding new users you can select multiple user accounts by holding either the Ctrl or the
Shift key.
Step 3 — group access rights
Figure 15.19 Creating a user group — members’ user rights
The group must be assigned one of the following three levels of access rights:
No access to administration
Users included in this group cannot access the WinRoute administration.
Read only access
Users included in this group can access the WinRoute administration. However, they can
only read the records and settings and they are not allowed to edit them.
Full access to administration
Users in this group have full access rights.
15.5 User groups
213
Additional rights:
Users can override WWW content rules
User belonging to the group can customize personal web content filtering settings (see
chapter 15.2).
User can unlock URL rules
This option allows its members one-shot bypassing of denial rules for blocked websites
(if allowed by the corresponding URL rule — see chapter 12.2). All performed unlock
actions are traced in the Security log.
Users can dial RAS connection
If the Internet connection uses dial-up lines, users of this group will be allowed to dial
and hang up these lines in the Web interface (see chapter 11).
Users can connect using VPN
Members of the group can connect to the local network via the Internet using the Kerio
VPN Client (for details, see chapter 23).
User can use Clientless SSL-VPN
Members of this group will be allowed to access shared files and folders in the local
network via the Clientless SSL-VPN web interface.
The Clientless SSL-VPN interface and the corresponding user right in WinRoute is available
for Windows only. For details, see chapter 24.
Users are allowed to use P2P networks
The P2P Eliminator module (detection and blocking of Peer-to-Peer networks — see chap-
ter 17.1) will not be applied to members of this group.
Users are allowed to view statistics
Users in this group will be allowed to view firewall statistics in the web interface (see
chapter 11).
Group access rights are combined with user access rights. This means that current user rights
are defined by actual rights of the user and by rights of all groups in which the user is included.
214
Chapter 16
Administrative settings
16.1 System configuration (Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appli-
ance)
In the Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance edition, the WinRoute administration
console allows setting of a few basic parameters of the firewall’s operating system. These
settings are necessary for correct functionality of the firewall and they can be found in Con-
figuration / Advanced options, on the System Configuration tab.
Figure 16.1 System configuration — host name, date, time and time zone
Server name
Name is important both for some WinRoute services (e.g. secured web interface) and for
the firewall’s operating system’s services.
The DNS forwarder module in WinRoute sets IP addresses of all the firewall’s interfaces
for the name automatically. If another DNS server is used in the local network, it is
necessary to set corresponding DNS records on it.
Date, time and time zone
Many WinRoute features (user authentication, logs, statistics, etc.) require correct setting
of date, time and time zone on the firewall.
Date and time can be set automatically but it is more useful to use an NTP server which
provides information about the current time and allows automatic management of the
16.2 Setting Remote Administration
215
firewall’s system time. The time zone also includes information about daylight saving
time settings.
Kerio Technologies offers the following free NTP servers for this purpose:
0.kerio.pool.ntp.org,1.kerio.pool.ntp.org,2.kerio.pool.ntp.org and
3.kerio.pool.ntp.org.
16.2 Setting Remote Administration
Remote administration is connection to the firewall, its monitoring and configuration changes
with the Administration Console or with the Web Administration interface from another host
that the one on which WinRoute is installed.
If WinRoute includes only traffic rules created automatically by the wizard (see chapter 7.1),
access to the remote administration is allowed via all trustworthy network interfaces (see
chapter 5). This means that remote administration is available from all local hosts.
To allow or deny remote administration via the Internet (non-trusted networks), define a cor-
responding traffic rule. Traffic between WinRoute and Administration Console is performed
by TCP and UDP protocols over port 44333. The definition can be done with the predefined
service KWF Admin. the secured version of the Web Administration interface use TCP protocol,
on port 4081 by default — predefined KWF WebAdmin-SSL service.
How to allow remote administration from the Internet
In the following example we will demonstrate how to allow WinRoute remote administration
from some Internet IP addresses.
•Source — group of IP addresses from which remote administration will be allowed (see
chapter 14.1).
For security reasons it is not recommended to allow remote administration from an
arbitrary host within the Internet (this means: do not set Source as Any or as Internet)!
•Destination —Firewall (host where WinRoute is installed).
•Service —KWF Admin (connection with the Administration Console) and KWF
WebAdmin-SSL (secured version of the Web Administration interface).
It is not recommended to allow access via the unsecured version of the Web Adminis-
tration interface (theKWF WebAdmin service)! Unsecured traffic might be tapped and
misused for assaulting the firewall and local hosts behind it.
•Action —Permit (otherwise remote administration would be blocked)
•Translation — Because the engine is running on the firewall there is no need for trans-
lation.
Figure 16.2 Traffic rule that allows remote administration
Chapter 16 Administrative settings
216
Hint
In WinRoute, you can use a similar method to allow or block remote administration of Kerio
MailServer — for connection via the Administration Console, use the predefined service KMS
Admin, for the Web Administration use HTTPS.
Note: Be very careful while defining traffic rules, otherwise you could block remote administra-
tion from the host you are currently working on. However, in most cases, WinRoute recognizes
such situation and shows a warning message. Local connections (from the WinRoute Firewall
Engine’s host) works anyway. Such a traffic cannot be blocked by any rule.
16.3 Update Checking
WinRoute enables automatic check for new versions at the Kerio Technologies website. When-
ever a new version is detected, is download and installation is offered.
Open the Update Checker tab in the Configuration →Advanced Options section to view infor-
mation on a new version and to set parameters for automatic checks for new versions.
Figure 16.3 Check for new WinRoute versions
Last update check performed ... ago
Information on how much time ago the last update check was performed.
If the time is too long (several days) this may indicate that the automatic update checks
fail for some reason (i.e. access to the update server is blocked by a traffic rule). In
such cases we recommend you to perform a check by hand (by clicking on the Check now
button), view results in the Debug log (see chapter 22.6) and take appropriate actions.
Check for new versions
Use this option to enable/disable automatic checks for new versions. Checks are per-
formed:
16.3 Update Checking
217
•2 minutes after each startup of the WinRoute Firewall Engine,
•and then every 24 hours.
Results of each attempted update check (successful or not) is logged into the Debug log
(see chapter 22.6).
Check also for beta versions
Enable this option if you want WinRoute to perform also update checks for beta versions.
If you wish to participate in testing of WinRoute beta versions, enable this option. In case
that you use WinRoute in operations in your company (i.e. at the Internet gateway of your
company), we recommend you not to use this option (beta versions are not tested yet and
they could endanger functionality of your networks, etc.).
Check now
Click on this button to check for updates immediately.
If a new version is available, detailed information links and download links (links to installation
files) are provided:
•More information — this link opens WinRoute changelog page in the default web
browser.
•Download — direct link to the particular version’s installation file. Click the link to
download the installation file in your default browser.
For detailed information on WinRoute installation, refer to chapter 2.4.
Note: Whenever a new version is detected, this information is displayed as a link in the wel-
come page of the administration window (an image providing information about the appli-
cation and the license). Clicking on the Administration Console link will take you to section
Configuration →Advanced Options, the Updates tab.
218
Chapter 17
Advanced security features
17.1 P2P Eliminator
Peer-to-Peer (P2P) networks are world-wide distributed systems, where each node can repre-
sent both a client and a server. These networks are used for sharing of big volumes of data
(this sharing is mostly illegal). DirectConnect and Kazaa are the most popular ones.
In addition to illegal data distribution, utilization of P2P networks overload lines via which
users are connected to the Internet. Such users may limit connections of other users in the
same network and may increase costs for the line (for example when volume of transmitted
data is limited for the line).
WinRoute provides the P2P Eliminator module which detects connections to P2P networks and
applies specific restrictions. Since there is a large variety of P2P networks and parameters at
individual nodes (servers, number of connections, etc.) can be changed, it is hardly possible
to detect all P2P connections.6. However, using various methods (such as known ports, estab-
lished connections, etc.), the P2P Eliminator is able to detect whether a user connects to one
or multiple P2P networks.
The following restrictions can be applied to users of P2P networks (i.e. to hosts on which
clients of such networks are run):
•Blocking options — it is possible to block access to the Internet for a particular host or
to restrict the access only to selected services (e.g. web and e-mail),
•Bandwidth limitation — it is possible to decrease speed of data transmission of P2P
clients so that other users are not affected by too much data transferred by the line.
P2P Eliminator Configuration
P2P networks are detected automatically (the P2P Eliminator module keeps running). To set
the P2P Eliminator module’s parameters, go to the P2P Eliminator tab in the Configuration →
Advanced Options section.
As implied by the previous description, it is not possible to block connections to particular
P2P networks. P2P Eliminator allows complete blocking of all traffic (i.e. access to the Internet
from the particular host), enabling of only such services which are securely not associated
with P2P networks or limiting of bandwidth (transfer speed) that can be used by P2P networks
clients. The settings will be applied to all clients of P2P networks detected by P2P Eliminator.
Check the Inform user by email option if you wish that users at whose hosts P2P networks
are detected will be warned and informed about actions to be taken (blocking of all traffic /
According to thorough tests, the detection is highly reliable (probability of failure is very low).
6
17.1 P2P Eliminator
219
Figure 17.1 Detection settings and P2P Eliminator
allowance of only certain services and length of the period for which restrictions will be ap-
plied). The email is sent only if a valid email address (see chapter 15.1) is specified in the
particular user account. This option does not apply to unauthenticated users.
The Traffic will be blocked for value defines time when the restriction for the particular host
will be applied. The P2P Eliminator module enables traffic for this user automatically when
the specified time expires. The time of disconnection should be long enough to make the user
consider consequences and to stop trying to connect to P2P networks.
If traffic of P2P network clients is not blocked, it is possible to set bandwidth limitation for P2P
networks at the bottom of the P2P Eliminator tab. Internet lines are usually asymmetric (the
speed vary for incoming and outgoing direction); therefore, this limitation is set separately for
each direction. Bandwidth limitation applies only to traffic of P2P networks (detected by P2P
Eliminator), other services are not affected.
Figure 17.2 Bandwidth limits applied to P2P networks
Chapter 17 Advanced security features
220
Note:
1. If a user who is allowed to use P2P networks (see chapter 15.1) is connected to the fire-
wall from a certain host, no P2P restrictions are applied to this host. Settings in the P2P
Eliminator tab are always applied to unauthorized users.
2. Information about P2P detection and blocked traffic can be viewed in the Status →Hosts /
users section (for details, refer to chapter 19.1).
3. If you wish to notify also another person when a P2P network is detected (e.g. the WinRoute
administrator), define the alert on the Alerts Settings tab of the Configuration →Account-
ing section. For details, see chapter 19.4.
Parameters for detection of P2P networks
Click Advanced to set parameters for P2P detection.
Figure 17.3 Settings of P2P networks detection
Ports of P2P networks
List of ports which are exclusively used by P2P networks. These ports are usually ports for
control connections — ports (port ranges) for data sharing can be set by users themselves.
Ports in the list can be defined by port numbers or by port ranges. Individual values are
separated by commas while dash is used for definition of ranges.
17.2 Special Security Settings
221
Number of suspicious connections
Big volume of connections established from the client host is a typical feature of P2P
networks (usually one connection for each file). The Number of connections value defines
maximal number of client’s network connections that must be reached to consider the
traffic as suspicious.
The optimum value depends on circumstances (type of user’s work, frequently used net-
work applications, etc.) and it must be tested. If the value is too low, the system can be
unreliable (users who do not use P2P networks might be suspected). If the value is too
high, reliability of the detection is decreased (less P2P networks are detected).
Safe services
Certain “legitimate” services may also show characteristics of traffic in P2P networks (e.g.
big number of concurrent connections). To ensure that traffic is not detected incorrectly
and users of these services are not persecuted by mistake, it is possible to define list of
so called secure services. These services will be excluded from detection of P2P traffic.
The Define services... button opens a dialog where services can be define that will not be
treated as traffic in P2P network. All services defined in Configuration →Definitions →
Services are available (for details, refer to chapter sect-services"/>).
Warning
Default values of parameters of P2P detection were set with respect to long-term testing. As
already mentioned, it is not always possible to say that a particular user really uses P2P net-
works or not which results only in certain level of probability. Change of detection parameters
may affect its results crucially. Therefore, it is recommended to change parameters of P2P
networks detection only in legitimate cases (e.g. if a new port number is detected which is
used only by a P2P network and by no legitimate application or if it is found that a legitimate
service is repeatedly detected as a P2P network).
17.2 Special Security Settings
WinRoute provides several security options which cannot be defined by traffic rules. These
options can be set in the Security settings tab of the Configuration →Advanced Options section.
Chapter 17 Advanced security features
222
Figure 17.4 Security options — Anti-Spoofing and cutting down number of connections for one host
Anti-Spoofing
Anti-Spoofing checks whether only packets with allowed source IP addresses are received at
individual interfaces of the WinRoute host. This function protects WinRoute host from attacks
from the internal network that use false IP addresses (so called spoofing).
For each interface, any source IP address belonging to any network connected to the interface
is correct (either directly or using other routers). For any interface connected to the Internet
(so called external interface), any IP address which is not allowed at any other interface is
correct.
Detailed information on networks connected to individual interfaces is acquired in the routing
table.
The Anti-Spoofing function can be configured in the Anti-Spoofing folder in Configuration →
Advanced Options.
Enable Anti-Spoofing
This option activates Anti-Spoofing.
Log
If this option is on, all packets that have not passed the anti-spoofing rules will be logged
in the Security log (for details see chapter 22.11).
Connections Count Limit
This security function defines a limit for the maximum number of network connections which
can be established from one local host (workstation) to the Internet or from the Internet to the
local server via a mapped port.
Incoming and outgoing connections are monitored separately. If number of all connections
established from/to a single local host in any direction reaches the specified value, WinRoute
block any further connections in the particular direction.
17.2 Special Security Settings
223
These restrictions protects firewall (WinRoute host) from overload and may also help protect
it from attacks to the target server, reduce activity and impact of a worm or Trojan horse.
Count limit for outgoing connections is useful for example when a local client host is at-
tacked by a worm or Trojan horse which attempts to establish connections to larger number
of various servers. Limiting of number of incoming connections can for example prevent the
target from so called SYN flood attacks (flooding the server by opening too many concurrent
connections without any data transferred).
224
Chapter 18
Other settings
18.1 Routing table
Using Administration Console you can view or edit the system routing table of the host where
WinRoute is running. This can be useful especially to resolve routing problems remotely (it is
not necessary to use applications for terminal access, remote desktop, etc.).
To view or modify the routing table go to Configuration →Routing Table. This section provides
up-to-date version of the routing table of the operating system including so called persistent
routes (routes added by the route -p command).
Note:
1. In the Internet connection failover mode (see chapter 6.3), only the current default route
is shown (depending on which Internet interface is currently active).
2. In case of multiple Internet links in the network load balancing mode (see chapter 6.4),
only a single default route will be displayed which is routed through the link with the
highest proposed speed.
Figure 18.1 Firewall’s system routing table
Dynamic and static routes can be added and/or removed in section Routing table. Dynamic
routes are valid only until the operating system is restarted or until removed by the route
system command. Static routes are saved in WinRoute and they are restored upon each restart
of the operating system.
18.1 Routing table
225
Note: Changes in the routing table might interrupt the connection between the WinRoute Fire-
wall Engine and the Administration Console. We recommend to check the routing table thor-
oughly before clicking the Apply button!
Route Types
The following route types are used in the WinRoute routing table:
•System routes — routes downloaded from the operating system’s routing table (includ-
ing so called persistent routes). These routes cannot be edited some of them can be
removed — see the Removing routes from the Routing Table section).
•Static routes — manually defined routes managed by WinRoute (see below). These
routes can be added, modified and/or removed.
The checking boxes can be used to disable routes temporarily —such routes are pro-
vided in the list of inactive routes. Static routes are marked with an Sicon.
•VPN routes — routes to VPN clients and to networks at remote endpoints of VPN tun-
nels (for details, see chapter 23). These routes are created and removed dynamically
upon connecting and disconnecting of VPN clients or upon creating and removing of
VPN tunnels. VPN routes cannot be created, modified nor removed by hand.
•Inactive routes — routes which are currently inactive are showed in a separate section.
These can be static routes that are temporarily disabled, static routes via an interfaces
which has been disconnected or removed from the system, etc.
Static routes
WinRoute includes a special system for creation and management of static routes in the routing
table. All static routes defined in WinRoute are saved into the configuration file and upon each
startup of the WinRoute Firewall Engine they are added to the system routing table. In addition
to this, these routes are monitored and managed all the time WinRoute is running. This means
that whenever any of these routes is removed by the route command, it is automatically
added again.
Note:
1. The operating system’s persistent routes are not used for implementation of static routes
(for management of these routes, WinRoute uses a proprietary method).
2. If a static connection uses a dial-up, any UDP or TCP packet with the SYN flag dials the
line. For detailed information, see chapter 6.2.
Definitions of Dynamic and Static Rules
Click on the Add (or Edit when a particular route is selected) button to display a dialog for
route definition.
Chapter 18 Other settings
226
Figure 18.2 Adding a route to the routing table
Network, Network Mask
IP address and mask of the destination network.
Interface
Selection of an interface through which the specific packet should be forwarded.
Gateway
IP address of the gateway (router) which can route to the destination network. The IP
address of the gateway must be in the same IP subnet as the selected interface.
Metric
“Distance” of the destination network. The number stands for the number of routers that
a packet must pass through to reach the destination network.
Metric is used to find the best route to the desired network. The lower the metric value,
the “shorter” the route is.
Note: Metric in the routing table may differ from the real network topology. It may be
modified according to the priority of each line, etc.
Create a static route
Enable this option to make this route static. Such route will be restored automatically by
WinRoute(see above). A brief description providing various information (why the route
was created, etc.) about the route can be attached.
If this option is not enabled, the route will be valid only until the operating system is
restarted or until removed manually in the Administration Console or using the route
command.
18.2 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
227
Removing routes from the Routing Table
Using the Remove button in the WinRoute admin console, records can be removed from the
routing table. The following rules are used for route removal:
•Static routes in the Static Routes folder are managed by WinRoute. Removal of any of
the static routes would remove the route from the system routing table immediately
and permanently (after clicking on the Apply button).
•Dynamic (system) route will be removed as well, regardless whether it was added in
the Administration Console or by the route command. However, it is not possible to
remove any route to a network which is connected to an interface.
•Persistent route of the operating system will be removed from the routing table only
after restart of the operating system. Upon reboot of the operating system, it will be
restored automatically. There are many methods that can be used to create persistent
routes (the methods vary according to operating system — in some systems, the route
-p or the route command called from an execution script can be used, etc.). It is not
possible to find out how a particular persistent route was created and how it might be
removed for good.
18.2 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
WinRoute supports UPnP protocol (Universal Plug-and-Play). This protocol enables client appli-
cations (i.e. Microsoft MSN Messenger) to detect the firewall and make a request for mapping of
appropriate ports from the Internet for the particular host in the local network. Such mapping
is always temporary — it is either applied until ports are released by the application (using
UPnP messages) or until expiration of the certain timeout.
The required port must not collide with any existing mapped port or any traffic rule allowing
access to the firewall from the Internet. Otherwise, the UPnP port mapping request will be
denied.
Configuration of the UPnP support
To configure UPnP go to the Security Settings folder in Configuration →Advanced Options.
Figure 18.3 UPnP settings (the Security Settings tab under Configuration →Advanced Options)
Chapter 18 Other settings
228
Enable UPnP
This option enables UPnP.
Warning
If WinRoute is running on Windows XP,Windows Server 2003,Windows Vista or Windows
Server 2008, check that the following system services are not running before you start
the UPnP function:
•SSDP Discovery Service
•Universal Plug and Play Device Host
If any of these services is running, close it and deny its automatic startup. In WinRoute,
these services work with the UPnP protocol in Windows, and therefore they cannot be
used together with UPnP.
Note: The WinRoute installation program detects the services and offers their stopping
and denial.
Log packets
If this option is enabled, all packets passing through ports mapped with UPnP will be
recorded in the Filter log (see chapter 22.9)).
Log connections
If this option is enabled, all packets passing through ports mapped with UPnP will be
recorded in the Connection log (see chapter 22.5).
Warning
Apart from the fact that UPnP is a useful feature, it may also endanger network security,
especially in case of networks with many users where the firewall could be controlled by too
many users. A WinRoute administrator should consider carefully whether to prefer security or
functionality of applications that require UPnP.
Using traffic policy (see chapter 7.3) you can limit usage of UPnP and enable it to certain IP
addresses or certain users only.
Example:
Figure 18.4 Traffic rules allowing UPnP for specific hosts
The first rule allows UPnP only from UPnP Clients IP group. The second rule denies UPnP from
other hosts (IP addresses).
18.3 Relay SMTP server
229
18.3 Relay SMTP server
WinRoute provides a function which enables notification to users or/and administrators by
email alerts. These alert messages can be sent upon various events, for example when a virus
is detected (see chapter 13.3), when a Peer-to-Peer network is detected (refer to chapter 17.1),
when an alert function is set for certain events (details in chapter 15.1) or upon reception of
an alert (see chapter 19.4).
For this purpose, WinRoute needs an SMTP Relay Server. This server is used for forwarding of
infected messages to a specified address.
Note: WinRoute does not provided any built-in SMTP server.
To configure an SMTP server, go to the SMTP server tab in Configuration →Advanced Options.
Figure 18.5 SMTP settings — reports sending
Server
Name or IP address of the server.
Note: If available, we recommend you to use an SMTP server within the local network
(messages sent by WinRoute are often addressed to local users).
SMTP requires authentication
Enable this option to require authentication through username and password at the spec-
ified SMTP server.
Specify sender email address in “From” header
In this option you can specify a sender’s email address (i.e. the value for the From header)
for email sent from WinRoute (email or SMS alerts sent to users). Preset From header does
not apply to messages forwarded during antivirus check (refer to chapter 13.4).
This item must be preset especially if the SMTP server strictly checks the header (mes-
sages without or with an invalid From header are considered as spams). The item can also
Chapter 18 Other settings
230
be used for reference in recipient’s mail client or for email classification. This is why it is
always recommended to specify sender’s email address in WinRoute.
Connection test
Click Test to test functionality of sending of email via the specified SMTP server. WinRoute
sends a testing email message to the specified email address.
Warning
1. If SMTP is specified by a DNS name, it cannot be used until WinRoute resolves a corre-
sponding IP address (by a DNS query). The IP address of specified SMTP server cannot be
resolved warning message is displayed in the SMTP Relay tab until the IP address is not
found. If the warning is still displayed, this implies that an invalid (non-existent) DNS
name is specified or the DNS server does not respond.
If the warning on the SMTP server tab is still displayed, it means that an invalid DNS
name was specified or that an error occurred in the communication (DNS server is not
responding). Therefore, we recommend you to specify SMTP server by an IP address if
possible.
2. Communication with the SMTP server must not be blocked by any rule, otherwise the
Connection to SMTP server is blocked by traffic rules error is reported upon clicking the
Apply button.
For detailed information about traffic rules, refer to chapter 7.
231
Chapter 19
Status Information
WinRoute activities can be well monitored by the administrator (or by other users with ap-
propriate rights). There are three types of information — status monitoring, statistics and
logs.
•Communication of each computer, users connected or all connections using WinRoute
can be monitored.
Note:
1. WinRoute monitors only traffic between the local network and the Internet. The
traffic within the local network is not monitored.
2. Only traffic allowed by traffic rules (see chapter 7) can be viewed. If a traffic
attempt which should have been denied is detected, the rules are not well defined.
•Statistics provide information on users and network traffic for a certain time period.
Statistics are viewed in the form of charts and tables. For details see chapter 20.
•Logs are files where information about certain activity is reported (e.g. error or warn-
ing reports, debug information etc.). Each item is represented by one row starting with
a timestamp (date and time of the event). In all language versions of WinRoute, reports
recorded are available in English only and they are generated by the WinRoute Firewall
Engine. For details, refer to chapter 22.
The following chapters describe what information can be viewed and how its viewing can be
changed to accommodate the user’s needs.
19.1 Active hosts and connected users
In Status →Active Hosts, the hosts within the local network or active users using WinRoute for
communication with the Internet will be displayed.
Note: For more details about the firewall user’s logon see chapter 10.1.
Look at the upper window to view information on individual hosts, connected users, data
size/speed, etc.
The following information can be found in the Active Hosts window:
Hostname
DNS name of a host. In case that no corresponding DNS record is found, IP address is
displayed instead.
Chapter 19 Status Information
232
Figure 19.1 List of active hosts and users connected to the firewall
User
Name of the user which is connected from a particular host. If no user is connected, the
item is empty.
Currently Rx, Currently Tx
Monitors current traffic speed (kilobytes per second) in both directions (from and to the
host — Rx values represent incoming data, Tx values represent outgoing data)
The following columns are hidden by default. To view these columns select the Modify columns
option in the context menu (see below).
IP address
IP address of the host from which the user is connecting from
Login time
Date and time of the recent user login to the firewall
Login duration
Monitors length of the connection. This information is derived from the current time
status and the time when the user logged on
Inactivity time
Duration of the time with zero data traffic. You can set the firewall to logout users
automatically after the inactivity exceeds allowed inactivity time (for more details see
chapter 11.1)
Start time
Date and time when the host was first acknowledged by WinRoute. This information is
kept in the operating system until the WinRoute Firewall Engine disconnected.
Total received, Total transmitted
Total size of the data (in kilobytes) received and transmitted since the Start time
19.1 Active hosts and connected users
233
Connections
Total number of connections to and from the host. Details can be displayed in the context
menu (see below)
Authentication method
Authentication method used for the recent user connection:
•plaintext — user is connected through an insecure login site plaintext
•SSL — user is connected through a login site protected by SSL security system
SSL
•proxy — a WinRoute proxy server is used for authentication and for connection
to Websites
•NTLM — user was authenticated with NTLM in NT domain (this is the standard
type of login if Internet Explorer 5.5 or later or Firefox/SeaMonkey core version
1.3 or later is used)
•VPN client — user has connected to the local network using the Kerio VPN Client
(for details, see chapter 23).
Note: Connections are not displayed and the volume of transmitted data is not
monitored for VPN clients.
For more details about connecting and user authentication see chapter 10.1.
Information displayed in the Active Hosts window can be refreshed by clicking on the Re-
freshbutton.
Use the Show / Hide details to open the bottom window providing detailed information on
a user, host and open connections.
Active Hosts dialog options
Clicking the right mouse button in the Active Hosts window (or on the record selected) will
display a context menu that provides the following options:
Figure 19.2 Context menu for the Active Hosts window
Chapter 19 Status Information
234
User quota
Use this option to show quota of the particular user (Administration Console switches to
the User quota tab in Status →Statistics and selects the particular user automatically).
The User quota option is available in the context menu only for hosts from which a user
is connected to the firewall.
Refresh
This option refreshes information in the Active Hosts window immediately (this function
is equal to the Refresh button displayed at the bottom of the window).
Auto refresh
Settings for automatic refreshing of the information in the Active Hosts window. Informa-
tion can be refreshed in the interval from 5 seconds up to 1 minute or the auto refresh
function can be switched off (No refresh).
Logout user
Immediate logout of a selected user.
Logout all users
Immediate logout of all firewall users.
Manage Columns
By choosing this option you can select columns to be displayed in the Active Hosts window
(see chapter 3.2).
Detailed information on a selected host and user
Detailed information on a selected host and connected user are provided in the bottom window
of the Active Hosts section.
Open the General tab to view information on user’s login, size/speed of transmitted data and
information on activities of a particular user.
Figure 19.3 Information about selected host/user — actions overview
19.1 Active hosts and connected users
235
Login information
Information on logged-in users:
•User — name of a user, DNS name (if available) and IP address of the host from
which the user is connected
•Login time — date and time when a user logged-in, authentication method that
was used and inactivity time (idle).
If no user is connected from a particular host, detailed information on the host are pro-
vided instead of login information.
Figure 19.4 Host info (if no user is connected from it)
•Host — DNS name (if available) and IP address of the host
•Idle time — time for which no network activity performed by the host has been
detected
Traffic information
Information on size of data received (Download) and sent (Upload) by the particular user
(or host) and on current speed of traffic in both directions.
Overview of detected activities of the particular user (host) are given in the main section of
this window:
Activity Time
Time (in minutes and seconds) when the activity was detected.
Activity Event
Type of detected activity (network communication). WinRoute distinguishes between the
following activities: SMTP,POP3,WWW (HTTP traffic), FTP,Streams (real-time transmis-
sion of audio and video streams) and P2P (use of Peer-to-Peer networks).
Note: WinRoute is not able to recognize which type of P2P network is used. According to
results of certain testing it can only "guess" that it is possible that the client is connected
to such network. For details, refer to chapter 17.1.
Activity Description
Detailed information on a particular activity:
•WWW — title of a Web page to which the user is connected (if no title is available,
URL will be displayed instead). Page title is a hypertext link — click on this link to
open a corresponding page in the browser which is set as default in the operating
system.
Note: For better transparency, only the first visited page of each web server to
which the user connected is displayed. For detailed information about all visited
pages, refer to Kerio StaR (see chapter 21).
•SMTP, POP3 — DNS name or IP address of the server, size of down-
loaded/uploaded data.
Chapter 19 Status Information
236
•FTP — DNS name or IP address of the server, size of downloaded/saved data,
information on currently downloaded/saved file (name of the file including the
path, size of data downloaded/uploaded from/to this file).
•Multimedia (real time transmission of video and audio data) — DNS name or IP
address of the server, type of used protocol (MMS,RTSP,RealAudio, etc.) and
volume of downloaded data.
•P2P — information that the client is probably using Peer-To-Peer network.
Information about connections from/to the Internet
On the Connections tab, you can view detailed information about connections established from
the selected host to the Internet and in the other direction (e.g. by mapped ports, UPnP, etc.).
The list of connections provides an overview of services used by the selected user. Undesirable
connections can be terminated immediately.
Figure 19.5 Information about selected host/user — connections overview
Information about connections:
Traffic rule
Name of the WinRoute traffic rule (see chapter 7) by which the connection was allowed.
Service
Name of the service. For non-standard services, port numbers and protocols are dis-
played.
Source, Destination
Source and destination IP address (or name of the host in case that the Show DNS names
option is enabled —see below).
19.1 Active hosts and connected users
237
The following columns are hidden by default. They can be shown through the Modify columns
dialog opened from the context menu (for details, see chapter 3.2).
Source port, Destination port
Source and destination port (only for TCP and UDP protocols).
Protocol
Protocol used for the transmission (TCP, UDP, etc.).
Timeout
Time left before the connection will be removed from the table of WinRoute’s connections.
Each new packet within this connection sets timeout to the initial value. If no data is
transmitted via a particular connection, WinRoute removes the connection from the ta-
ble upon the timeout expiration — the connection is closed and no other data can be
transmitted through it.
Rx, Tx
Volume of incoming (Rx) and outgoing (Tx) data transmitted through a particular connec-
tion (in KB).
Info
Additional information (such as a method and URL in case of HTTP protocol).
Use the Show DNS names option to enable/disable showing of DNS names instead of IP ad-
dresses in the Source and Destination columns. If a DNS name for an IP address cannot be
resolved, the IP address is displayed.
You can click on the Colors button to open a dialog where colors used in this table can be set.
Note:
1. Upon right-clicking on a connection, the context menu extended by the Kill connection
option is displayed. This option can be used to kill the particular connection between the
LAN and the Internet immediately.
2. The selected host’s overview of connections lists only connections established from the
particular host to the Internet and vice versa. Local connections established between the
particular host and the firewall can be viewed only in Status →Connections (see chap-
ter 19.2). Connections between hosts within the LAN are not routed through WinRoute,
and therefore they cannot be viewed there.
Histogram
The Histogram tab provides information on data volume transferred from and to the selected
host in a selected time period. The chart provides information on the load of this host’s traffic
on the Internet line through the day.
Chapter 19 Status Information
238
Figure 19.6 Information on selected host and user — traffic histogram
Select an item from the Time interval combo box to specify a time period which the chart will
refer to (2 hours or 1 day). The xaxis of the chart represents time and the yaxis represents
traffic speed. The xaxis is measured accordingly to a selected time period, while measurement
of the yaxis depends on the maximal value of the time interval and is set automatically (bytes
per second is the basic measure unit — B/s).
This chart includes volume of transferred data in the selected direction in certain time inter-
vals (depending on the selected period). The green curve represents volume of incoming data
(download) in a selected time period, while the area below the curve represents the total vol-
ume of data transferred in the period. The red curve and area provide the same information
for outgoing data (upload). Below the chart, basic statistic information, such as volume of data
currently transferred (in the last interval) and the average and maximum data volume per an
interval, is provided.
Select an option for Picture size to set a fixed format of the chart or to make it fit to the
Administration Console screen.
19.2 Network connections overview
In Status →Connections, all the network connections which can be detected by WinRoute in-
clude the following:
•client connections to the Internet through WinRoute
•connections from the host on which WinRoute is running
19.2 Network connections overview
239
•connections from other hosts to services provided by the host with WinRoute
•connections performed by clients within the Internet that are mapped to services run-
ning in LAN
WinRoute administrators are allowed to close any of the active connections.
Note:
1. Connections among local clients will not be detected nor displayed by WinRoute.
2. UDP protocol is also called connectionless protocol. This protocol does not perform
any connection. The communication is performed through individual messages (so-called
datagrams). Periodic data exchange is monitored in this case.
Figure 19.7 Overview of all connections established via WinRoute
One connection is represented by each line of the Connections window. These are network
connections, not user connections (each client program can occupy more than one connection
at a given moment).
The columns contain the following information:
Traffic rule
Name of the WinRoute traffic rule (see chapter 7) by which the connection was allowed.
Service
Name of transmitted service (if such service is defined in WinRoute — see chapter 14.3).
If the service is not defined in WinRoute, the corresponding port number and protocol
will be displayed instead (e.g. 5004/UDP).
Chapter 19 Status Information
240
Source, Destination
IP address of the source (the connection initiator) and of the destination. If there is an
appropriate reverse record in DNS, the IP address will be substituted with the DNS name.
The following columns are hidden by default. They can be enabled through the Modify columns
dialog opened from the context menu (for details, see chapter 3.2).
Source port, Destination port
Ports used for the particular connection.
Protocol
Communication protocol (TCP or UDP)
Timeout
Time left until automatic disconnection. The countdown starts when data traffic stops.
Each new data packet sets the counter to zero.
Rx, Tx
Total size of data received (Rx) or transmitted (Tx) during the connection (in kilobytes).
Received data means the data transferred from Source to Destination, transmitted data
means the opposite.
Info
An informational text describing the connection (e.g. about the protocol inspector applied
to the connection).
Information in Connections is refreshed automatically within a user defined interval or the
Refresh button can be used for manual refreshing.
Options of the Connections Dialog
The following options are available below the list of connections:
•Hide local connections — connections from or/and to the WinRoute host will not be
displayed in the Connections window.
This option only makes the list better-arranged and distinguishes connections of other
hosts in the local network from the WinRoute host’s connections.
•Show DNS names — this option displays DNS names instead of IP addresses. If a DNS
name is not resolved for a certain connection, the IP address will be displayed.
Right-click on the Connections window (on the connection selected) to view a context menu
including the following options:
Kill connection
Use this option to finish selected connection immediately (in case of UDP connections all
following datagrams will be dropped).
Note: This option is active only if the context menu has been called by right-clicking on
a particular connection. If called up by right-clicking in the Connections window (with no
connection selected), the option is inactive.
19.2 Network connections overview
241
Figure 19.8 Context menu for Connections
Refresh
This option will refresh the information in the Connections window immediately. This
function is equal to the function of the Refresh button at the bottom of the window.
Auto refresh
Settings for automatic refreshing of the information in the Connections window. Informa-
tion can be refreshed in the interval from 5 seconds up to 1 minute or the auto refresh
function can be switched off (No refresh).
Manage Columns
By choosing this option you can select which columns will be displayed in the Connections
window (see chapter 3.2).
Color Settings
Clicking on the Colors button displays the color settings dialog to define colors for each con-
nection:
Figure 19.9 Connection colors settings
Chapter 19 Status Information
242
For each item either a color or the Default option can be chosen. Default colors are set in the
operating system (the common setting for default colors is black font and white background).
Font Color
•Active connections — connections with currently active data traffic
•Inactive connections — TCP connections which have been closed but 2 minutes
after they were killed they are still kept active — to avoid repeated packet mis-
handling)
Background Color
•Local connections — connections where an IP address of the host with WinRoute
is either source or destination
•Inbound connections — connections from the Internet to the local network (al-
lowed by firewall)
•Outbound connections — connections from the local network to the Internet
Note: Incoming and outgoing connections are distinguished by detection of direction of
IP addresses — “out” (SNAT) or “in” (DNAT). For details, refer to chapter 7.
19.3 List of connected VPN clients
In Status →VPN clients, you can see an overview of VPN clients currently connected to the
WinRoute’s VPN server.
Figure 19.10 List of connected VPN clients
The information provided is as follows:
•Username used for authentication to the firewall. VPN traffic is reflected in statistics
of this user.
•The operating system on which the user have the Kerio VPN Client installed.
•DNS name of the host which the user connects from. If WinRoute cannot resolve the
corresponding hostname from the DNS, its (public) IP address is displayed instead.
•IP address assigned to the client by the VPN server. This IP address “represents” the
client in the local network.
•Session duration.
•Kerio VPN Client version, including build number.
The following columns are hidden in the default settings of the VPN clients window (for details
on showing and hiding columns, see chapter 3.2):
19.4 Alerts
243
•IP address — public IP address of the host which the client connects from (see the
Hostname column above).
•Client status — connecting,authenticating (WinRoute verifies username and password),
authenticated (username and password correct, client configuration in progress), con-
nected (the configuration has been completed, the client can now communicate with
hosts within the local network).
Note: Disconnected clients are removed from the list automatically.
19.4 Alerts
WinRoute enables automatic sending of messages informing the administrator about impor-
tant events. This makes WinRoute administration more comfortable, since it is not necessary
to connect to the firewall via the Administration Console too frequently to view all status in-
formation and logs (however, this does not mean that it is not worthy to do this occasionally).
WinRoute generates alert messages upon detection of any specific event for which alerts are
preset. All alert messages are recorded into the Alert log (see chapter 22.3). The WinRoute
administrator can specify which alerts will be sent to whom, as well as a format of the alerts.
Sent alerts can be viewed in Status →Alerts.
Note: SMTP relay must be set in WinRoute (see chapter 18.3), otherwise alerting will not work.
Alerts Settings
Alerts settings can be configured in the Alerts settings tab under Configuration →Accounting.
Figure 19.11 WinRoute Alerts
This tab provides list of “rules” for alert sending. Use checking boxes to enable/disable indi-
vidual rules.
Use the Add or the Edit button to (re)define an alert rule.
Chapter 19 Status Information
244
Figure 19.12 Alert Definitions
alert
Type of the event upon which the alert will be sent:
•Virus detected — antivirus engine has detected a virus in a file transmitted by
HTTP, FTP, SMTP or POP3 (refer to chapter 13).
•Portscan detected —WinRoute has detected a port scanning attack (either an
attack passing through or an attack addressed to the WinRoute host).
•Host connection limit reached — a host in the local network has reached the con-
nection limit (see chapter 17.2). This may indicate deployment of an undesirable
network application (e.g. Trojan horse or a spyware) on a corresponding host.
•Low free disk space warning — this alert warns the administrator that the free
space of the WinRoute host is low (under 11 per cent of the total disk capacity).
WinRoute needs enough disk space for saving of logs, statistics, configuration set-
tings, temporary files (e.g. an installation archive of a new version or a file which
is currently scanned by an antivirus engine) and other information. Whenever the
WinRoute administrator receives such alert message, adequate actions should be
performed immediately.
•New version available — a new version of WinRoute has been detected at the
server of Kerio Technologies during an update check. The administrator can
download this version from the server or from http://www.kerio.com/ and
install it using the Administration Console (see chapter 16.3).
•User transfer quota exceeded — a user has reached daily, weekly or monthly user
transfer quota and WinRoute has responded by taking an appropriate action. For
details, see chapter 15.1.
•Connection failover event — the Internet connection has failed and the system
was switched to a secondary line, or vice versa (it was switched back to the pri-
mary line). For details, refer to chapter 6.3.
•License expiration — expiration date for the corresponding WinRoute li-
19.4 Alerts
245
cense/subscription (or license of any module integrated in WinRoute, such as
Kerio Web Filter, the McAfee antivirus, etc.) is getting closer. The WinRoute admin-
istrator should check the expiration dates and prolong a corresponding license
or subscription (for details, refer to chapter 4).
•Dial / Hang-up of RAS line WinRoute is dialing or hanging-up a RAS line (see
chapter 5). The alert message provides detailed information on this event: line
name, reason of the dialing, username and IP address of the host from which the
request was sent.
Action
Method of how the user will be informed:
•Send email — information will be sent by an email message,
•Send SMS (shortened email) — short text message will be sent to the user’s cell
phone.
Note: SMS messages are also sent as email. User of the corresponding cell phone
must use an appropriate email address (e.g. number@provider.com). Sending
of SMS to telephone numbers (for example via GSM gateways connected to the
WinRoute host) is not supported.
To
Email address of the recipient or of his/her cell phone (related to the Action settings).
Recipients can be selected from the list of users (email addresses) used for other alerts
or new email addresses can be added by hand.
Valid at time interval
Select a time interval in which the alert will be sent. Click Edit to edit the interval or to
create a new one (details in chapter 14.2).
Alert Templates
Formats of alert messages (email or/and SMS) are defined by templates. Individual formats
can be viewed in the Status →Alerts section of the Administration Console. Templates are
predefined messages which include certain information (e.g. username, IP address, number of
connections, virus information, etc.) defined through specific variables. WinRoute substitutes
variables by corresponding values automatically. The WinRoute administrator can customize
these templates.
Templates are stored in the templates subdirectory of the installation directory of WinRoute
(the typical path is C:\Program Files\Kerio\WinRoute Firewall\templates):
•the console subdirectory — messages displayed in the top section of Status →Alerts
(overview),
•the console\details subdirectory — messages displayed at the bottom section of
Status →Alerts (details),
•the email subdirectory — messages sent by email (each template contains a message
in the plain text and HTML formats),
•the sms subdirectory — SMS messages sent to a cell phone.
Chapter 19 Status Information
246
In the Administration Console, alerts are displayed in the language currently set as preferred
(see Kerio Administration Console — Help). If alert templates in the language are not available,
English version is used instead. Email and SMS alerts are always in English.
Note: In the current WinRoute version, alerts are available only in English and Czech.
Alerts overview (in Administration Console)
Overview of all sent alerts (defined in Configuration →Accounting) can be found under Status
→Alert Messages. The language set in the Administration Console is used (if a template in
a corresponding language is not found, the alert is displayed in English).
Overview of all sent alerts (sorted by dates and times) is provided in the top section of this
window.
Figure 19.13 Overview of sent alerts
Each line provides information on one alert:
•Date — date and time of the event,
•Alert — event type,
•Details — basic information on events (IP address, username, virus name, etc.).
Click an event to view detailed information on the item including a text description (defined
by templates under console\details — see above) in the bottom section of the window.
Note: Details can be optionally hidden or showed by clicking the Hide/Show details button
(details are displayed by default).
19.4 Alerts
247
Figure 19.14 Details of a selected event
248
Chapter 20
Basic statistics
Statistical information about users (volume of transmitted data, used services, categorization
of web pages) as well as of network interfaces of the WinRoute host (volume of transmitted
data, load on individual lines) can be viewed in WinRoute.
In the Administration Console, it is possible to view basic quota information for individual
users (volume of transferred data and quota usage information) and statistics of network
interfaces (transferred data, traffic charts). Detailed statistics of users, web pages and volume
of transferred data are available in the firewall’s web interface (Kerio StaR — see chapter 21).
20.1 Volume of transferred data and quota usage
The User Statistics of the Status →Statistics section provides detailed statistics on volume of
data transmitted by individual users during various time periods (today, this week, this month
and total).
The Quota column provides usage of transfer quota by a particular user in percents (see chap-
ter 15.1). Colors are used for better reference:
•green — 0%-74% of the quota is used
•yellow — 75%-99% of the quota is used
•red — 100% (limit reached)
Note:
1. User quota consists of three limits: daily, weekly and monthly. The Quota column provides
the highest value of the three percentual values (if the daily usage is 50% of the daily quota,
the weekly usage is 90% and the monthly usage is 70%, yellowed 90% value is displayed in
the Quota column).
2. Monthly quota is reset automatically at the beginning of an accounting period. This period
may differ from a civil month (see chapter 21.2).
The all users line provides total volume of data transmitted by all users in the table (even of
the unrecognized ones). The unrecognized users item includes all users who are currently not
authenticated at the firewall. These lines do not include quota usage information.
Note:
1. Optionally, other columns providing information on volume of data transmitted in indi-
vidual time periods in both directions can be displayed. Direction of data transmission
20.1 Volume of transferred data and quota usage
249
Figure 20.1 User statistics
is related to the user (the IN direction stands for data received by the user, while OUT
represents data sent by the user). Hiding/showing of columns is addressed in chapter 3.2.
2. Information of volume of data transferred by individual users is saved in the stats.cfg
file in the WinRoute directory. This implies that this data will be saved the next time the
WinRoute Firewall Engine will be started.
User Quota dialog options
Right-click on the table (or on an item of a selected user) to open the context menu with the
following options:
Figure 20.2 User Quota context menu
Delete User Traffic Counters
Removal of the selected line with data referring to a particular user. This option is helpful
for reference purposes only (e.g. to exclude blocked user accounts from the list, etc.).
Removed accounts will be added to the overview automatically when data in the particular
account is changed (e.g. when we unblocked an account and its user connects and starts
to communicate again).
Chapter 20 Basic statistics
250
Warning
Be aware that using this option for the all users item resets counters of all users, including
unrecognized ones!
Note: Values of volumes of transferred data are also used to check user traffic quota (see
chapter 15.1). Reset of user statistics also unblocks traffic of the particular user in case
that the traffic has been blocked for quota reasons.
View host...
This option is not available unless the selected user is connected to the firewall. The View
host option switches to the Status →Active Hosts section of the host the particular user
is connected from.
If the user is connected from multiple hosts, the View host option opens a submenu with
a list of all hosts which the particular user is connected from.
Refresh
This option will refresh the information on the User Statistics tab immediately. This
function is equal to the function of the Refresh button at the bottom of the window.
Auto refresh
Settings for automatic refreshing of the information on the User Statistics tab. Informa-
tion can be refreshed in the interval from 5 seconds up to 1 minute or the auto refresh
function can be switched off (No refresh).
Manage Columns
Use this option to select and unselect items (columns) which will (not) be displayed in the
table (see chapter 3.2).
20.2 Interface statistics
The Interface statistics tab in Status →Statistics provides detailed information on volume of
data transmitted in both directions through individual interfaces of the WinRoute host in se-
lected time intervals (today, this week, this month, total).
Interfaces can be represented by network adapters, dial-ups or VPN tunnels. VPN server is
a special interface — communication of all VPN clients is represented by this item in Interface
statistics.
Optionally, other columns providing information on volume of data transmitted in individual
time periods in both directions can be displayed. Direction of data transmission is related to
the interface (the IN direction stands for data received by the interface, while OUT represents
data sent from the interface). Hiding/showing of columns is addressed in chapter 3.2.
20.2 Interface statistics
251
Figure 20.3 Firewall’s interface statistics
Example
The WinRoute host connects to the Internet through the Public interface and the local network
is connected to the LAN interface. A local user downloads 10 MB of data from the Internet.
This data will be counted as follows:
•IN at the Public interface is counted as an IN item (data from the Internet was received
through this interface),
•at the LAN interface as OUT (data was sent to the local network through this interface).
Note: Interface statistics are saved into the stats.cfg configuration file in the WinRoute’s
installation directory. This implies that they are not reset when the WinRoute Firewall Engine
is closed.
Interface Statistics menu
A context menu providing the following options will be opened upon right-clicking anywhere
in the table (or on a specific interface):
Figure 20.4 Context menu for Interface statistics
Reset interface statistics
This option resets statistics of the selected interface. It is available only if the mouse
pointer is hovering an interface at the moment when the context menu is opened.
Chapter 20 Basic statistics
252
Refresh
This option will refresh the information on the Interface Statistics tab immediately. This
function is equal to the function of the Refresh button at the bottom of the window.
Auto refresh
Settings for automatic refreshing of the information on the Interface Statistics tab. Infor-
mation can be refreshed in the interval from 5 seconds up to 1 minute or the auto refresh
function can be switched off (No refresh).
Manage Columns
Use this option to select and unselect items (columns) which will (not) be displayed in the
table (see chapter 3.2).
Remove interface statistics
This option removes the selected interface from the statistics. Only inactive interfaces
(i.e. disconnected network adapters, hung-up dial-ups, disconnected VPN tunnels or VPN
servers which no client is currently connected to) can be removed. Whenever a removed
interface is activated again (upon connection of the VPN tunnel, etc.), it is added to the
statistics automatically.
Graphical view of interface load
The traffic processes for a selected interface (transfer speed in B/s) and a specific time period
can be viewed in the chart provided in the bottom window of the Interface statistics tab. Use
the Show details / Hide details button to show or hide this chart (the show mode is set by
default).
Figure 20.5 Chart informing about average throughput at the interface
20.2 Interface statistics
253
The period (2 hours or 1 day) can be selected in the Time interval box. The selected time range
is always understood as the time until now (“last 2 hours” or “last 24 hours”).
The xaxis of the chart represents time and the yaxis represents traffic speed. The xaxis is
measured accordingly to a selected time period, while measurement of the yaxis depends on
the maximal value of the time interval and is set automatically (bytes per second is the basic
measure unit — B/s).
Select an option for Picture size to set a fixed format of the chart or to make it fit to the
Administration Console screen.
The legend above the graph shows the sampling interval (i.e. the time for which a sum of
connections or messages is counted and is displayed in the graph).
Example
Suppose the 1 day interval is selected. Then, an impulse unit is represented by 5 minutes.
This means that every 5 minutes an average traffic speed for the last 5 minutes is recorded in
the chart.
254
Chapter 21
Kerio StaR - statistics and reporting
The WinRoute’s web interface provides detailed statistics on users, volume of transferred data,
visited websites and web categories. This information may help figure out browsing activities
and habits of individual users.
The statistics monitor the traffic between the local network and the Internet. Volumes of data
transferred between local hosts and visited web pages located on local servers are not included
in the statistics (also for technical reasons).
One of the benefits of web statistics and reports is their high availability. The user (usually an
office manager) does not need the Administration Console and they even do not need WinRoute
administrator rights (special rights are used for statistics). Statistics viewed in web browsers
can also be easily printed or saved on the disk as web pages.
Notes:
1. The WinRoute administrator should inform users that their browsing activities are moni-
tored by the firewall.
2. Statistics and reports in WinRoute should be used for reference only. It is highly unrecom-
mended to use them for example to figure out exact numbers of Internet connection costs
per user.
3. For correct functionality of the Kerio StaR interface, it is necessary that the WinRoute
host’s operating system supports all languages that would be used in the Kerio StaR inter-
face. Some languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may require installation of supportive files.
For details, refer to documents regarding the corresponding operating system.
This chapter addresses setting of parameters in the WinRoute’s administration program. The
vKerio StaR interface is described thoroughly in the Kerio WinRoute Firewall — User’s Guide.
21.1 Monitoring and storage of statistic data
Diverse data is needed to be gathered for the statistics. Statistic data is stored in the data-
base (the star\data subdirectory of the WinRoute’s installation directory — for details, see
chapter 25.1). Total period length for which WinRoute keeps the statistics can be set in the
Accounting section of the Administration Console (see chapter 21.2). By default, this time is
set to 24 months (i.e. 2 years).
For technical reasons, the WinRoute Firewall Engine stores gathered statistic data in the cache
(the star\cache subdirectory) and data is recorded in the database once per hour. The cache
21.1 Monitoring and storage of statistic data
255
is represented by several files on the disk. This implies that any data is kept in the cache even
if the WinRoute Firewall Engine is stopped or another problem occurs (failure of power supply,
etc.) though not having been stored in the database yet.
The statistics use data from the main database. This implies that current traffic of individual
users is not included in the statistics immediately but when the started period expires and the
data is written in the database.
Note: Data in the database used for statistics cannot be removed manually (such action would
be meaningless). In statistics, it is possible to switch into another view mode where data is
related only to a period we need to be informed about. If you do not wish to keep older data,
it is possible to change the statistics storage period (see above).
Requirements of the statistics
The following conditions must be met for correct function of all statistics:
•The firewall should always require user authentication. The statistics by individual
users would not match the true state if unauthenticated users are allowed to access
the Internet. For details see chapter 10.
•For statistics on visited websites, it is necessary that a corresponding protocol inspec-
tor is applied to any HTTP traffic. This condition is met by default unless special traffic
rules disabling the particular protocol inspector are applied (see chapter 7.7).
If the WinRoute proxy server is used, visited pages are monitored by the proxy server
itself (see chapter 8.4).
Note: HTTPS traffic is encrypted and, therefore, it is impossible to monitor visited sites
and categories. Only volume of transferred data is included in the statistics for such
traffic.
•For monitoring of web categories of visited websites, the Kerio Web Filter module must
be enabled. In its configuration, the Categorize each page regardless of HTTP rules
option should be enabled, otherwise web categories statistics would be unreliable. For
details, see chapter 12.3.
Gathering of statistical information and mapped services
Connections from the Internet to mapped services on local hosts (or to services on the firewall
available from the Internet — see chapter 7.3) are also included in user statistics. If a user is
connected to the firewall from the particular host, access to the mapped service is considered
as an activity of this user. Otherwise, such connection is included in activity of unknown users
(users who are not logged in).
The following example helps recognize importance of this feature. User jsmith is authenticated
at the firewall and connected to it from a local workstation. The RDP service for this host is
mapped on the firewall, allowing the user to work remotely on the workstation. If user jsmith
connects from the Internet to the remote desktop on the workstation, this connection (and
data transferred within the connection) will be correctly included in the user’s statistics and
quota.
Chapter 21 Kerio StaR - statistics and reporting
256
The following example addresses case of a mapped web server accessible from the Internet.
Any (anonymous) user in the Internet can connect to the server. However, web servers are
usually located on a special machine which is not used by any user. Therefore, all traffic of
this server will be accounted for users who are “not logged in”.
However, if any user is connected to the firewall from the server, any traffic between clients
in the Internet and the web server is accounted as an activity of this user. If this user also
reaches their data volume quota, corresponding restrictions will be applied to this web server
( see chapters 15.2 and 9.2).
21.2 Settings for statistics and quota
Under certain circumstances (too many connected users, great volume of transmitted data,
low capacity of the WinRoute host, etc.), viewing of statistics may slow WinRoute and data
transmission (Internet connection) down. Be aware of this fact while opening the statistics.
Therefore, WinRoute allows such configuration of statistics that is customized so that only
useful data is gathered and useful statistics created. It is also possible to disable creation of
statistics if desirable. This would save operation space of WinRoute as well as the disk space
of its host.
Statistics settings also affect monitoring of volume of transferred data against user quota
(refer to chapters 15.1 and 20).
Use the Statistics / Quota tab in Configuration →Accounting to set gathering of statistical data
and accounting periods for quota and statistics.
Figure 21.1 Setting of statistics and accounting periods
21.2 Settings for statistics and quota
257
Enable/disable gathering of statistic data
The Gather Internet Usage statistics option enables/disables all statistics (i.e. stops gath-
ering of data for statistics).
The Monitor user browsing behavior option enables monitoring and logging of browsing
activity of individual users. If is not necessary to gather these statistics, it is recom-
mended to disable this option (this reduces demands to the firewall and saves the server’s
disk space).
You can use the Keep at most... parameter to specify a time period for which the data will
be kept (i.e. the age of the oldest data that will be available). This option affects disk space
needed for the statistics remarkably. To save disk space, it is therefore recommended to
keep the statistics only for a necessary period.
Advanced settings for statistics
The Advanced button opens a dialog where parameters can be set for viewing of statistics
in the Kerio StaR interface (see chapter 20).
Figure 21.2 Kerio StaR advanced options
The Show user names in statistics by... option enables select a mode of how users and
their names will be displayed in individual user statistics. Full names can be displayed as
first name second name or second name, first name. Optionally, it is also possible to view
full names followed by username without or with domain (if Active Directory mapping is
used).
Statistics and quota accounting periods
Accounting period is a time period within which information of transferred data volume
and other information is gathered. Statistics enable generating of weekly and monthly
overviews. In Accounting Periods, it is possible to define starting days for weekly and
monthly periods (for example, in statistics, a month can start on day 15 of the civil
month and end on day 14 of the following civil month).
The parameter of first day of monthly period also sets when the monthly transferred
data counter of individual users will be set to zero (for monthly quota details, see chap-
ter 15.2).
Note: Setting of accounting period does not affect log rotation (see chapter 22.1).
Chapter 21 Kerio StaR - statistics and reporting
258
Statistics and quota exceptions
On the Exceptions tab, it is possible to define exceptions for statistics and for transferred data
quota.
This feature helps avoid gathering of irrelevant information. Thus, statistics are kept trans-
parent and gathering and storage of needless data is avoided.
Figure 21.3 Statistics and quota exceptions
Usage of individual exceptions:
Time interval
Define a time period when information will be gathered and included in statistics and
quota (e.g. only in working hours). Without this period, no traffic will be included in the
statistics and in the quota neither.
For details on time intervals, see chapter 14.2.
IP addresses
Define IP addresses of hosts which will be excluded from the statistics and to which quota
will not be applied.
The selected group may include both local or Internet IP addresses. If any of these IP
addresses belongs to the local network, bear in mind that no traffic of the host will be
included in the statistics or the quota. In case of addresses of Internet servers, traffic of
local users with the server will not be accounted in the statistics or any user quota.
21.3 Connection to StaR and viewing statistics
259
For details on IP groups, see chapter 14.1.
Users and groups
Select users and/or user groups which will be excluded from the statistics and no quota
will be applied to them. This setting has the highest priority and overrules any other
quota settings in user or group preferences.
For details on users and groups, see chapter 15.
Web Pages
Define a URL group. Connections to web sites with these URLs will not be accounted. Such
exception can be used for example to exclude the own corporate web servers from the
statistics (connection to corporate websites is usually considered a work-related activity)
or to exclude ads connection to certain pages may download advertisements automati-
cally, it is not the user’s request. For this purpose, you can use the predefined URL group
Ads/banners (see chapter 14.4).
Wildcards can be used in URL groups items. This implies that it is possible to define
exceptions for particular pages or for all pages on a particular server, all web servers in
a domain, etc. For details on URL groups, refer to chapter 14.1.
URL exceptions can be applied only to unsecured web pages (the HTTP protocol). Connec-
tions to secured pages (the HTTPS protocol) are encrypted and URL of such pages cannot
be detected.
Note: Unlike in case of exceptions described above, data transferred within connections
to such web pages will be included in the quota.
21.3 Connection to StaR and viewing statistics
To view statistics, user must authenticate at the WinRoute’s web interface first. User (or the
group the user belongs to) needs rights for statistics viewing — see chapter 15.1.StaR can
be accessed by several methods, depending on whether connecting from the WinRoute host
(locally) or from another host (remotely).
Note: For details on the WinRoute’s web interface, see chapter 11.2.
Accessing the statistics from the WinRoute host
On the WinRoute host, the StaR may be opened as follows:
•By using the Internet Usage Statistics link available in the WinRoute Engine Monitor
context menu (opened by the corresponding icon in the notification area — see chap-
ter 2.10).
•By using the Internet Usage Statistics link under Start →Programs →Kerio →WinRoute
Firewall.
Both links open the unsecured StaR interface directly on the local host (by default
http://localhost:4080/star) using the default web browser.
Chapter 21 Kerio StaR - statistics and reporting
260
Note: Within local systems, secured traffic would be useless and the browser would bother
user with needless alerts.
Remote access to the statistics
It is also possible to access the statistics remotely, i.e. from any host which is allowed to
connect to the WinRoute host and the web interface’s ports, by using the following methods:
•If the host is connected to WinRoute by the Administration Console, the Internet Usage
Statistics link available under Status →Statistics can be used. This link opens the
secured StaR interface for statistics in the default web browser.
Note: URL for this link consists of the name of the server and of the port of the
secured Web interface defined in the configuration (see chapter 11.1). This guarantees
function of the link from the WinRoute host and from the local network. To make
Internet Usage Statistics link work also for remote administration over the Internet,
name of the particular server must be defined in the public DNS (with the IP address
of the particular firewall) and traffic rules must allow access to the port of the secured
Web interface(4081 by default).
Figure 21.4 Link for viewing of the statistics in
the Administration Console (status →Statistics)
•At https://server:4081/star or http://server:4080/star This URL works for
the StaR only. If the user has not appropriate rights to view statistics, an error is
reported.
•At https://server:4081/ or http://server:4080/. This is the primary URL of the
WinRoute’s web interface. If the user possesses appropriate rights for stats viewing,
the StaR welcome page providing overall statistics (see below) is displayed. Otherwise,
the My Account page is opened (this page is available to any user).
Warning
In case of access via the Internet (i.e. from a remote host) it is recommended to use only the
secured version of the web interface. The other option would be too risky.
21.3 Connection to StaR and viewing statistics
261
Updating data in StaR
First of all, the StaR interface is used for gathering of statistics and creating of reviews for cer-
tain periods. To WinRoute, gathering and evaluation of information for StaR means processing
of large data volumes. To reduce load on the firewall, data for StaR is updated approximately
once in an hour. The top right corner of each StaR page displays information about when the
last update of the data was performed.
For these reasons, the StaR interface is not useful for real-time monitoring of user activity.
For these purposes, you can use the Active Hosts section in the Administration Console (see
chapter 19.1).
262
Chapter 22
Logs
Logs are files where history of certain events performed through or detected by WinRoute are
recorded and kept. Each log is displayed in a window in the Logs section.
Each event is represented by one record line. Each line starts with a time mark in brackets (date
and time when the event took place, in seconds). This mark is followed by an information,
depending on the log type. If the record includes a URL, it is displayed as a hypertext link.
Follow the link to open the page in your default browser.
Optionally, records of each log may be recorded in files on the local disk7and/or on the Syslog
server.
Locally, the logs are saved in the files under the logs subdirectory where WinRoute is installed.
The file names have this pattern:
file_name.log
(e.g. debug.log). Each log includes an .idx file, i.e. an indexing file allowing faster access to
the log when displayed in Administration Console.
Individual logs can be rotated — after a certain time period or when a threshold of the file size
is reached, log files are stored and new events are logged to a new (empty) file.
Administration Console allows to save a selected log (or its part) in a file as plaintext or in
HTML. The log saved can be analyzed by various tools, published on web servers, etc.
22.1 Log settings
Log parameters (file names, rotation, sending to a Syslog server) can be set in the Configuration
→Accounting section. In this section of the guide an overview of all logs used by WinRoute
are provided.
Double-click on a selected log (or select a log and click on the Edit button) to open a dialog
where parameters for the log can be set.
Note: If the log is not saved in a file on the disk, only records generated since the last login to
WinRoute Firewall Engine will be shown in the Administration Console. After logout (or closing
of Administration Console), the records will be lost.
Local disk is a disk of the computer where WinRoute is installed, not a computer where Administration Console is
7
running!
22.1 Log settings
263
Figure 22.1 Log settings
File Logging
Use the File Loggingtab to define file name and rotation parameters.
Enable logging to file
Use this option to enable/disable logging to file according to the File name entry (the
.log extension will be appended automatically).
If this option is disabled, none of the following parameters and settings will be available.
Rotate regularly
Set intervals in which the log will be rotated regularly. The file will be stored and a new
log file will be started in selected intervals.
Weekly rotation takes effect on Sunday nights. Monthly rotation is performed at the end
of the month (in the night when one month ends and another starts).
Rotate when file exceeds size
Set a maximal size for each file. Whenever the threshold is reached, the file will be rotated.
Maximal size is specified in megabytes (MB).
Keep at most ... log file(s)
Maximal count of log files that will be stored. Whenever the threshold is reached, the
oldest file will be deleted.
Note:
1. If both Rotate regularly and the Rotate when file exceeds size are enabled, the particular
file will be rotated whenever one of these conditions is met.
2. Setting of statistics and quotas accounting period does not affect log rotation (see chap-
Chapter 22 Logs
264
Figure 22.2 File logging settings
ter 21.2). Rotation follows the rules described above.
Syslog Logging
Parameters for logging to a Syslog can be defined in the External Logging tab.
Figure 22.3 Syslog settings
22.2 Logs Context Menu
265
Enable Syslog logging
Enable/disable logging to a Syslog server.
If this option is disabled, none of the following parameters and settings will be available.
Syslog server
DNS name or IP address of the Syslog server.
Facility
Facility that will be used for the particular WinRoute log (depends on the Syslog server).
Severity
Severity of logged events (depends on the Syslog server).
22.2 Logs Context Menu
When you right-click inside any log window, a context menu will be displayed where you can
choose several functions or change the log’s parameters (view, logged information).
Figure 22.4 Logs Context Menu
Copy
Copies the selected text onto the clipboard. A key shortcut from the operating system
can be used (Ctrl+C or Ctrl+Insert in Windows).
Save log
This option saves the log or selected text in a file as plaintext or in HTML.
Hint
This function provides more comfortable operations with log files than a direct access to
log files on the disk of the computer where WinRoute is installed. Logs can be saved even
if WinRoute is administered remotely.
Chapter 22 Logs
266
The Save log option opens a dialog box where the following optional parameters can be
set:
Figure 22.5 Saving a log to a file
•Target file — name of the file where the log will be saved. By default, a name
derived from the file name is set. The file extension is set automatically in accor-
dance with the format selected.
•Format — logs can be saved as plaintext or in HTML. If the HTML format is used,
colors will be saved for the lines background (see section Highlighting) and all
URLs will be saved as hypertext links.
•Source — either the entire log or only a part of the text selected can be saved.
Bear in mind that in case of remote administration, saving of an entire log may
take some time.
Find
Use this option to search for a string in the log. Logs can be scanned either Up (search
for older events) or Down (search for newer events) from the current position.
During the first lookup (when switched to the log window), the log is searched through
from the top (or the end, depending on the lookup direction set). Further search starts
from the marked text (marked by mouse or as a result of the recent search).
Highlighting
Highlighting may be set for logs meeting certain criteria (for details, see below).
Select font
Within this dialog you can select a font of the log printout. All fonts installed on the host
with the Administration Console are available.
Encoding
Coding that will be used for the log printout in Administration Console can be selected in
this section. UTF-8 is used by default.
22.2 Logs Context Menu
267
Hint
Select a new encoding type if special characters are not printed correctly in non-English
versions.
Log Settings
A dialog where log parameters such as log file name, rotation and Syslog parameters can
be set. These parameters can also be set in the Log settings tab under Configuration →
Accounting. For details, refer to chapter 22.1.
Clear log
Removes entire log. The file will be removed (not only the information saved in the
selected window).
Warning
Removed logs cannot be refreshed anymore.
Note: If a user with read rights only is connected to WinRoute(see chapter 15.1), the Log settings
and Clear log options are missing in the log context menu. Only users with full rights can
access these functions.
Log highlighting
For better reference, it is possible to set highlighting for logs meeting certain criteria. High-
lighting is defined by special rules shared by all logs. Seven colors are available (plus the
background color of unhighlighted lines), however, number of rules is not limited.
Use the Highlighting option in the context pop-up menu of the corresponding log to set high-
lighting parameters.
Figure 22.6 Log highlighting settings
Chapter 22 Logs
268
Highlighting rules are ordered in a list. The list is processed from the top. The first rule
meeting the criteria stops other processing and the found rule is highlighted by the particular
color. Thanks to these features, it is possible to create even more complex combinations of
rules, exceptions, etc. In addition to this, each rule can be “disabled” or “enabled” for as long
as necessary.
Use the Add or the Edit button to (re)define a highlighting rule.
Figure 22.7 Highlighting rule definition
Each highlighting rule consists of a condition and a color which will be used to highlight lines
meeting the condition. Condition can be specified by a substring (all lines containing the string
will be highlighted) or by a so called regular expression (all lines containing one or multiple
strings matching the regular expression will be highlighted).
The Description item is used for reference only. It is recommended to describe all created
rules well (it is recommended to mention also the name of the log to which the rule applies).
Note: Regular expression is such expression which allows special symbols for string definition.
WinRoute accepts all regular expressions in accordance with the POSIX standard.
For detailed instructions contact Kerio technical support. For detailed information, refer for
example to
http://www.gnu.org/software/grep/
The Debug log advanced settings
Special options are available in the Debug log context menu. These options are available only
to users with full administration rights (see chapter 15.1)..
Options of information which can be monitored by the Debug log are addressed in chap-
ter 22.6.
22.3 Alert Log
269
22.3 Alert Log
The Alert log provides a complete history of alerts generated by WinRoute (e.g. alerts upon
virus detection, dialing and hanging-up, reached quotas, detection of P2P networks, etc.).
Each event in the Alert log includes a time stamp (date and time when the event was logged)
and information about an alert type (in capitals). The other items depend on an alert type.
Hint
Email and SMS alerts can be set under Configuration →Accounting. All sent alerts can be
viewed in the Status →Alert messages section (for details, see chapter 19.4).
22.4 Config Log
The Config log stores a complete communication history between Administration Console and
the WinRoute Firewall Engine — the log allows you to find out what administration actions
were performed by which user, and when.
The Config window contains three log types:
1. Information about user logins/logouts to/from the WinRoute’s administration
Example
[18/Apr/2008 10:25:02] james - session opened
for host 192.168.32.100
[18/Apr/2008 10:32:56] james - session closed
for host 192.168.32.100
•[18/Apr/2008 10:25:02] — date and time when the record was written to the
log
•jsmith — the login name of the user logged in the WinRoute administration
•session opened for host 192.168.32.100 — information about the begin-
ning of the communication and the IP address of the computer from which the
user connected
•session closed for host 192.168.32.100 — information about the end of
the communication with the particular computer (user logout or Administration
Console closed)
2. Configuration database changes
Changes performed in the Administration Console. A simplified form of the SQL language
is used when communicating with the database.
Chapter 22 Logs
270
Example
[18/Apr/2008 10:27:46] james - insert StaticRoutes
set Enabled=’1’, Description=’VPN’,
Net=’192.168.76.0’, Mask=’255.255.255.0’,
Gateway=’192.168.1.16’, Interface=’LAN’, Metric=’1’
•[18/Apr/2008 10:27:46] — date and time when the record was written
•jsmith — the login name of the user logged in the WinRoute administration
•insert StaticRoutes ... — the particular command used to modify the
WinRoute’s configuration database (in this case, a static route was added to the
routing table)
3. Other changes in configuration
A typical example of this record type is the change of traffic rules. When the user hits
Apply in Configuration →Traffic policy, a complete list of current traffic rules is written
to the Config log.
Example
[18/Apr/2008 12:06:03] Admin - New traffic policy set:
[18/Apr/2008 12:06:03] Admin - 1: name=(ICMP traffic)
src=(any) dst=(any) service=("Ping")
snat=(any) dnat=(any) action=(Permit)
time_range=(always) inspector=(default)
•[18/Apr/2003 12:06:03] — date and time of the change
•Admin — login name of the user who did the change
•1: — traffic rule number (rules are numbered top to bottom according to their
position in the table, the numbering starts from 1)
•name=(ICMP Traffic) ... — traffic rule definition (name, source, destination,
service etc.)
Note: The default rule (see chapter 7.1) is marked with default instead of the positional
number.
22.5 Connection Log
The Connection log gathers information about traffic matching traffic rules with the Log match-
ing connections enabled (see chapter 7) or meeting certain conditions (e.g. log of UPnP traffic
— see chapter 18.2).
How to read the Connection Log?
[18/Apr/2008 10:22:47] [ID] 613181 [Rule] NAT
[Service] HTTP [User] james
[Connection] TCP 192.168.1.140:1193 -> hit.google.com:80
[Duration] 121 sec [Bytes] 1575/1290/2865 [Packets] 5/9/14
22.6 Debug Log
271
•[18/Apr/2008 10:22:47] — date and time when the event was logged (note: Con-
nection logs are saved immediately after a disconnection).
•[ID] 613181 —WinRoute connection identification number
•[Rule] NAT — name of the traffic rule which has been used (a rule by which the traffic
was allowed or denied).
•[Service] HTTP — name of a corresponding application layer service (recognized by
destination port).
If the corresponding service is not defined in WinRoute (refer to chapter 14.3), the
[Service] item is missing in the log.
•[User] james name of the user connected to the firewall from a host which partici-
pates in the traffic.
If no user is currently connected from the corresponding host, the [User] item is
missing in the log.
•[Connection] TCP 192.168.1.140:1193 -> hit.top.com:80 — protocol, source
IP address and port, destination IP address and port. If an appropriate log is found in
the DNS module cache (see chapter 8.1), the host’s DNS name is displayed instead of
its IP address. If the log is not found in the cache, the name is not detected (such DNS
requests would slow WinRoute down).
•[Duration] 121 sec — duration of the connection (in seconds)
•[Bytes] 1575/1290/2865 — number of bytes transferred during this connection
(transmitted /accepted /total).
•[Packets] 5/9/14 — number of packets transferred through this connection
(transmitted/accepted/total).
22.6 Debug Log
Debug (debug information) is a special log which can be used to monitor certain kinds of
information, especially for problem-solving. Too much information could be confusing and
impractical if displayed all at the same time. Usually, you only need to display information
relating to a particular service or function. In addition, displaying too much information slows
WinRoute’s performance. Therefore, it is strongly recommended to monitor an essential part
of information and during the shortest possible period only.
Selection of information monitored by the Debug log
The window’s context menu for the Debug log includes (see chapter 22.2) further options for
advanced settings of the log and for an on-click one-time view of status information.
Note: These options are available only to users with full administration rights for WinRoute
(see chapter 15.1).
IP Traffic
This function enables monitoring of packets according to the user defined log expression.
Chapter 22 Logs
272
Figure 22.8 Expression for traffic monitored in the debug log
The expression must be defined with special symbols. After clicking on the Help button,
a brief description of possible conditions and examples of their use will be displayed.
Logging of IP traffic can be cancelled by leaving or setting the Expression entry blank.
Show status
A single overview of status information regarding certain WinRoute components. This
information can be helpful especially when solving problems with Kerio Technologies
technical support.
Messages
This feature allows advanced monitoring of functioning of individual WinRoute modules.
This information may be helpful when solving issues regarding WinRoute components
and/or certain network services.
Figure 22.9 Selection of information monitored by the Debug log
22.7 Dial Log
273
•WAN / Dial-up messages information about dialed lines (request dialing, auto
disconnection down-counter),
•Filtering — logs proving information on filtering of traffic passing through
WinRoute (antivirus control, website classification, detection and elimination of
P2P networks, dropped packets, etc.),
•Accounting — user authentication and monitoring of their activities (protocol
recognition, statistics and reporting, etc.),
•WinRoute services — protocols processed by WinRoute services (DHCP server, the
DNS module, web interface, and UPnP support),
•Decoded protocols — logs of specific protocols (HTTP and DNS),
•Miscellaneous — other information on miscellaneous topics (e.g. packet process-
ing by the Bandwidth Limiter, Internet connection, HTTP cache, used licenses,
update check, employment of dynamic DNS, etc.),
•Protocol inspection — reports from individual WinRoute’s protocol inspectors
(sorted by protocol),
•Kerio VPN — detailed information on traffic within Kerio VPN (VPN tunnels, VPN
clients, encryptions, exchange of routing information, web server for Clientless
SSL-VPN, etc.).
22.7 Dial Log
Data about dialing and hanging up the dial-up lines, and about time spent on-line.
The following items (events) can be reported in the Dial log:
1. Manual connection (from the Administration Console — see chapter 5or directly from the
operating system)
[15/Mar/2008 15:09:27] Line "Connection" dialing,
console 127.0.0.1 - Admin
[15/Mar/2008 15:09:39] Line "Connection" successfully connected
The first log item is reported upon initialization of dialing. The log always includes
WinRoute name of the dialed line (see chapter 5). If the line is dialed from the Admin-
istration Console, the log provides this additional information
•where the line was dialed from (console —Administration Console,
•IP address of the client (i.e. IP address of the Administration Console),
•login name of the user who sent the dial request.
Another event is logged upon a successful connection (i.e. when the line is dialed, upon
authentication on a remote server, etc.).
2. Line disconnection (manual or automatic, performed after a certain period of idleness)
[15/Mar/2008 15:29:18] Line "Connection" hang-up,
console 127.0.0.1 - Admin
[15/Mar/2008 15:29:20] Line "Connection" disconnected,
Chapter 22 Logs
274
connection time 00:15:53, 1142391 bytes received,
250404 bytes transmitted
The first log item is recorded upon reception of a hang-up request. The log provides
information about interface name, client type, IP address and username.
The second event is logged upon a successful hang-up. The log provides information
about interface name, time of connection (connection time), volume of incoming and
outgoing data in bytes (bytes received and bytes transmitted).
3. Disconnection caused by an error (connection is dropped)
[15/Mar/2008 15:42:51] Line "Connection" dropped,
connection time 00:17:07, 1519 bytes received,
2504 bytes transmitted
The items are the same as in the previous case (the second item — the disconnected
report).
4. Requested dialing (as a response to a DNS query)
[15/Mar/2008 15:51:27] DNS query for "www.microcom.com"
(packet UDP 192.168.1.2:4567 -> 195.146.100.100:53)
initiated dialing of line "Connection"
[15/Mar/2008 15:51:38] Line "Connection" successfully connected
The first log item is recorded upon reception of a DNS request (the DNS module has not
found requested DNS record in its cache). The log provides:
•DNS name from which IP address is being resolved,
•description of the packet with the corresponding DNS query (protocol, source IP
address, source port, destination IP address, destination port),
•name of the line to be dialed.
Another event is logged upon a successful connection (i.e. when the line is dialed, upon
authentication on a remote server, etc.).
5. On-demand dialing (response to a packet sent from the local network)
[15/Mar/2008 15:53:42] Packet
TCP 192.168.1.3:8580 -> 212.20.100.40:80
initiated dialing of line "Connection"
[15/Mar/2008 15:53:53] Line "Connection" successfully connected
The first record is logged when WinRoute finds out that the route of the packet does not
exist in the routing table. The log provides:
•description of the packet (protocol, source IP address, destination port, destina-
tion IP address, destination port),
•name of the line to be dialed.
22.8 Error Log
275
Another event is logged upon a successful connection (i.e. when the line is dialed, upon
authentication on a remote server, etc.).
6. Connection error (e.g. error at the modem was detected, dial-up was disconnected, etc.)
[15/Mar/2008 15:59:08] DNS query for "www.microsoft.com"
(packet UDP 192.168.1.2:4579 -> 195.146.100.100:53)
initiated dialing of line "Connection"
[15/Mar/2008 15:59:12] Line "Connection" disconnected
The first record represents a DNS record sent from the local network, from that the line is
to be dialed (see above).
The second log item (immediately after the first one) informs that the line has been hung-
up. Unlike in case of a regular disconnection, time of connection and volume of transmit-
ted data are not provided (because the line has not been connected).
22.8 Error Log
The Error log displays information about serious errors that affect the functionality of the en-
tire firewall. WinRoute administrator should check this log regularly and fix detected problems
as soon as possible. Otherwise, users might have problems with some services or/and serious
security problems might arise.
A typical error message in the Error log could be: a problem when starting a service (usually a
collision at a particular port number), problems when writing to the disk or when initializing
anti-virus, etc.
Each record in the Error log contains error code and sub-code as two numbers in parentheses
(x y). The error code (x) may fall into one of the following categories:
•1-999 — system resources problem (insufficient memory, memory allocation error,
etc.)
•1000-1999 — internal errors (unable to read routing table or interface IP addresses,
etc.)
•2000-2999 — license problems (license expired, the number of users would break
license limit, unable to find license file, etc.)
•3000-3999 — configuration errors (unable to read configuration file, detected a loop
in the configuration of the DNS module or the Proxy server, etc.)
•4000-4999 — network (socket) errors
•5000-5999 — errors while starting or stopping the WinRoute Firewall Engine (prob-
lems with low-level driver, problems when initializing system libraries, services, con-
figuration databases, etc.)
•6000-6999 — filesystem errors (cannot open /save /delete file)
•7000-7999 — SSL errors (problems with keys and certificates, etc.)
•8000-8099 — HTTP cache errors (errors when reading / writing cache files, not enough
space for cache, etc.)
Chapter 22 Logs
276
•8100-8199 — errors of the Kerio Web Filter module
•8200-8299 — authentication subsystem errors
•8300-8399 — anti-virus module errors (anti-virus test not successful, problems when
storing temporary files, etc.)
•8400-8499 — dial-up error (unable to read defined dial-up connections, line configu-
ration error, etc.)
•8500-8599 — LDAP errors (server not found, login failed, etc.)
Note: If you are not able to correct an error (or figure out what it is caused by) which is
repeatedly reported in the Error log, do not hesitate to contact our technical support. For
detailed information, refer to chapter 26 or to http://www.kerio.com/.
22.9 Filter Log
This log gathers information on web pages and objects blocked/allowed by the HTTP and FTP
filters (see chapters 12.2 and 12.5) and on packets matching traffic rules with the Log matching
packets option enabled (see chapter 7) or meeting other conditions (e.g. logging of UPnP traffic
— see chapter 18.2).
Each log line includes the following information depending on the component which generated
the log:
•when an HTTP or FTP rule is applied: rule name, user, IP address of the host which
sent the request, object’s URL
•when a traffic rule is applied: detailed information about the packet that matches the
rule (rule name, source and destination address, ports, size, etc.)
Example of a URL rule log message
[18/Apr/2008 13:39:45] ALLOW URL ’McAfee update’
192.168.64.142 james HTTP GET
http://update.kerio.com/nai-antivirus/datfiles/4.x/dat-4258.zip
•[18/Apr/2008 13:39:45] — date and time when the event was logged
•ALLOW — action that was executed (ALLOW = access allowed, DENY = access denied)
•URL — rule type (for URL or FTP)
•’McAfee update’ — rule name
•192.168.64.142 — IP address of the client
•jsmith — name of the user authenticated on the firewall (no name is listed unless at
least one user is logged in from the particular host)
•HTTP GET — HTTP method used in the request
•http:// ... — requested URL
22.10 Http log
277
Packet log example
[16/Apr/2008 10:51:00] PERMIT ’Local traffic’ packet to LAN,
proto:TCP, len:47, ip/port:195.39.55.4:41272 ->
192.168.1.11:3663, flags: ACK PSH, seq:1099972190
ack:3795090926, win:64036, tcplen:7
•[16/Apr/2008 10:51:00] — date and time when the event was logged
•PERMIT — action that was executed with the packet (PERMIT,DENY or DROP)
•Local traffic — the name of the traffic rule that was matched by the packet
•packet to — packet direction (either to or from a particular interface)
•LAN — interface name (see chapter 5for details)
•proto: — transport protocol (TCP, UDP, etc.)
•len: — packet size in bytes (including the headers) in bytes
•ip/port: — source IP address, source port, destination IP address and destination
port
•flags: — TCP flags
•seq: — sequence number of the packet (TCP only)
•ack: — acknowledgement sequence number (TCP only)
•win: — size of the receive window in bytes (it is used for data flow control — TCP
only)
•tcplen: — TCP payload size (i.e. size of the data part of the packet) in bytes (TCP
only)
22.10 Http log
This log contains all HTTP requests that were processed by the HTTP inspection module (see
section 14.3) or by the built-in proxy server (see section 8.4). The log has the standard format
of either the Apache WWW server (see http://www.apache.org/) or of the Squid proxy server
(see http://www.squid-cache.org/). The enable or disable the Http log, or to choose its
format, go toConfiguration →Content Filtering →HTTP Policy (refer to section 12.2 for details).
Note:
1. Only accesses to allowed pages are recorded in the HTTP log. Request that were blocked
by HTTP rules are logged to the Filter log (see chapter 22.9), if the Log option is enabled
in the particular rule (see section 12.2).
2. The Http log is intended to be processes by external analytical tools. The Web log (see
bellow) is better suited to be viewed by the WinRoute administrator.
Chapter 22 Logs
278
An example of an HTTP log record in the Apache format
192.168.64.64 - jflyaway
[18/Apr/2008:15:07:17 +0200]
"GET http://www.kerio.com/ HTTP/1.1" 304 0 +4
•192.168.64.64 — IP address of the client host
•rgabriel — name of the user authenticated through the firewall (a dash is displayed
if no user is authenticated through the client)
•[18/Apr/2008:15:07:17 +0200] — date and time of the HTTP request. The +0200
value represents time difference from the UTC standard (+2 hours are used in this
example — CET).
•GET — used HTTP method
•http://www.kerio.com — requested URL
•HTTP/1.1 — version of the HTTP protocol
•304 — return code of the HTTP protocol
•0— size of the transferred object (file) in bytes
•+4 — count of HTTP requests transferred through the connection
An example of Http log record in the Squid format
1058444114.733 0 192.168.64.64 TCP_MISS/304 0
GET http://www.squid-cache.org/ - DIRECT/206.168.0.9
•1058444114.733 — timestamp (seconds and milliseconds since January 1st, 1970)
•0— download duration (not measured in WinRoute, always set to zero)
•192.168.64.64 — IP address of the client (i.e. of the host from which the client is
connected to the website)
•TCP_MISS — the TCP protocol was used and the particular object was not found in the
cache (“missed”). WinRoute always uses this value for this field.
•304 — return code of the HTTP protocol
•0— transferred data amount in bytes (HTTP object size)
•GET http://www.squid-cache.org/ — the HTTP request (HTTP method and URL of
the object)
•DIRECT — the WWW server access method (WinRoute always uses DIRECT access)
•206.168.0.9 — IP address of the WWW server
22.11 Security Log
A log for security-related messages. Records of the following types may appear in the log:
1. Anti-spoofing log records
Messages about packets that where captured by the Anti-spoofing module (packets with
invalid source IP address — see section 17.2 for details)
22.11 Security Log
279
Example
[17/Jul/2008 11:46:38] Anti-Spoofing:
Packet from LAN, proto:TCP, len:48,
ip/port:61.173.81.166:1864 -> 195.39.55.10:445,
flags: SYN, seq:3819654104 ack:0, win:16384, tcplen:0
•packet from — packet direction (either from, i.e. sent via the interface, or to, i.e.
received via the interface)
•LAN — interface name (see chapter 5for details)
•proto: — transport protocol (TCP, UDP, etc.)
•len: — packet size in bytes (including the headers) in bytes
•ip/port: — source IP address, source port, destination IP address and destina-
tion port
•flags: — TCP flags
•seq: — sequence number of the packet (TCP only)
•ack: — acknowledgement sequence number (TCP only)
•win: — size of the receive window in bytes (it is used for data flow control — TCP
only)
•tcplen: — TCP payload size (i.e. size of the data part of the packet) in bytes (TCP
only)
2. FTP protocol parser log records
Example 1
[17/Jul/2008 11:55:14] FTP: Bounce attack attempt:
client: 1.2.3.4, server: 5.6.7.8,
command: PORT 10,11,12,13,14,15
(attack attempt detected — a foreign IP address in the PORT command)
Example 2
[17/Jul/2008 11:56:27] FTP: Malicious server reply:
client: 1.2.3.4, server: 5.6.7.8,
response: 227 Entering Passive Mode (10,11,12,13,14,15)
(suspicious server reply with a foreign IP address)
3. Failed user authentication log records
Message format:
Authentication: <service>: Client: <IP address>: <reason>
•<service> — The WinRoute service to which the user attempted to authenti-
cate (Admin = administration using Kerio Administration Console,WebAdmin = web
Chapter 22 Logs
280
administration interface, WebAdmin SSL = secure web administration interface,
Proxy = proxy server user authentication)
•<IP address> — IP address of the computer from which the user attempted to
authenticate
•<reason> — reason of the authentication failure (nonexistent user / wrong pass-
word)
Note: For detailed information on user quotas, refer to chapters 15.1 and 10.1.
4. Information about the start and shutdown of the WinRoute Firewall Engine
a) Engine Startup:
[17/Dec/2008 12:11:33] Engine: Startup.
b) Engine Shutdown:
[17/Dec/2008 12:22:43] Engine: Shutdown.
22.12 Sslvpn Log
In this log, operations performed in the Clientless SSL-VPN interface are recorded. Each log
line provides information about an operation type, name of the user who performed it and file
associated with the operation.
Example
[17/Mar/2008 08:01:51] Copy File: User: jsmith@company.com
File: ’\\server\data\www\index.html’
The Clientless SSL-VPN interface and the corresponding record is available in WinRoute is for
Windows only.
22.13 Warning Log
The Warning log displays warning messages about errors of little significance. Warnings can
display for example reports about invalid user login (invalid username or password), error in
communication of the server and Web administration interface, etc.
Events recalling warning messages in this log do not seriously affect WinRoute functionality.
However, they can point at current or possible problems. The Warning log can help if for
example a user is complaining that certain services are not working.
Each warning message is identified by its numerical code (code xxx:). The following warning
categories are defined:
•1000-1999 — system warnings (e.g. an application found that is known as conflicting)
•2000-2999 —WinRoute configuration problems (e.g. HTTP rules require user authen-
tication, but the WWW interface is not enabled)
22.14 Web Log
281
•3000-3999 — warning from individual WinRoute modules (e.g. DHCP server, anti-virus
check, user authentication, etc.)
•4000-4999 — license warnings (subscription expiration, forthcoming expiration of
WinRoute’s license, Kerio Web Filter license, or the McAfee anti-virus license)
Note: License expiration is considered to be an error and it is logged into the Error log.
Examples of Warning logs
[15/Apr/2008 15:00:51] (3004) Authentication subsystem warning:
Kerberos 5 auth: user james@company.com not authenticated
[15/Apr/2008 15:00:51] (3004) Authentication subsystem warning:
Invalid password for user admin
[16/Apr/2008 10:53:20] (3004) Authentication subsystem warning:
User jflyaway doesn’t exist
•The first log informs that authentication of user jsmith by the Kerberos system in the
company.com domain failed
•The second log informs on a failed authentication attempt by user admin (invalid
password)
•The third log informs on an authentication attempt by a user which does not exist
(johnblue)
Note: With the above three examples, the relevant records will also appear in the Security
log.
22.14 Web Log
This log contains all HTTP requests that were processed by the HTTP inspection module (see
section 14.3) or by the built-in proxy server (see section 8.4). Unlike in the HTTP log, the Web
log displays only the title of a page and the WinRoute user or the IP host viewing the page. In
addition to each URL, name of the page is provided for better reference.
For administrators, the Web log is easy to read and it provides the possibility to monitor which
Websites were opened by each user.
How to read the Web Log?
[24/Apr/2008 10:29:51] 192.168.44.128 james
"Kerio Technologies" http://www.kerio.com/
•[24/Apr/2008 10:29:51] — date and time when the event was logged
•192.168.44.128 — IP address of the client host
•james — name of authenticated user (if no user is authenticated through the client
host, the name is substituted by a dash)
•"Kerio Technologies" — page title
(content of the <title> HTML tag)
Chapter 22 Logs
282
Note: If the page title cannot be identified (i.e. for its content is compressed), the
"Encoded content" will be reported.
•http://www.kerio.com/ — URL pages
283
Chapter 23
Kerio VPN
WinRoute enables secure interconnection of remote private networks using an encrypted tun-
nel and it provides clients secure access to their local networks via the Internet. This method
of interconnection of networks (and of access of remote clients to local networks) is called
virtual private network (VPN). WinRoute includes a proprietary implementation of VPN, called
“Kerio VPN”.
Kerio VPN is designed so that it can be used simultaneously with the firewall and with NAT
(even along with multiple translations). Creation of an encrypted tunnel between networks
and setting remote access of clients at the server is very easy.
Kerio VPN enables creation of any number of encrypted server-to-server connections (i.e. tun-
nels to remote private networks). Tunnels are created between two WinRoutes (typically at
Internet gateways of corresponding networks). Individual servers (endpoints of the tunnels)
verify each other using SSL certificates — this ensures that tunnels will be created between
trustworthy servers only.
Individual hosts can also connect to the VPN server in WinRoute (secured client-to-server con-
nections). Identities of individual clients are authenticated against a username and password
(transmitted also by secured connection), so that unauthorized clients cannot connect to local
networks.
Remote connections of clients are performed through Kerio VPN Client, included in WinRoute
(for a detailed description, view the stand-alone Kerio VPN Client — User Guide document).
Note: For deployment of the Kerio VPN, it is supposed that WinRoute is installed at a host
which is used as an Internet gateway. If this condition is not met, Kerio VPN can also be used,
but the configuration can be quite complicated.
Benefits of Kerio VPN
In comparison with other products providing secure interconnection of networks via the In-
ternet, the Kerio VPN solution provides several benefits and additional features.
•Easy configuration (only a few basic parameters are required for creation of tunnels
and for configuration of servers which clients will connect to).
•No additional software is required for creation of new tunnels (Kerio VPN Client must
be installed at remote clients — installation file of the application is 8 MB).
•No collisions arise while encrypted channels through the firewall are being created.
It is supposed that one or multiple firewalls (with or without NAT) are used between
connected networks (or between remote clients and local networks).
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
284
•No special user accounts must be created for VPN clients. User accounts in WinRoute
(or domain accounts if the Active Directory is used — see chapter 10.1) are used for
authentication.
•Statistics about VPN tunnels and VPN clients can be viewed in WinRoute (refer to chap-
ter 20.2).
23.1 VPN Server Configuration
VPN server is used for connection of remote endpoints of VPN tunnels and of remote clients
using Kerio VPN Client.
Note: Connection to the VPN server from the Internet must be first allowed by traffic rules. For
details, refer to chapters 23.2 and 23.3.
VPN server is available in the Interfaces tab of the Configuration →Interfaces section as a spe-
cial interface.
Figure 23.1 Viewing VPN server in the table of interfaces
Double-click on the VPN server interface (or select the alternative and press Edit, or select Edit
from the context menu) to open a dialog where parameters of the VPN server can be set.
VPN subnet and SSL certificate
Enable VPN server
Use this option to enable /disable VPN server. VPN server uses TCP and UDP protocols,
port 4090 is used as default (the port can be changed in advanced options, however, it is
usually not necessary to change it). If the VPN server is not used, it is recommended to
disable it.
23.1 VPN Server Configuration
285
Figure 23.2 VPN server settings — basic parameters
The action will be applied upon clicking the Apply button in the Interfaces tab.
IP address assignment
Specification of a subnet (i.e. IP address and a corresponding network mask) from which
IP addresses will be assigned to VPN clients and to remote endpoints of VPN tunnels
which connect to the server (all clients will be connected through this subnet).
By default (upon the first start-up after installation), WinRoute automatically selects a free
subnet which will be used for VPN. Under usual circumstances, it is not necessary to
change the default subnet. After the first change in VPN server settings, the recently
used network is used (the automatic detection is not performed again).
Warning
Make sure that the subnet for VPN clients does not collide with any local subnet!
WinRoute can detect a collision of the VPN subnet with local subnets. The collision may
arise when configuration of a local network is changed (change of IP addresses, addition
of a new subnet, etc.), or when a subnet for VPN is not selected carefully. If the VPN
subnet collides with a local network, a warning message is displayed upon saving of the
settings (by clicking Apply in the Interfaces tab). In such cases, redefine the VPN subnet.
Figure 23.3 VPN server — detection of IP collision
It is recommended to check whether IP collision is not reported after each change in
configuration of the local network or/and of the VPN!
Notes:
1. Under certain circumstances, collision with the local network might also arise when
a VPN subnet is set automatically (if configuration of the local network is changed
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
286
later).
2. Regarding two VPN tunnels, it is also examined when establishing a connection
whether the VPN subnet does not collide with IP ranges at the other end of the tunnel
(remote endpoint).
If a collision with an IP range is reported upon startup of the VPN server (upon click-
ing Apply in the Interfaces tab), the VPN subnet must be set by hand. Select a network
which is not used by any of the local networks participating in the connection. VPN
subnets at each end of the tunnel must not be identical (two free subnets must be
selected).
3. VPN clients can also be assigned IP addresses according to login usernames. For
details, see chapter 15.1.
SSL certificate
Information about the current VPN server certificate. This certificate is used for ver-
ification of the server’s identity during creation of a VPN tunnel (for details, refer to
chapter 23.3). The VPN server in WinRoute uses the standard SSL certificate.
When defining a VPN tunnel, it is necessary to send the local endpoint’s certificate fin-
gerprint to the remote endpoint and vice versa (mutual verification of identity — see
chapter 23.3).
Hint
Certificate fingerprint can be saved to the clipboard and pasted to a text file, email mes-
sage, etc.
Click Change SSL Certificate to set parameters for the certificate of the VPN server. For
the VPN server, you can either create a custom (self-subscribed) certificate or import a cer-
tificate created by a certification authority. The certificate created is saved in the sslcert
subdirectory of the WinRoute installation directory as vpn.crt and the particular private
key is saved at the same location as vpn.key.
Methods used for creation and import of SSL certificates are described thoroughly in
chapter 11.1.
Note: If you already have a certificate created by a certification authority especially for
your server (e.g. for secured Web interface), it is also possible to use it for the VPN server
— it is not necessary to apply for a new certificate.
DNS configuration for VPN clients
To allow VPN clients to access to local hosts using the hostnames, they need at least one local
DNS server.
The WinRoute’s VPN server allows for the following options of DNS server configuration:
•Use WinRoute as DNS server — IP address of a corresponding interface of WinRoute
host will be used as a DNS server for VPN clients (VPN clients will use the DNS module;
see chapter 8.1). This is the default option in case that the DNS module is enabled in
WinRoute.
23.1 VPN Server Configuration
287
Figure 23.4 VPN server settings — specification of DNS servers for VPN clients
If the DNS module is already used as a DNS server for local hosts, it is recommended
to use it also for VPN clients. The DNS module provides the fastest responses to client
DNS requests and possible collision (inconsistency) of DNS records will be avoided.
•Specific DNS servers — primary and optionally also secondary DNS server will be set
for VPN clients.
If another DNS server than the DNS module in WinRoute is used in the local network,
use this option.
DNS domain extension is also assigned to VPN clients. Domain extension specifies local do-
main. If the VPN client’s extension matches a local domain of the networks it connects to,
it can use hostnames within this network (e.g. server). Otherwise, full name of the host
including domain is required (e.g. server.company.local).
DNS extension can be also resolved automatically or set manually:
•Automatic resolution can be used in case that the host belongs to the Active Direc-
tory domain and/or in case that firewall users are authenticated in this domain (see
chapter 15.1).
•DNS domain must be specified in case that it is a Windows NT domain or a network
without a domain, or in case that another domain extension is desirable (e.g. when
multiple Active Directory are mapped).
Note: DNS servers assigned by the VPN server will be used as primary/secondary DNS server(s)
on the client host. This implies that all DNS queries from the client host will be sent to these
servers. However, in most cases this kind of “redirection” has no side effects. Upon closing of
the VPN connection, the original DNS configuration will be recovered.
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
288
WINS configuration for VPN clients
The WINS service is used for resolution of hostnames to IP addresses within Microsoft Windows
networks. Assigning of a WINS server address then allows VPN clients browse in LAN hosts
(Network Neighborhood / My Network Places).
Figure 23.5 VPN server settings — specification of WINS servers for VPN clients
WinRoute can detect WINS servers either automatically (using its host configuration) or use
specified addresses of primary or/and secondary WINS server(s). Automatic configuration can
be used if you are sure that WINS servers on the WinRoute host are set correctly.
Advanced Options
Listen on port
The port on which the VPN server listens for incoming connections (both TCP and UDP
protocols are used). The port 4090 is set as default (under usual circumstances it is not
necessary to switch to another port).
Note:
1. If the VPN server is already running, all VPN clients will be automatically disconnected
during the port change.
2. If it is not possible to run the VPN server at the specified port (the port is used by
another service), the following error will be reported in the Error log (see chapter 22.8)
upon clicking on the Apply button:
(4103:10048) Socket error: Unable to bind socket
for service to port 4090.
(5002) Failed to start service "VPN"
bound to address 192.168.1.1.
To make sure that the specified port is really free, view the Error log to see whether
an error of this type has not been reported.
23.2 Configuration of VPN clients
289
Figure 23.6 VPN server settings — server port and routes for VPN clients
Custom Routes
Other networks to which a VPN route will be set for the client can be specified in this
section. By default, routes to all local subnets at the VPN server’s side are defined — see
chapter 23.4).
Hint
Use the 255.255.255.255 network mask to define a route to a certain host. This can be
helpful for example when a route to a host in the demilitarized zone at the VPN server’s
side is being added.
23.2 Configuration of VPN clients
The following conditions must be met to enable connection of remote clients to local networks
via encrypted channels:
•The Kerio VPN Client must be installed at remote clients (for detailed description, refer
to a stand-alone document, Kerio VPN Client — User Guide).
•Users whose accounts are used for authentication to Kerio VPN Client must possess
rights enabling them connect to the VPN server in WinRoute (see chapter 15.115.1).
•Connection to the VPN server from the Internet as well as communication between
VPN clients must be allowed by traffic rules.
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
290
Note: Remote VPN clients connecting toWinRoute are included toward the number of persons
using the license (see chapters 4and 4.6). Be aware of this fact when deciding on what license
type should be purchased (or whether an add-on for upgrade to a higher number of users for
the license should be bought).
Hint:
VPN clients correctly connected to the firewall can be overviewed in the Administration Con-
sole, section Status →VPN clients. For details, see chapter 19.3.
Basic configuration of traffic rules for VPN clients
Figure 23.7 Common traffic rules for VPN clients
•The first rule allows connection to the VPN server in WinRoute from the Internet.
To restrict the number of IP addresses from which connection to the VPN server will
be allowed, edit the Source entry.
By default, the Kerio VPN service is defined for TCP and UDP protocols, port 4090. If
the VPN server is running at another port, this service must be redefined.
•The second rule allows communication between the firewall, local network and VPN
clients.
If the rules are set like this, all VPN clients can access local networks and vice versa (all local
hosts can communicate with all VPN clients). To restrict the type of network access available
to VPN clients, special rules must be defined. A few alternatives of the restrictions settings
within Kerio VPN are focused in chapter 23.5.
Note:
1. If the Network Rules Wizard is used to create traffic rules, the described rules can be gen-
erated automatically (including matching of VPN clients with the Source and Destination
items). To generate the rules automatically, select Yes, I want to use Kerio VPN in Step 5.
For details, see chapter 7.1.
2. For access to the Internet, VPN clients use their current Internet connections. VPN clients
are not allowed to connect to the Internet via WinRoute (configuration of default gateway
of clients cannot be defined).
3. For detailed information about traffic rules, refer to chapter 7.
23.3 Interconnection of two private networks via the Internet (VPN tunnel)
291
23.3 Interconnection of two private networks via the Internet (VPN tunnel)
WinRoute with support for VPN (VPN support is included in the typical installation) must be
installed in both networks to enable creation of an encrypted tunnel between a local and
a remote network via the Internet (“VPN tunnel”).
Note: Each installation of WinRoute requires its own license (see chapter 4).
Setting up VPN servers
First, the VPN server must be allowed by the traffic policy and enabled at both ends of the
tunnel. For detailed description on configuration of VPN servers, refer to chapter 23.1.
Definition of a tunnel to a remote server
VPN tunnel to the server on the other side must be defined at both ends. Use the Add →VPN
tunnel option in the Interfaces section to create a new tunnel.
Figure 23.8 VPN tunnel configuration
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
292
Name of the tunnel
Each VPN tunnel must have a unique name. This name will be used in the table of inter-
faces, in traffic rules (see chapter 7.3) and interface statistics (details in chapter 20.2).
Configuration
Selection of a mode for the local end of the tunnel:
•Active — this side of the tunnel will automatically attempt to establish and main-
tain a connection to the remote VPN server.
The remote VPN server specification is required through the Remote hostname
or IP address entry. If the remote VPN server does not use the port 4090,
a corresponding port number separated by a colon must be specified (e.g.
server.company.com:4100 or 10.10.100.20:9000).
This mode is available if the IP address or DNS name of the other side of the
tunnel is known and the remote endpoint is allowed to accept incoming connec-
tions (i.e. the communication is not blocked by a firewall at the remote end of the
tunnel).
•Passive — this end of the tunnel will only listen for an incoming connection from
the remote (active) side.
The passive mode is only useful when the local end of the tunnel has a fixed IP
address and when it is allowed to accept incoming connections.
At least one end of each VPN tunnel must be switched to the active mode (passive servers
cannot initialize connection).
Configuration of a remote end of the tunnel
When a VPN tunnel is being created, identity of the remote endpoint is authenticated
through the fingerprint of its SSL certificate. If the fingerprint does not match with the
fingerprint specified in the configuration of the tunnel, the connection will be rejected.
The fingerprint of the local certificate and the entry for specification of the remote fin-
gerprint are provided in the Settings for remote endpoint section. Specify the fingerprint
for the remote VPN server certificate and vice versa — specify the fingerprint of the local
server in the configuration at the remote server.
If the local endpoint is set to the active mode, the certificate of the remote endpoint and
its fingerprint can be downloaded by clicking Detect remote certificate. Passive endpoint
cannot detect remote certificate.
However, this method of fingerprint setting is quite insecure —a counterfeit certificate
might be used. If a fingerprint of a false certificate is used for the configuration of
the VPN tunnel, it is possible to create a tunnel for the false endpoint (for the attacker).
Moreover, a valid certificate would not be accepted from the other side. Therefore, for
security reasons, it is recommended to set fingerprints manually.
23.3 Interconnection of two private networks via the Internet (VPN tunnel)
293
Figure 23.9 VPN tunnel — certificate fingerprints
DNS Settings
DNS must be set properly at both sends of the tunnel so that it is possible to connect to hosts
in the remote network using their DNS names. One method is to add DNS records of the hosts
(to the hosts file) at each endpoint. However, this method is quite complicated and inflexible.
If the DNS module in WinRoute is used as the DNS server at both ends of the tunnel, DNS
queries (for DNS rules, refer to chapter 8.1) can be forwarded to hostnames in the correspond-
ing domain of the DNS module at the other end of the tunnel. DNS domain (or subdomain)
must be used at both sides of the tunnel.
Note: To provide correct forwarding of DNS queries sent from the WinRoute host (at any side
of the VPN tunnel), it is necessary that these queries are processed by the DNS module. To
achieve this, set the DNS server on each firewall’s interface located to the local network “to its
own” (i.e. use IP address of the very interface as the DNS server address).
Detailed guidance for the DNS configuration is provided in the example in chapter 23.5.
Routing settings
On the Advanced tab, you can set which method will be used to add routes provided by the
remote endpoint of the tunnel to the local routing table as well as define custom routes to
remote networks.
The Kerio VPN routing issue is described in detail in chapter 23.4.
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
294
Figure 23.10 VPN tunnel’s routing configuration
Connection establishment
Active endpoints automatically attempt to recover connection whenever they detect that the
corresponding tunnel has been disconnected (the first connection establishment is attempted
immediately after the tunnel is defined and upon clicking the Apply button in Configuration
→Interfaces, i.e. when the corresponding traffic is allowed — see below).
VPN tunnels can be disabled by the Disable button. Both endpoints should be disabled while
the tunnel is being disabled.
23.3 Interconnection of two private networks via the Internet (VPN tunnel)
295
Note: VPN tunnels keeps their connection (by sending special packets in regular time intervals)
even if no data is transmitted. This feature protects tunnels from disconnection by other
firewalls or network devices between ends of tunnels.
Traffic Policy Settings for VPN
Once the VPN tunnel is created, it is necessary to allow traffic between the LAN and the network
connected by the tunnel and to allow outgoing connection for the Kerio VPN service (from
the firewall to the Internet). If basic traffic rules are already created by the wizard (refer to
chapter 23.2), simply add a corresponding VPN tunnel into the Local Traffic rule and the Kerio
VPN service to the Firewall traffic. The resulting traffic rules are shown at figure 23.11.
Figure 23.11 Traffic Policy Settings for VPN
Note:
1. To keep examples in this guide as simple as possible, it is supposed that the Firewall traffic
rule allows to access any service at the firewall (see figure 23.12). Under these conditions,
it is not necessary to add the Kerio VPN service to the rule.
Figure 23.12 Common traffic rules for VPN tunnel
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
296
2. Traffic rules set by this method allow full IP communication between the local network,
remote network and all VPN clients. For access restrictions, define corresponding traffic
rules (for local traffic, VPN clients, VPN tunnel, etc.). Examples of traffic rules are provided
in chapter 23.5.
23.4 Exchange of routing information
An automatic exchange of routing information (i.e. of data informing about routes to local
subnets) is performed between endpoints of any VPN tunnel (or between the VPN server and
a VPN client). Thus, routing tables at both sides of the tunnel are always kept up-to-date.
Routing configuration options
Under usual circumstances, it is not necessary to define any custom routes — particular routes
will be added to the routing tables automatically when configuration is changed at any side
of the tunnel (or at the VPN server). However, if a routing table at any side of the VPN tunnel
includes invalid routes (e.g. specified by the administrator), these routes are also interchanged.
This might make traffic with some remote subnets impossible and overload VPN tunnel by too
many control messages.
A similar problem may occur in case of a VPN client connecting to the WinRoute’s VPN server.
To avoid the problems just described, it is possible to go to the VPN tunnel definition dialog
(see chapter 23.3) or to the VPN server settings dialog (refer to chapter 23.1) to set which
routing data will be used and define custom routes.
Kerio VPN uses the following methods to pass routing information:
•Routes provided automatically by the remote endpoint (set as default) — routes to
remote networks are set automatically with respect to the information provided by
the remote endpoint. If this option is selected, no additional settings are necessary
unless problems regarding invalid routes occur (see above).
•Both automatically provided and custom routes — routes provided automatically are
complemented by custom routes defined at the local endpoint. In case of any colli-
sions, custom routes are used as prior. This option easily solves the problem where
a remote endpoint provides one or more invalid route(s).
•Custom routes only — all routes to remote networks must be set manually at the local
endpoint of the tunnel. This alternative eliminates adding of invalid routes provided
by a remote endpoint to the local routing table. However, it is quite demanding from
the administrator’s point of view (any change in the remote network’s configuration
requires modification of custom routes).
23.5 Example of Kerio VPN configuration: company with a filial office
297
Routes provided automatically
Unless any custom routes are defined, the following rules apply to the interchange of routing
information:
•default routes as well as routes to networks with default gateways are not exchanged
(default gateway cannot be changed for remote VPN clients and/or for remote end-
points of a tunnel),
•routes to subnets which are identical for both sides of a tunnel are not exchanged
(routing of local and remote networks with identical IP ranges is not allowed).
•other routes (i.e. routes to local subnets at remote ends of VPN tunnels excluding the
cases described above, all other VPN and all VPN clients) are exchanged.
Note: As implied from the description provided above, if two VPN tunnels are created, com-
munication between these two networks is possible. The traffic rules can be configured so that
connection to the local network will be disabled for both these remote networks.
Update of routing tables
Routing information is exchanged:
•when a VPN tunnel is connected or when a VPN client is connected to the server,
•when information in a routing table at any side of the tunnel (or at the VPN server) is
changed,
•periodically, every 10 minutes. The timeout starts upon each update (regardless of
the update reason).
23.5 Example of Kerio VPN configuration: company with a filial office
This chapter provides a detailed exemplary description on how to create an encrypted tunnel
connecting two private networks using the Kerio VPN.
This example can be easily customized. The method described can be used in cases where no
redundant routes arise by creating VPN tunnels (i.e. multiple routes between individual private
networks). Configuration of VPN with redundant routes (typically in case of a company with
two or more filials) is described in chapter 23.6.
Note: This example describes a more complicated pattern of VPN with access restrictions for
individual local networks and VPN clients. An example of basic VPN configuration is provided
in the Kerio WinRoute Firewall — Step By Step Configuration document.
Specification
Supposing a company has its headquarters in New York and a branch office in London. We
intend to interconnect local networks of the headquarters by a VPN tunnel using the Kerio
VPN. VPN clients will be allowed to connect to the headquarters network.
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
298
The server (default gateway) of the headquarters uses the public IP address 63.55.21.12 (DNS
name is newyork.company.com), the server of the branch office uses a dynamic IP address
assigned by DHCP.
The local network of the headquarters consists of two subnets, LAN 1 and LAN 2. The head-
quarters uses the company.com DNS domain.
The network of the branch office consists of one subnet only (LAN). The branch office
filial.company.com.
Figure 23.13 provides a scheme of the entire system, including IP addresses and the VPN
tunnels that will be built.
Figure 23.13 Example — interconnection of the headquarter and
a filial office by VPN tunnel (connection of VPN clients is possible)
Suppose that both networks are already deployed and set according to the figure and that the
Internet connection is available.
Traffic between the network of the headquarters, the network of the branch office and VPN
clients will be restricted according to the following rules:
1. VPN clients can connect to the LAN 1 and to the network of the branch office.
2. Connection to VPN clients is disabled for all networks.
3. Only the LAN 1 network is available from the branch office. In addition to this, only the
WWW,FTP and Microsoft SQL services are available.
4. No restrictions are applied for connections from the headquarters to the branch office
network.
5. LAN 2 is not available to the branch office network nor to VPN clients.
23.5 Example of Kerio VPN configuration: company with a filial office
299
Common method
The following actions must be taken in both local networks (i.e. in the main office and the
filial):
1. It is necessary that WinRoute in version 6.0.0 or higher (older versions do not include
Kerio VPN) is installed at the default gateway.
Note: For each installation of WinRoute, a separate license for corresponding number of
users is required! For details see chapter 4.
2. Configure and test connection of the local network to the Internet. Hosts in the local net-
work must use the WinRoute host’s IP address as the default gateway and as the primary
DNS server.
If it is a new (clean) WinRoute installation, it is possible to use the traffic rule wizard (refer
to chapter 7.1).
For detailed description of basic configuration of WinRoute and of the local network, refer
to the Kerio WinRoute Firewall — Step By Step document.
3. In configuration of the DNS module set DNS forwarding rules for the domain in the remote
network. This enables to access hosts in the remote network by using their DNS names
(otherwise, it is necessary to specify remote hosts by IP addresses).
To provide correct forwarding of DNS requests from a WinRoute host, it is necessary to
use an IP address of a network device belonging to the host as the primary DNS server. As
a secondary DNS server, a server where DNS requests addressed to other domains will be
forwarded must be specified (typically the ISP’s DNS server).
Note: For proper functionality of DNS, the DNS database must include records for hosts
in a corresponding local network. To achieve this, save DNS names and IP addresses of
local hosts into the hosts file (if they use IP addresses) or enable cooperation of the DNS
module with the DHCP server (in case that IP addresses are assigned dynamically to these
hosts). For details, see chapter 8.1.
4. In the Interfaces section, allow the VPN server and set its SSL certificate if necessary. Note
the fingerprint of the server’s certificate for later use (it will be required for configuration
of the remote endpoint of the VPN tunnel).
Check whether the automatically selected VPN subnet does not collide with any local sub-
net either in the headquarters or in the filial and select another free subnet if necessary.
5. Define the VPN tunnel to the remote network. The passive endpoint of the tunnel must
be created at a server with fixed public IP address (i.e. at the headquarter’s server). Only
active endpoints of VPN tunnels can be created at servers with dynamic IP address.
If the remote endpoint of the tunnel has already been defined, check whether the tunnel
was created. If not, refer to the Error log, check fingerprints of the certificates and also
availability of the remote server.
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
300
6. In traffic rules, allow traffic between the local network, remote network and VPN clients
and set desirable access restrictions. In this network configuration, all desirable restric-
tions can be set at the headquarter’s server. Therefore, only traffic between the local
network and the VPN tunnel will be enabled at the filial’s server.
7. Test reachability of remote hosts from each local network. To perform the test, use the
ping and tracert system commands. Test availability of remote hosts both through IP
addresses and DNS names.
If a remote host is tested through IP address and it does not respond, check configuration
of the traffic rules or/and find out whether the subnets do not collide (i.e. whether the
same subnet is not used at both ends of the tunnel).
If an IP address is tested successfully and an error is reported (Unknown host) when a cor-
responding DNS name is tested, then check configuration of the DNS.
The following sections provide detailed description of the Kerio VPN configuration both for
the headquarter and the filial offices.
Headquarters configuration
1. Install WinRoute (version 6.0.0 or later) at the headquarter’s default gateway (“server”).
2. Use Network Rules Wizard (see chapter 7.1) to configure the basic traffic policy in WinRoute.
To keep the example as simple as possible, it is supposed that the access from the local
network to the Internet is not restricted, i.e. that access to all services is allowed in step 4.
Figure 23.14 Headquarters — no restrictions are applied to accessing the Internet from the LAN
23.5 Example of Kerio VPN configuration: company with a filial office
301
In step 5, select Create rules for Kerio VPN server. Status of the Create rules for Kerio
Clientless SSL-VPN option is irrelevant (this example does not include Clientless SSL-VPN
interface’s issues).
Figure 23.15 Headquarter — creating default traffic rules for Kerio VPN
This step will create rules for connection of the VPN server as well as for communication
of VPN clients with the local network (through the firewall).
Figure 23.16 Headquarter — default traffic rules for Kerio VPN
When the VPN tunnel is created, customize these rules according to the restriction re-
quirements (see item 6).
Note: To keep the example as simple and transparent as possible, only traffic rules relevant
for the Kerio VPN configuration are mentioned.
3. Customize DNS configuration as follows:
•In the WinRoute’s DNS module configuration, enable DNS forwarder (forwarding
of DNS requests to other servers).
•Enable the Use custom forwarding option and define rules for names in the
filial.company.com domain. Specify the server for DNS forwarding by the IP
address of the remote firewall host’s interface (i.e. interface connected to the
local network at the other end of the tunnel).
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
302
Figure 23.17 Headquarter — DNS forwarding settings
•Set the IP address of this interface (10.1.1.1) as a primary DNS server for the
WinRoute host’s interface connected to the LAN 1 local network. It is not necessary
to set DNS server at the interface connected to LAN 2 — DNS configuration is
applied globally to the entire operating system.
Figure 23.18 Headquarter — TCP/IP configuration at
a firewall’s interface connected to the local network
23.5 Example of Kerio VPN configuration: company with a filial office
303
•Set the IP address 10.1.1.1 as a primary DNS server also for the other hosts.
Note: For proper functionality of DNS, the DNS database must include records for hosts
in a corresponding local network. To achieve this, save DNS names and IP addresses of
local hosts into the hosts file (if they use IP addresses) or enable cooperation of the DNS
module with the DHCP server (in case that IP addresses are assigned dynamically to these
hosts). For details, see chapter 8.1.
4. Enable the VPN server and configure its SSL certificate (create a self-signed certificate if no
certificate provided by a certification authority is available).
Note: A free subnet which has been selected is now specified automatically in the VPN
network and Mask entries.
Figure 23.19 Headquarters — VPN server configuration
For a detailed description on the VPN server configuration, refer to chapter 23.1.
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
304
5. Create a passive end of the VPN tunnel (the server of the branch office uses a dynamic IP
address). Specify the remote endpoint’s fingerprint by the fingerprint of the certificate of
the branch office VPN server.
Figure 23.20 Headquarter — definition of VPN tunnel for a filial office
6. Customize traffic rules according to the restriction requirements.
•In the Local Traffic rule, remove all items except those belonging to the local
network of the company headquarters, i.e. except the firewall and LAN 1 and
LAN 2.
•Define (add) the VPN clients rule which will allow VPN clients to connect to LAN 1
and to the network of the branch office (via the VPN tunnel).
•Create the Branch office rule which will allow connections to services in LAN 1.
•Add the Company headquarters rule allowing connections from both headquar-
ters subnets to the branch office network..
23.5 Example of Kerio VPN configuration: company with a filial office
305
Figure 23.21 Headquarter — final traffic rules
Rules defined this way meet all the restriction requirements. Traffic which will not match
any of these rules will be blocked by the default rule (see chapter 7.3).
Configuration of a filial office
1. Install WinRoute (version 6.0.0 or later) at the default gateway of the branch office
(“server”).
2. Use Network Rules Wizard (see chapter 7.1) to configure the basic traffic policy in WinRoute.
To keep the example as simple as possible, it is supposed that the access from the local
network to the Internet is not restricted, i.e. that access to all services is allowed in step 4.
Figure 23.22 Filial — no restrictions are applied to accessing the Internet from the LAN
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
306
In this case, it would be meaningless to create rules for the Kerio VPN server and/or the
Kerio Clientless SSL-VPN, since the server uses a dynamic public IP address). Therefore,
leave these options disabled in step 5.
Figure 23.23 A filial — it is not necessary to create rules for the Kerio VPN server
This step will create rules for connection of the VPN server as well as for communication
of VPN clients with the local network (through the firewall).
Figure 23.24 Filial office — default traffic rules for Kerio VPN
When the VPN tunnel is created, customize these rules according to the restriction re-
quirements (Step 6).
3. Customize DNS configuration as follows:
•In the WinRoute’s DNS module configuration, enable DNS forwarder (forwarding
of DNS requests to other servers).
•Enable the Use custom forwarding option and define rules for names in the
filial.company.com domain. Specify the server for DNS forwarding by the IP
address of the remote firewall host’s interface (i.e. interface connected to the
local network at the other end of the tunnel).
•Set the IP address of this interface (192.168.1.1) as a primary DNS server for the
WinRoute host’s interface connected to the local network.
23.5 Example of Kerio VPN configuration: company with a filial office
307
Figure 23.25 Filial office — DNS forwarding settings
Figure 23.26 Filial office — TCP/IP configuration at
a firewall’s interface connected to the local network
•Set the IP address 192.168.1.1 as a primary DNS server also for the other hosts.
Note: For proper functionality of DNS, the DNS database must include records for hosts
in a corresponding local network. To achieve this, save DNS names and IP addresses of
local hosts into the hosts file (if they use IP addresses) or enable cooperation of the DNS
module with the DHCP server (in case that IP addresses are assigned dynamically to these
hosts). For details, see chapter 8.1.
4. Enable the VPN server and configure its SSL certificate (create a self-signed certificate if no
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
308
certificate provided by a certification authority is available).
Note: A free subnet which has been selected is now specified automatically in the VPN
network and Mask entries.
Figure 23.27 Filial office — VPN server configuration
For a detailed description on the VPN server configuration, refer to chapter 23.1.
5. Create an active endpoint of the VPN tunnel which will connect to the headquarters server
(newyork.company.com). Use the fingerprint of the VPN server of the headquarters as a
specification of the fingerprint of the remote SSL certificate.
At this point, connection should be established (i.e. the tunnel should be created). If
connected successfully, the Connected status will be reported in the Adapter info column
for both ends of the tunnel. If the connection cannot be established, we recommend you
to check the configuration of the traffic rules and test availability of the remote server
— in our example, the ping newyork.company.com command can be used at the branch
office server.
Note: If a collision of VPN network and the remote network is detected upon creation of
the VPN tunnel, select an appropriate free subnet and specify its parameters at the VPN
server (see Step 4).
For detailed information on how to create VPN tunnels, see chapter 23.3.
6. Add the new VPN tunnel into the Local Traffic rule. It is also possible to remove the Dial-In
interface and the VPN clients group from this rule (VPN clients are not allowed to connect
to the branch office).
23.5 Example of Kerio VPN configuration: company with a filial office
309
Figure 23.28 Filial office — definition of VPN tunnel for the headquarters
Figure 23.29 Filial office — final traffic rules
Note: It is not necessary to perform any other customization of traffic rules. The required
restrictions should be already set in the traffic policy at the server of the headquarters.
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
310
VPN test
Configuration of the VPN tunnel has been completed by now. At this point, it is recommended
to test availability of the remote hosts from each end of the tunnel (from both local networks).
For example, the ping or/and tracert operating system commands can be used for this
testing. It is recommended to test availability of remote hosts both through IP addresses and
DNS names.
If a remote host is tested through IP address and it does not respond, check configuration
of the traffic rules or/and find out whether the subnets do not collide (i.e. whether the same
subnet is not used at both ends of the tunnel).
If an IP address is tested successfully and an error is reported (Unknown host) when a corre-
sponding DNS name is tested, then check configuration of the DNS.
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration
In this chapter, an example of a more complex VPN configuration is provided where redundant
routes arise between interconnected private networks (i.e. multiple routes exist between two
networks that can be used for transfer of packets).
The only difference of Kerio VPN configuration between this type and VPN with no redundant
routes (see chapter 23.5) is setting of routing between endpoints of individual tunnels. In
such a case, it is necessary to set routing between individual endpoints of VPN tunnels by
hand. Automatic route exchange is inconvenient since Kerio VPN uses no routing protocol and
the route exchange is based on comparison of routing tables at individual endpoints of the
VPN tunnel (see also chapter 23.4). If the automatic exchange is applied, the routing will not
be ideal!
For better reference, the configuration is here described by an example of a company with
a headquarters and two filial offices with their local private network interconnected by VPN
tunnels (so called triangle pattern). This example can be then adapted and applied to any
number of interconnected private networks.
The example focuses configuration of VPN tunnels and correct setting of routing between in-
dividual private networks (it does not include access restrictions). Access restrictions options
within VPN are described by the example in chapter 23.5.
Specification
The network follows the pattern shown in figure 23.30.
The server (default gateway) uses the fixed IP address 63.55.21.12 (DNS name is
gw-newyork.company.com). The server of one filial uses the IP address 115.95.27.55 (DNS
name gw-london.company.com), the other filial’s server uses a dynamic IP address assigned
by the ISP.
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration
311
The headquarters uses the DNS domain company.com, filials use subdomains
santaclara.company.com and newyork.company.com. Configuration of individual
local networks and the IP addresses used are shown in the figure.
Figure 23.30 Example of a VPN configuration — a company with two filials
Common method
The following actions must be taken in all local networks (i.e. in the main office and both
filials):
1. WinRoute in version 6.1.0 or higher must be installed at the default gateway. Older
versions do not allow setting of routing for VPN tunnels. Therefore, they cannot be used
for this VPN configuration (see figure 23.30).
Note: For each installation of WinRoute, a separate license for corresponding number of
users is required! For details see chapter 4.
2. Configure and test connection of the local network to the Internet. Hosts in the local net-
work must use the WinRoute host’s IP address as the default gateway and as the primary
DNS server.
If it is a new (clean) WinRoute installation, it is possible to use the traffic rule wizard (refer
to chapter 7.1).
For detailed description of basic configuration of WinRoute and of the local network, refer
to the Kerio WinRoute Firewall — Step By Step document.
3. In configuration of the DNS module, set DNS forwarding rules for domains of the other
filials. This enables to access hosts in the remote networks by using their DNS names
(otherwise, it is necessary to specify remote hosts by IP addresses).
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
312
To provide correct forwarding of DNS requests from a WinRoute host, it is necessary to
use an IP address of a network device belonging to the host as the primary DNS server. As
a secondary DNS server, a server where DNS requests addressed to other domains will be
forwarded must be specified (typically the ISP’s DNS server).
Note: For proper functionality of DNS, the DNS database must include records for hosts
in a corresponding local network. To achieve this, save DNS names and IP addresses of
local hosts into the hosts file (if they use IP addresses) or enable cooperation of the DNS
module with the DHCP server (in case that IP addresses are assigned dynamically to these
hosts). For details, see chapter 8.1.
4. In the Interfaces section, allow the VPN server and set its SSL certificate if necessary. Note
the fingerprint of the server’s certificate for later use (it will be required for configuration
of the VPN tunnels in the other filials).
Check whether the automatically selected VPN subnet does not collide with any local sub-
net in any filial and select another free subnet if necessary.
Note: With respect to the complexity of this VPN configuration, it is recommended to
reserve three free subnets in advance that can later be assigned to individual VPN servers.
5. Define the VPN tunnel to one of the remote networks. The passive endpoint of the tunnel
must be created at a server with fixed public IP address. Only active endpoints of VPN
tunnels can be created at servers with dynamic IP address.
Set routing (define custom routes) for the tunnel. Select the Use custom routes only option
and specify all subnets of the remote network in the custom routes list.
If the remote endpoint of the tunnel has already been defined, check whether the tunnel
was created. If not, refer to the Error log, check fingerprints of the certificates and also
availability of the remote server.
6. Follow the same method to define a tunnel and set routing to the other remote network.
7. Allow traffic between the local and the remote networks. To allow any traffic, just add the
created VPN tunnels to the Source and Destination items in the Local traffic rule. Access
restrictions options within VPN are described by the example in chapter 23.5.
8. Test reachability of remote hosts in both remote networks. To perform the test, use the
ping and tracert system commands. Test availability of remote hosts both through IP
addresses and DNS names.
If a remote host is tested through IP address and it does not respond, check configuration
of the traffic rules or/and find out whether the subnets do not collide (i.e. whether the
same subnet is not used at both ends of the tunnel).
If an IP address is tested successfully and an error is reported (Unknown host) when a cor-
responding DNS name is tested, then check configuration of the DNS.
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration
313
The following sections provide detailed description of the Kerio VPN configuration both for
the headquarter and the filial offices.
Headquarters configuration
1. Install WinRoute (version 6.1.0 or higher) at the default gateway of the headquarters
network.
2. Use Network Rules Wizard (see chapter 7.1) to configure the basic traffic policy in WinRoute.
To keep the example as simple as possible, it is supposed that the access from the local
network to the Internet is not restricted, i.e. that access to all services is allowed in step 4.
Figure 23.31 Headquarters — no restrictions are applied to accessing the Internet from the LAN
In step 5, select Create rules for Kerio VPN server. Status of the Create rules for Kerio
Clientless SSL-VPN option is irrelevant (this example does not include Clientless SSL-VPN
interface’s issues).
Figure 23.32 Headquarter — creating default traffic rules for Kerio VPN
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
314
This step will create rules for connection of the VPN server as well as for communication
of VPN clients with the local network (through the firewall).
Figure 23.33 Headquarter — default traffic rules for Kerio VPN
3. Customize DNS configuration as follows:
•In the WinRoute’s DNS module configuration, enable DNS forwarder (forwarding
of DNS requests to other servers).
•Enable the Use custom forwarding option and define rules for names in the
filial1.company.com and filial2.company.com domains. To specify the for-
warding DNS server, always use the IP address of the WinRoute host’s inbound
interface connected to the local network at the remote side of the tunnel.
Figure 23.34 Headquarter — DNS forwarding settings
•Set the IP address of this interface (10.1.1.1) as a primary DNS server for the
WinRoute host’s interface connected to the LAN 1 local network. It is not necessary
to set DNS at the interface connected to LAN 2.
•Set the IP address 10.1.1.1 as a primary DNS server also for the other hosts.
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration
315
Figure 23.35 Headquarter — TCP/IP configuration at
a firewall’s interface connected to the local network
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
316
4. Enable the VPN server and configure its SSL certificate (create a self-signed certificate if no
certificate provided by a certification authority is available).
Note: A free subnet which has been selected is now specified automatically in the VPN
network and Mask entries. Check whether this subnet does not collide with any other
subnet in the headquarters or in the filials. If it does, specify a free subnet.
Figure 23.36 Headquarters — VPN server configuration
For a detailed description on the VPN server configuration, refer to chapter 23.1.
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration
317
5. Create a passive endpoint of the VPN tunnel connected to the London filial. Use the fin-
gerprint of the VPN server of the London filial office as a specification of the fingerprint of
the remote SSL certificate.
Figure 23.37 Headquarter — definition of VPN tunnel for the London filial
On the Advanced tab, select the Use custom routes only option and set routes to the sub-
nets at the remote endpoint of the tunnel (i.e. in the London filial).
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
318
Figure 23.38 The headquarters — routing configuration for the tunnel connected to the London filial
Warning
In case that the VPN configuration described here is applied (see figure 23.30), it is un-
recommended to use automatically provided routes! In case of an automatic exchange of
routes, the routing within the VPN is not be ideal (for example, any traffic between the
headquarters and the Paris filial office is routed via the London filial whereas the tunnel
between the headquarters and the Paris office stays waste.
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration
319
6. Use the same method to create a passive endpoint for the tunnel connected to the Paris
filial.
Figure 23.39 The headquarters — definition of VPN tunnel for the Paris filial
On the Advanced tab, select the Use custom routes only option and set routes to the sub-
nets at the remote endpoint of the tunnel (i.e. in the Paris filial).
7. Add the new VPN tunnels into the Local Traffic rule.
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
320
Figure 23.40 The headquarters — routing configuration for the tunnel connected to the Paris filial
Figure 23.41 Headquarter — final traffic rules
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration
321
Configuration of the London filial
1. Install WinRoute (version 6.1.0 or higher) at the default gateway of the filial’s network.
2. Use Network Rules Wizard (see chapter 7.1) to configure the basic traffic policy in WinRoute.
To keep the example as simple as possible, it is supposed that the access from the local
network to the Internet is not restricted, i.e. that access to all services is allowed in step 4.
In step 5 of the wizard, select the Create rules for Kerio VPN server option (setting of the
Create rules for Kerio Clientless SSL-VPN option is not regarded here).
Figure 23.42 The London filial — no restrictions are applied to accessing the Internet from the LAN
Figure 23.43 The London filial office — creating default traffic rules for Kerio VPN
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
322
This step will create rules for connection of the VPN server as well as for communication
of VPN clients with the local network (through the firewall).
Figure 23.44 The London filial office — default traffic rules for Kerio VPN
3. Customize DNS configuration as follows:
•In the WinRoute’s DNS module configuration, enable DNS forwarder (forwarding
of DNS requests to other servers).
•Enable the Use custom forwarding option and define rules for names in the
company.com and filial2.company.com domains. To specify the forwarding
DNS server, always use the IP address of the WinRoute host’s inbound interface
connected to the local network at the remote side of the tunnel.
Figure 23.45 The London filial office — DNS forwarding settings
•Set the IP address of this interface (172.16.1.1) as a primary DNS server for the
WinRoute host’s interface connected to the LAN 1 local network. It is not necessary
to set DNS at the interface connected to LAN 2.
•Set the IP address 172.16.1.1 as a primary DNS server also for the other hosts.
4. Enable the VPN server and configure its SSL certificate (create a self-signed certificate if no
certificate provided by a certification authority is available).
Note: A free subnet which has been selected is now specified automatically in the VPN
network and Mask entries. Check whether this subnet does not collide with any other
subnet in the headquarters or in the filials. If it does, specify a free subnet.
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration
323
Figure 23.46 The London filial office — VPN server configuration
For a detailed description on the VPN server configuration, refer to chapter 23.1.
5. Create an active endpoint of the VPN tunnel which will connect to the headquarters server
(newyork.company.com). Use the fingerprint of the VPN server of the headquarters as a
specification of the fingerprint of the remote SSL certificate.
On the Advanced tab, select the Use custom routes only option and set routes to headquar-
ters’ local networks.
At this point, connection should be established (i.e. the tunnel should be created). If
connected successfully, the Connected status will be reported in the Adapter info column
for both ends of the tunnel. If the connection cannot be established, we recommend you
to check the configuration of the traffic rules and test availability of the remote server — in
our example, the ping gw-newyork.company.com command can be used at the London
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
324
branch office server.
Figure 23.47 The London filial office — definition of VPN tunnel for the headquarters
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration
325
Figure 23.48 The London filial — routing configuration for the tunnel connected to the headquarters
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
326
6. Create a passive endpoint of the VPN tunnel connected to the Paris filial. Use the finger-
print of the VPN server of the Paris filial office as a specification of the fingerprint of the
remote SSL certificate.
Figure 23.49 The London filial office — definition of VPN tunnel for the Paris filial office
On the Advanced tab, select the Use custom routes only option and set routes to Paris’
local networks.
7. Add the new VPN tunnels into the Local Traffic rule. It is also possible to remove the
Dial-In interface and the VPN clients group from this rule (supposing that all VPN clients
connect to the headquarters’ server).
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration
327
Figure 23.50 The London filial — routing configuration
for the tunnel connected to the Paris branch office
Figure 23.51 The London filial office — final traffic rules
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
328
Configuration of the Paris filial
1. Install WinRoute (version 6.1.0 or higher) at the default gateway of the filial’s network.
2. Use Network Rules Wizard (see chapter 7.1) to configure the basic traffic policy in WinRoute.
To keep the example as simple as possible, it is supposed that the access from the local
network to the Internet is not restricted, i.e. that access to all services is allowed in step 4.
Figure 23.52 The Paris filial — no restrictions are applied to accessing the Internet from the LAN
In this case, it would be meaningless to create rules for the Kerio VPN server and/or the
Kerio Clientless SSL-VPN, since the server uses a dynamic public IP address). Therefore,
leave these options disabled in step 5.
Figure 23.53 The Paris filial — default rules for Kerio VPN will not be created
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration
329
3. Customize DNS configuration as follows:
•In the WinRoute’s DNS module configuration, enable DNS forwarder (forwarding
of DNS requests to other servers).
•Enable the Use custom forwarding option and define rules for names in the
company.com and filial1.company.com domains. Specify the server for DNS
forwarding by the IP address of the remote firewall host’s interface (i.e. interface
connected to the local network at the other end of the tunnel).
Figure 23.54 The Paris filial office — DNS forwarding settings
•Set the IP address of this interface (172.16.1.1) as a primary DNS server for the
WinRoute host’s interface connected to the LAN 1 local network. It is not necessary
to set DNS at the interface connected to LAN 2.
•Set the IP address 172.16.1.1 as a primary DNS server also for the other hosts.
4. Enable the VPN server and configure its SSL certificate (create a self-signed certificate if no
certificate provided by a certification authority is available).
Note: A free subnet which has been selected is now specified automatically in the VPN
network and Mask entries. Check whether this subnet does not collide with any other
subnet in the headquarters or in the filials. If it does, specify a free subnet.
For a detailed description on the VPN server configuration, refer to chapter 23.1.
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
330
Figure 23.55 The Paris filial office — VPN server configuration
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration
331
5. Create an active endpoint of the VPN tunnel which will connect to the headquarters server
(newyork.company.com). Use the fingerprint of the VPN server of the headquarters as a
specification of the fingerprint of the remote SSL certificate.
Figure 23.56 The Paris filial office — definition of VPN tunnel for the headquarters
On the Advanced tab, select the Use custom routes only option and set routes to headquar-
ters’ local networks.
At this point, connection should be established (i.e. the tunnel should be created). If
connected successfully, the Connected status will be reported in the Adapter info column
for both ends of the tunnel. If the connection cannot be established, we recommend you
to check the configuration of the traffic rules and test availability of the remote server —
in our example, the ping gw-sanfrancisco.company.com command can be used at the
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
332
Paris branch office server.
Figure 23.57 The Paris filial — routing configuration for the tunnel connected to the headquarters
23.6 Example of a more complex Kerio VPN configuration
333
6. Create an active endpoint of the tunnel connected to London (server
gw-london.company.com). Use the fingerprint of the VPN server of the London
filial office as a specification of the fingerprint of the remote SSL certificate.
Figure 23.58 The Paris filial office — definition of VPN tunnel for the London filial office
On the Advanced tab, select the Use custom routes only option and set routes to London’s
local networks.
Like in the previous step, check whether the tunnel has been established successfully, and
check reachability of remote private networks (i.e. of local networks in the London filial).
7. Add the new VPN tunnels into the Local Traffic rule. It is also possible to remove the
Dial-In interface and the VPN clients group from this rule (VPN clients are not allowed to
Chapter 23 Kerio VPN
334
Figure 23.59 The Paris filial — routing configuration
for the tunnel connected to the London branch office
Figure 23.60 The Paris filial office — final traffic rules
connect to this branch office).
VPN test
The VPN configuration has been completed by now. At this point, it is recommended to test
reachability of the remote hosts in the other remote networks (at remote endpoints of individ-
ual tunnels).
For example, the ping or/and tracert operating system commands can be used for this
testing.
335
Chapter 24
Kerio Clientless SSL-VPN (Windows)
Kerio Clientless SSL-VPN (thereinafter “SSL-VPN”) is a special interface used for secured remote
access to shared items (files and folders) in the network protected by WinRoute via a web
browser. This interface is available only in WinRoute on Windows.
To a certain extent, the SSL-VPN interface is an alternative to Kerio VPN Client (see chapter 23).
Its main benefit is that it enables an immediate access to a remote network from any location
without any special application having been installed and any configuration having been per-
formed (that’s the reason for calling it clientless). The main disadvantage of this alternative is
that network connections are not transparent. SSL-VPN is, in a manner, an alternative to the
My Network Places system tool ) — it does not enable access to web servers or other services
in a—remote network.
SSL-VPN is suitable for an immediate access to shared files in remote networks in such envi-
ronments where it is not possible or useful to use Kerio VPN Client.
This chapter addresses configuration details needed for proper functionality of the SSL-VPN
interface. The SSL-VPN interface is described thoroughly in the Kerio WinRoute Firewall —
User’s Guide.
24.1 Configuration of WinRoute’s SSL-VPN
SSL-VPN interface requirements
For proper functionality of the SSL-VPN interface, the following conditions must be met:
1. The WinRoute host must be a member of the corresponding domain (Windows NT or Active
Directory domain).
2. User accounts that will be used for connections to SSL-VPN must be authenticated at the
domain (it is not possible to use local authentication). This implies that the SSL-VPN
interface cannot be used for accessing shared items in multiple domains or to items at
hosts which are not members of any domain.
3. Users who are supposed to be allowed to access the SSL-VPN interface needs the right to
use Clientless SSL-VPN in WinRoute (see chapter 15.2).
4. If WinRoute is installed on the domain server, the corresponding users need to be allowed
to log on to the server locally. Local logon can be allowed under Domain Controller Security
Policy. For details, refer to our Knowledge Base.
Chapter 24 Kerio Clientless SSL-VPN (Windows)
336
SSL-VPN interface configuration
The SSL-VPN interface can be enabled/disabled on the Web Interface →SSL-VPN in the Config-
uration →Advanced Options section.
Figure 24.1 Configuration of the SSL-VPN interface
Through the Advanced button, you can get to configuration of a port and SSL certificate for
the SSL-VPN interface.
Figure 24.2 Setting of TCP port and SSL certificate for SSL-VPN
SSL-VPN’s default port is port 443 (standard port of the HTTPS service).
Click Change SSL Certificate to create a new certificate for the SSL-VPN service or to import
a certificate issued by a trustworthy certification authority. When created, the certificate is
saved as sslvpn.crt and the corresponding private key as sslvpn.key. The process of cre-
ating/importing a certificate is identical as the one for WinRoute’s interface or the VPN server,
addressed in detail in chapter 11.1.
Hint
Certificates for particular server name issued by a trustworthy certification authority can also
be used for the Web interface and the VPN server it is not necessary to use three different
certificates.
24.2 Usage of the SSL-VPN interface
337
Allowing access from the Internet
Access to the SSL-VPN interface from the Internet must be allowed by defining a traffic rule
allowing connection to the firewall’s HTTPS service. For details, see chapter 7.4.
Figure 24.3 Traffic rule allowing connection to the SSL-VPN interface
Note: If the port for SSL-VPN interface is changed, it is also necessary to modify the Service
item in this rule!
Antivirus control
If at least one antivirus is enabled in WinRoute (see chapter 13), all files transferred by the
SSL-VPN interface can be scanned for viruses.
In default configuration, only files uploaded to hosts in remote private networks are scanned.
For connection speed reasons, files downloaded to local hosts from remote networks are not
scanned by antiviruses (files downloaded from private networks are considered as trustwor-
thy). Settings of antivirus check can be changed in antivirus configuration — see chapter 13.5.
24.2 Usage of the SSL-VPN interface
For access to the interface, most of common graphical web browsers can be used (however, we
recommend to use Internet Explorer version 6.0 or Firefox/SeaMonkey with the core version 1.3
and later). Specify URL in the browser in the
https://server/
format, where server represents the DNS name or IP address of the WinRoute host. If SSL-VPN
uses another port than the default port for HTTPS (443), it is necessary to specify the used
port in the URL, e.g.
https://server:12345/
Upon a connection to the server, the SSL-VPN interface’s welcome page is displayed localized
to the language set in the browser. If the language defined as preferred is not available, the
English version will be used.
338
Chapter 25
Specific settings and troubleshooting
This chapter provides description of advanced features and specific configurations of the fire-
wall. It also includes helpful guidelines for solving of issues which might occur when you use
WinRoute in your network.
25.1 Configuration Backup and Transfer
If you need to reinstall the firewall’s operating system (e.g. in case of new hardware installa-
tion), you can easily back up your WinRoute configuration including local user accounts and
possibly also SSL certificates. This backup can be later used for recovery of this configuration
in your new installation of WinRoute. This may save significant amount of your time as well as
help you avoid solution of problems you have already figured out.
To export or import configuration, go to the Web Administration (see chapter 3) and click on
the corresponding link right in the welcome page.
Configuration export
Configuration is exported to a .tgz package (the tar archive compressed by gzip) which includes
all the key WinRoute configuration files. Optionally, it is possible to include the web interface’s
VPN server’s and SSL-VPN server’s SSL certificates in the package. Exported configuration does
not include WinRoute license key.
Configuration import
To import configuration, simply browse for or enter the path to the corresponding file which
includes the exported configuration (with the .tgz extension).
If network interfaces have been changed since the export took place (e.g. in case of exchange
of a defective network adapter) or if the configuration is imported from another computer,
WinRoute will attempt to pair the imported network interfaces with the real interfaces on the
machine. This pairing can be customized — you can match each network interface from the
imported configuration with one interface of the firewall or leave it unpaired.
If network interfaces cannot be simply paired, it is desirable to check and possibly edit inter-
face group settings (see chapter 5) and/or traffic rules (see chapter 7) after completion of the
configuration import.
25.2 Configuration files
339
25.2 Configuration files
This chapter provides clear descriptions of WinRoute configuration and status files. This infor-
mation can be helpful for example when troubleshooting specific issues in cooperation with
the Kerio Technologies technical support department.
For backup and recovery of your firewall configuration, it is recommended to use configuration
export and import tools addressed in chapter 25.1!
Configuration files
All WinRoute configuration data is stored in the following files under the same directory where
WinRoute is installed
(the typical path is C:\Program Files\Kerio\WinRoute Firewall).
The following files are included:
winroute.cfg
Chief configuration file
UserDB.cfg
Information about groups and user accounts.
host.cfg
Preferences for backs-up of configuration, user accounts data, DHCP server database, etc.
logs.cfg
Log configurations
Note: The data in these files are saved in XML format so that it can be easily modified by an
advanced user or generated automatically using another application.
Files in the following directories are also considered as configuration data:
dbSSL
An automatically generated SSL certificate generated for traffic between the WinRoute
Firewall Engine and the Administration Console.
For details on traffic between the WinRoute Firewall Engine and the
Administration Console, refer to Kerio Administration Console — Help
(http://www.kerio.com/firewall/manual).
sslcert
SSL certificates for all components using SSL for traffic encryption (i.e. the web interface,
VPN server and the Clientless SSL-VPN interface).
license
If WinRoute has already been registered, the license folder includes a license key file
(including registered trial versions). If WinRoute has not been registered yet, the license
folder is empty.
Chapter 25 Specific settings and troubleshooting
340
Status files
In addition, WinRoute generates other files and directories where certain status information is
saved:
Files:
dnscache.cfg
DNS files stored in the DNS module’s cache (see chapter 8.1).
leases.cfg
IP addresses assigned by the DHCP server.
This file keeps all information available on the Leases tab of the Configuration →DHCP
server section (refer to chapter 8.2).
stats.cfg
Interface statistics (see chapter 20.2) and user statistics (see chapter 20.1) data.
vpnleases.cfg
IP addresses assigned to VPN clients (see chapter 23.2).
Directories:
logs
The logs directory stores all WinRoute logs (see chapter 22).
star
The star directory includes a complete database for statistics of the WinRoute web inter-
face.
Handling configuration files
We recommend that WinRoute Firewall Engine be stopped prior to any manipulation with
the configuration files (backups, recoveries, etc.)! Information contained within these files is
loaded and saved only upon starting or stopping the MailServer. All changes to the configura-
tion performed while the Engine is running are only stored in memory. All modifications done
during Engine performance will be overwritten by the configuration in the system memory
when the Engine is stopped.
25.3 Automatic user authentication using NTLM
WinRoute supports automatic user authentication by the NTLM method (authentication from
Web browsers). Users once authenticated for the domain are not asked for username and
password.
This chapter provides detailed description on conditions and configuration settings for correct
functioning of NTLM.
25.3 Automatic user authentication using NTLM
341
General conditions
The following conditions are applied to this authentication method:
1. WinRoute Firewall Engine is running as a service or it is running under a user account with
administrator rights to the WinRoute host.
2. The server (i.e. the WinRoute host) belongs to a corresponding Windows NT or Active
Directory (Windows 2000/2003/2008) domain.
3. Client host belongs to the domain.
4. User at the client host is required to authenticate to this domain (i.e. local user accounts
cannot be used for this purpose).
5. The NT domain or the Active Directory authentication method (see chapter 15.1) must be
set for the corresponding user account under WinRoute. NTLM cannot be used for users
authenticated only internally inside WinRoute.
WinRoute Configuration
NTLM authentication of users from web browsers must be enabled in Users →Authentica-
tion Options. User authentication should be required when attempting to access web pages,
otherwise enabling NTLM authentication is meaningless.
Figure 25.1 NTLM — user authentication options
Chapter 25 Specific settings and troubleshooting
342
The configuration of the WinRoute’s web interface must include a valid DNS name of the server
on which WinRoute is running (for details, see chapter 11.1).
Figure 25.2 Configuration of WinRoute’s Web Interface
Note: In the Software Appliance / VMware Virtual Appliance edition, the server name is set on
the System Configuration tab (see chapter 16.1).
Web browsers
For proper functioning of NTLM, a browser must be used that supports this method. By now,
the following browsers are suitable:
•Internet Explorer version 5.01 or later
•Firefox or SeaMonkey with the core version Mozilla 1.3 or later
NTLM authentication process
NTLM authentication process differs depending on a browser used.
Internet Explorer
NTLM authentication is performed without user’s interaction.
The login dialog is displayed only if NTLM authentication fails (e.g. when user account
for user authenticated at the client host does not exist in WinRoute).
Warning
One reason of a NTLM authentication failure can be invalid login username or password
saved in the Password Manager in Windows operating systems (Control Panels →User
Accounts →Advanced →Password Manager) applying to the corresponding server (i.e.
the WinRoute host). In such a case, Internet Explorer sends saved login data instead of
NTLM authentication of the user currently logged in. Should any problems regarding
25.4 FTP on WinRoute’s proxy server
343
NTLM authentication arise, it is recommended to remove all usernames/passwords for
the server where WinRoute is installed from the Password Manager.
Firefox/SeaMonkey
The browser displays the login dialog. For security reasons, automatic user authentica-
tion is not used by default in the browser. This behavior of the browser can be changed
by modification of configuration parameters — see below.
If authentication fails and direct connection is applied, the firewall’s login page is opened
automatically (refer to chapter 11.2). The login dialog is displayed if proxy server is used.
Note: If NTLM authentication fails by any reason, details are recorded in the error log (see
chapter 22.8).
Firefox/SeaMonkey configuration
Configuration can be changed to enable automatic NTLM authentication — leaving out the
login dialog. Check the following example:
1. Insert about:config in the browser’s address bar. The list of configuration parameters is
displayed.
2. Set corresponding configuration parameter(s) using the following instructions:
•For direct connection (proxy server is not set in the browser):
Look up the network.automatic-ntlm-auth.trusted-uris parameter. Use
the WinRoute host’s name as a value for this parameter (e.g. server or
server.company.com). This name must match the server name set under Con-
figuration →Advanced Options →Web Interface (see chapter 11.1).
Note: It is not possible to use IP address as a value in this parameter!
•If WinRoute proxy server is used:
Look up the network.automatic-ntlm-auth.allow-proxies parameter and set
its value to true.
Configuration changes are applied right away, i.e. it is not necessary to restart the browser.
25.4 FTP on WinRoute’s proxy server
Proxy server in WinRoute, version 6.0.2 and later (see chapter 8.4), supports FTP. When using
this method of accessing FTP servers, it is necessary to keep in mind specific issues regarding
usage of the proxy technology and parameters of WinRoute’s proxy server.
1. It is necessary that the FTP client allows configuration of the proxy server. This condition
is met for example by web browsers (Internet Explorer,Firefox/SeaMonkey,Opera, etc.),
Total Commander (originally Windows Commander), CuteFTP, etc.
Chapter 25 Specific settings and troubleshooting
344
Terminal FTP clients (such as the ftp command in Windows or Linux) do not allow config-
uration of the proxy server. For this reason, they cannot be used for our purposes.
2. To connect to FTP servers, the proxy server uses the passive FTP mode. If FTP server is
protected by a firewall which does not support FTP (this is not a problem of WinRoute), it
is not possible to use proxy to connect to the server.
3. Setting of FTP mode in the client is irrelevant for usage of the proxy server. Only one
network connection used by the FTP protocol is always established between a client and
the proxy server.
Note: It is recommended to use FTP over proxy server only in cases where it is not possible to
connect directly to the Internet (see chapter 8.4).
Example of a client configuration: web browser
Web browsers allow to set the proxy server either globally or for individual protocols. In our
example, configuration of Internet Explorer 6.0 focused (configuration of any other browsers
is almost identical).
1. In the browser’s main menu, select Tools →Internet Options, open the Connections tab and
click on the LAN Settings option.
2. Enable the Use a proxy server for your LAN option and enter the IP address and port of the
proxy server. IP address of the proxy server is the address of the WinRoute’s host interface
which is connected to the local network; the default port of the proxy server is 3128 (for
details, refer to chapter 8.4). It is also recommended to enable the Bypass proxy server for
local addresses option — using proxy server for local addresses would slow down traffic
and overburden WinRoute.
25.4 FTP on WinRoute’s proxy server
345
Figure 25.3 Configuring proxy server in Internet Explorer 6.0
Hint
To configure web browsers, you can use a configuration script or the automatic detection of
configuration. For details, see chapter 8.4.
Note: Web browsers used as FTP clients enable only to download files. Uploads to FTP server
via web browsers are not supported.
Example of a client configuration: Total Commander
Total Commander allows either single connections to FTP server (by the Net →FTP - New
Connection option available in the main menu) or creating a bookmark for repeated connec-
tions (Net →FTP - Connect). The proxy server must be configured individually for each FTP
connection (or for each bookmark).
1. In the FTP: connection details dialog, enable the Use firewall (proxy server) option and click
Change.
2. In the Firewall settings dialog box, select HTTP Proxy with FTP support. In the Host
name textbox, enter the proxy server’s IP address and port (separated by a colon, e.g.
192.168.1.1:3128). The User name and Password entries are optional (WinRoute does
not use this information).
Chapter 25 Specific settings and troubleshooting
346
Figure 25.4 Setting proxy server for FTP in Total Commander
Hint
The defined proxy server is indexed and saved to the list of proxy servers automatically. Later,
whenever you are creating other FTP connections, you can simply select a corresponding proxy
server in the list.
25.5 Internet links dialed on demand
If an on-demand dial-up link is used (see chapter 6.2), consider specific behavior of this con-
nection type. If the network and/or the firewall are not configured correctly, the link may stay
hung-up even if the local network sends requests for Internet connection or it may be dialed
unintentionally.
Information provided in this chapter should help you understand the principle and behavior
of on-demand dial-ups and avoid such problems.
How demand dial works
First, the function of demand dial must be activated within the appropriate line (either perma-
nently or during a defined time period — see chapter 6.2).
Second, there must be no default gateway in the operating system (no default gateway must
be defined for any network adapter). This condition does not apply to the dial-up line which is
used for the Internet connection — this line will be configured in accordance with information
provided by the ISP.
25.5 Internet links dialed on demand
347
If WinRoute receives a packet from the local network, it will compare it with the system routing
table. If the packets goes out to the Internet, no record will be found, since there is no default
route in the routing table. Under usual circumstances, the packet would be dropped and
a control message informing about unavailability of the target would be sent to the sender. If
no default route is available, WinRoute holds the packet in the cache and dials the appropriate
line if the demand dial function is enabled. This creates an outgoing route in the routing table
via which the packet will be sent.
To avoid undesired dialing of the line, line dialing is allowed by certain packet types only.
The line can be dialed only by UDP or TCP packets with the SYN flag (connection attempts).
Demand dialing is disabled for Microsoft Networks services (sharing of files and printers, etc.).
Since this moment, the default route exists and other packets directed to the Internet will be
routed via a corresponding line. The line may be either disconnected manually or automati-
cally if idle for a certain time period. When the line is hung-up, the default route is removed
from the routing table. Any other packet directed to the Internet redials the line.
Note:
1. To ensure correct functionality of demand dialing there must be no default gateway set
at network adapters. If there is a default gateway at any interface, packets to the Inter-
net would be routed via this interface (no matter where it is actually connected to) and
WinRoute would not dial the line.
2. Only one link can be set for on-demand dialing in WinRoute.WinRoute does not enable
automatic selection of a line to be dialed.
3. Lines can be also dialed if this is defined by a static route in the routing table (refer to
chapter 18.1). If a static route via the dial-up is defined, the packet matching this route
will dial the line. This line will not be used as the default route — the Use default gateway
on remote network option in the dial-up definition will be ignored.
4. According to the factors that affect total time since receiving the request until the line
is dialed (i.e. line speed, time needed to dial the line, etc.) the client might consider
the destination server unavailable (if the timeout expires) before a successful connection
attempt. However, WinRoute always finishes dial attempts. In such cases, simply repeat
the request, i.e. with the Refresh button in your browser.
Technical Peculiarities and Limitations
Demand dialing has its peculiarities and limitations. The limitations should be considered
especially within designing and configuration of the network that will use WinRoute for con-
nection and of the dial-up connected to the Internet.
1. Demand dial cannot be performed directly from the host where WinRoute is installed
because it is initiated by WinRoute low-lever driver. This driver holds packets and decides
whether the line should be dialed or not. If the line is disconnected and a packet is sent
Chapter 25 Specific settings and troubleshooting
348
from the local host to the Internet, the packet will be dropped by the operating system
before the WinRoute driver is able to capture it.
2. Typically the server is represented by the DNS name within traffic between clients and an
Internet server. Therefore, the first packet sent by a client is represented by the DNS query
that is intended to resolve a host name to an IP address.
In this example, the DNS server is the WinRoute host (this is very common) and the Internet
line is disconnected. A client’s request on this DNS server is traffic within the local network
and, therefore, it will not result in dialing the line. If the DNS server does not have the
appropriate entry in the cache , it must forward the request to another server on the
Internet. The packet is forwarded to the Internet by the local DNS client that is run at
the WinRoute host. This packet cannot be held and it will not cause dialing of the line.
Therefore, the DNS request cannot be answered and the traffic cannot continue.
For these reasons, the WinRoute’s DNS module enables automatic dialing (if the DNS server
cannot respond to the request itself). This feature is bound to on-demand dialing.
Note: If the DNS server is located on another host within the local network or clients
within the local network use an Internet DNS server, then the limitation is irrelevant and
the dialing will be available. If clients’ DNS server is located on the Internet, the line will
be dialed upon a client’s DNS query. If a local DNS server is used, the line will be dialed
upon a query sent by this server to the Internet (the default gateway of the host where the
DNS server is running must be set to the IP address of the WinRoute host).
3. It can be easily understood through the last point that if the DNS server is to be running
at the WinRoute host, it must be represented by the DNS module because it can dial the
line if necessary.
If there is a domain based on Active Directory in the LAN (domain server with Windows
Server 2000/2003/2008), it is necessary to use Microsoft DNS server, because communica-
tion with Active Directory uses special types of DNS request. Microsoft DNS server does
not support automatic dialing. Moreover, it cannot be used at the same host as the DNS
module as it would cause collision of ports.
As understood from the facts above, if the Internet connection is to be available via dial-
up, WinRoute cannot be used at the same host where Windows Server with Active Directory
and Microsoft DNS are running.
4. If the DNS module is used, WinRoute can dial as a response to a client’s request if the
following conditions are met:
•Destination server must be defined by DNS name so that the application can create
a DNS query.
•In the operating system, set the primary DNS server to the IP address of the fire-
wall). In Windows, go to TCP/IP properties in interfaces connected to the LAN and
set the IP address of this interface as the primary DNS server.
25.5 Internet links dialed on demand
349
5. The Proxy server in WinRoute (see chapter 8.4) also provides direct dial-up connections.
A special page providing information on the connection process is opened (the page is
refreshed in short periods). Upon a successful connection, the browser is redirected to
the specified Website.
Unintentionally dialed link — application of on-demand dial rules
Demand dial functions may cause unintentional dialing. It’s usually caused by DNS requests
which cannot be responded by the DNS module and so it dials the line instead to forward them
to another DNS server. The following causes apply:
•User host generates a DNS query in the absence of the user. This traffic attempt may be
an active object at a local HTML page or automatic update of an installed application.
•The DNS module performs dialing in response to requests of names of local hosts.
Define DNS for the local domain properly (use the hosts system file of the WinRoute
host — for details, see chapter 8.1).
Note: Undesirable traffic causing unintentional dialing of a link can be blocked by WinRoute
traffic rules (see chapter 7.3). However, the best remedy for any pain is always removal of its
cause (e.g. perform antivirus check on the corresponding workstation, etc.).
To avoid unintentional dialing based on DNS requests, WinRoute allows definition of rules
where DNS names are specified for which the line can be dialed or not. To define these rules,
click on Advanced in Configuration→Interfaces (in the A Single Internet Link — Dial on De-
mand mode).
Figure 25.5 Dial on demand rules (for dialing based on DNS queries)
Either full DNS name or only its end or beginning completed by an asterisk (*) can be specified
in the rule. An asterisk may stand for any number of characters.
Rules are ordered in a list which is processed from the top downwards (rules order can be
modified with the arrow buttons at the right side of the window). When the system detects the
first rule that meets all requirements, the desired action is executed and the search is stopped.
Chapter 25 Specific settings and troubleshooting
350
All DNS names missing a suitable rule will be dialed automatically by the DNS module when
demanded.
In Actions for DNS name, you can select either the Dial or the Ignore option. Use the second
option to block dialing of the line in response to a request for this DNS name. The Dial action
can be used to create complex rule combinations. For example, dial can be permitted for one
name within the domain and denied for the others (see figure 25.5).
Dial of local DNS names
Local DNS names are names of hosts within the domain (names that do not include a do-
main).
Example:
The local domain’s name is company.com. The host is called pc1. The full name of the
host is pc1.company.com whereas local name in this domain is pc1.
Local names are usually stored in the database of the local DNS server (in this example,
the names are stored in the hosts file at the WinRoute host that uses the DNS module).
Set by default, the DNS module does not dial these names as names are considered non-
existent unless they can be found in the local DNS database.
If the primary server of the local domain is located outside of the local network, it is
necessary that the DNS module also dials the line if requests come from these names.
Activate the Enable dialing for local DNS names option in the Other settings tab to enable
this (at the top of the Dial On Demand dialog window). In other cases, it is recommended
to leave the option disabled (again, the line can be dialed undesirably).
351
Chapter 26
Technical support
Free email and telephone technical support is provided for Kerio WinRoute Firewall. Contacts
and more information can be found at http://www.kerio.com/support. Our technical sup-
port staff is ready to help you with any problem you might have.
You can also solve many problems alone (and sometimes even faster). Before you contact our
technical support, please take the following steps:
•Try to look up the answer in this manual. Individual chapters describe features and
parameters of WinRoute components in detail.
•If you have not found answers here, try to find them at our website, under
Technical Support.
If you have not find answers to all your questions and you still intend to contact our technical
support, read through the following section which will provide you with a few guidelines.
26.1 Essential Information
To send a request to our technical support, use the contact form at
http://support.kerio.com/.
To be able to help you solve your problems the best and in the shortest possible time our tech-
nical support will require your configuration data and as clear information on your problem
as possible. Please specify at least the following information:
Description
Clearly describe your problem. Provide as much information on the problem as possible (i.e.
whether the issue arose after you had installed a new product version, after an upgrade, etc.).
Informational File
You can use the Administration Console to create a text file including your WinRoute configu-
ration data. Take the following steps to generate the file:
•Run WinRoute Firewall Engine and connect to it through the Administration Console.
•If you use dial-up, connect to the Internet.
•In the Administration Console use the Ctrl+S keys.
The text file will be stored in the home directory of the logged user.
(e.g. C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator)
Chapter 26 Technical support
352
as kerio_support_info.txt.
Note: The kerio_support_info.txt is generated by the Administration Console. This implies
that in case you connect to the administration remotely, this file will be stored on the computer
from which you connect to the WinRoute administration (not on the computer/server where
the WinRoute Firewall Engine is running).
Error Log Files
In the directory where WinRoute is installed
(the typical path is C:\Program Files\Kerio\WinRoute Firewall)
the logs subdirectory is created. There you can find files error.log and warning.log. At-
tach these two files to your email to our technical support.
License type and license number
Please specify whether you have purchased any WinRoute license or if you use the trial version.
Requirements of owners of valid licenses are always preferred.
26.2 Tested in Beta version
As to increase quality of our products, Kerio Technologies releases essential versions of our
products as so called beta versions. Beta versions are product versions which include all
projected new features, however, these functions and the product itself are still under devel-
opment. Volunteers can test these versions and provide us with feedback to help us improve
the product and fix bugs.
The feedback from beta testers is essential for the product’s development. Therefore,
WinRoute beta versions include extensions and modules helping testers communicate
smoothly with Kerio Technologies.
For details on beta versions and their testing, refer to http://www.kerio.com/betas.
353
Appendix A
Legal Notices
Microsoft,Windows,Windows NT,Windows Vista,Internet Explorer,ActiveX, and Active
Directoryare registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Mac OSand Safariare registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Linuxis registered trademark kept by Linus Torvalds.
Mozillaand Firefoxare registered trademarks of Mozilla Foundation.
KerberosTM is trademark of Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Other names of real companies and products mentioned in this document may be registered
trademarks or trademarks of their owners.
354
Appendix B
Used open source items
Kerio WinRoute Firewall contains the following open-source software (open source):
bindlib
Copyright 1983, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Portions Copyright 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.
Firebird
This software embeds modified version of Firebird database engine distributed under
terms of IPL and IDPL licenses.
All copyright retained by individual contributors — original code Copyright 2000 In-
prise Corporation.
The original source code is available at:
http://www.firebirdsql.org/
h323plus
This product includes unmodified version of the h323plus library distributed under
Mozilla Public License (MPL).
The original source code is available at:
http://h323plus.org/
KIPF — driver
Kerio IP filter driver for Linux (WinRoute’s network interface for Linux):
Copyright Kerio Technologies s.r.o.
Homepage: http://www.kerio.com/
Kerio IP filter driver for Linux is distributed and licensed under GPL version 2.
The complete source code is available at:
http://download.kerio.com/dwn/libkipf.tgz
KIPF — API
Kerio IP filter driver for Linux (API library of the WinRoute’s network interface for Linux)
Copyright Kerio Technologies s.r.o.
Homepage: http://www.kerio.com/
Kerio IP filter driver for Linux API library is distributed and licensed under LGPL version 2.
The complete source code is available at:
http://download.kerio.com/dwn/libkipf.tgz
355
KVNET — driver
Kerio Virtual Network Interface driver for Linux (driver for the Kerio VPN virtual network
adapter)
Copyright Kerio Technologies s.r.o.
Homepage: http://www.kerio.com/
Kerio Virtual Network Interface driver for Linux is distributed and licensed under GPL
version 2.
The complete source code is available at:
http://download.kerio.com/dwn/libkvnet.tgz
KVNET — API
Kerio Virtual Network Interface driver for Linux API library (API library for the driver of
the Kerio VPN virtual network adapter)
Copyright Kerio Technologies s.r.o.
Homepage: http://www.kerio.com/
Kerio Virtual Network Interface driver for Linux API library is distributed and licensed
under LGPL version 2.
The complete source code is available at:
http://download.kerio.com/dwn/libkvnet.tgz
libcurl
Copyright 1996-2008 Daniel Stenberg.
libiconv
libiconv converts from one character encoding to another through Unicode conversion.
WinRoute include a modified version of this library distributed upon the LGPL license in
version 3.
Copyright 1999-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Bruno Haible
Homepage: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv/
Complete source code of the customized version of libiconv library is available at:
http://download.kerio.com/dwn/kwf-iconv.zip
libxml2
Copyright 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved.
Copyright 2000 Bjorn Reese and Daniel Veillard.
Copyright 2000 Gary Pennington and Daniel Veillard
Copyright 1998 Bjorn Reese and Daniel Stenberg.
OpenSSL
This product contains software developed by OpenSSL Project designed for OpenSSL
Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young.
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson.
Appendix B Used open source items
356
PHP
Copyright 1999-2006 The PHP Group. All rights reserved.
This product includes PHP software available for free at:
http://www.php.net/software/
php_mbstring
Copyright 2001-2004 The PHP Group.
Copyright 1998-2002 HappySize, Inc. All rights reserved.
Prototype
Framework in JavaScript.
Copyright Sam Stephenson.
The Prototype library is freely distributable under the terms of a MIT license.
For details, see the Prototype website: http://www.prototypejs.org/
ptlib
This product includes unmodified version of the ptlib library distributed under Mozilla
Public License (MPL).
The original source code is available at:
http://h323plus.org/
zlib
Copyright Jean-Loup Gailly and Mark Adler.
357
Glossary of terms
ActiveX
This Microsoft’s proprietary technology is used for creation of dynamic objects for web
pages. This technology provides many features, such as writing to disk or execution of
commands at the client (i.e. on the host where the Web page is opened). This technology
provides a wide range of features, such as saving to disk and running commands at the
client (i.e. at the computer where the Web page is opened). Using ActiveX, virus and
worms can for example modify telephone number of the dial-up.
ActiveX is supported only by Internet Explorer in Microsoft Windows operating systems.
Cluster
A group of two or more workstations representing one virtual host (server). Requests
to the virtual server are distributed among individual hosts in the cluster, in accordance
with a defined algorithm. Clusters empower performance and increase reliability (in case
of dropout of one computer in the cluster, the virtual server keeps running).
Connections
A virtual bidirectional communication channel between two hosts.
See also TCP
DDNS
DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name System) is DNS with the feature of automatic update of
records.
Default gateway
A network device or a host where so called default path is located (the path to the Inter-
net). To the address of the default gateway such packets are sent that include destination
addresses which do not belong to any network connected directly to the host and to any
network which is recorded in the system routing table.
In the system routing table, the default gateway is shown as a path to the destination
network 0.0.0.0 with the subnet mask 0.0.0.0.
Note: Although in Windows the default gateway is configured in settings of the network
interface, it is used for the entire operating system.
DHCP
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Serves automatic IP configuration of com-
puters in the network. IP addresses are assigned from a scope. Besides IP addresses,
other parameters can be associated with client hosts, such as the default gateway ad-
dress, DNS server address, local domain name, etc.
Glossary of terms
358
DMZ
DMZ (demilitarized zone) is a reserved network area where services available both from
the Internet and from the LAN are run (e.g. a company’s public web server). DMZ provides
an area, where servers accessible for public are be located separately, so they cannot be
misused for cracking into the LAN.
More information can be found for example at Wikipedia.
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) A worldwide distributed database of Internet hostnames and
their associated IP address. Computers use Domain Name Servers to resolve host names
to IP addresses. Names are sorted in hierarchized domains.
Firewall
Software or hardware device that protects a computer or computer network against at-
tacks from external sources (typically from the Internet).
In this guide, the word firewall represents the WinRoute host.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol. The FTP protocol uses two types of TCP connection: control and
data. The control connection is always established by a client. Two FTP modes are distin-
guished according to a method how connection is established:
•active mode — data connection is established from the server to a client (to the
port specified by the client). This mode is suitable for cases where the firewall
is at the server’s side, however, it is not supported by some clients (e.g. by web
browsers).
•passive mode — data connection is established also by the client (to the port
required by the server). This mode is suitable for cases where the firewall is at
the client’s side. It should be supported by any FTP client.
Note: WinRoute includes special support (protocol inspector) for FTP protocol. Therefore,
both FTP modes can be used on LAN hosts.
Gateway
Network device or a computer connecting two different subnets. If traffic to all the other
(not specified) networks is routed through a gateway, it is called the default gateway.
See also default gateway.
Greylisting
A method of protection of SMTP servers from spam. If an email message sent by an
unknown sender is delivered to the server, the server rejects it for the first time (so called
temporary delivery error). Legitimate senders attempt resend the message after some
time. SMTP server lets the message in and considers the sender as trustworthy since
then, not blocking their messages any longer. Most spam senders try to send as great
volume in as short time as possible and stay anonymous. Therefore, they usually do not
repeat sending the message and focus on another SMTP server.
More information (in English) can be found for example at Wikipedia.
359
Ident
The Ident protocol is used for identification of user who established certain TCP connec-
tion from a particular (multi-user) system. TheIdent service is used for example by IRC
servers, FTP servers and other services.
More information (in English) can be found for example at Wikipedia.
IMAP
Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) enables clients to manage messages stored on
a mail server without downloading them to a local computer. This architecture allows the
user to access his/her mail from multiple locations (messages downloaded to a local host
disk would not be available from other locations).
IP address
IP address is a unique 32-bit number used to identify the host in the Internet. It is spec-
ified by numbers of the decimal system (0-255) separated by dots (e.g. 195.129.33.1).
Each packet contains information about where it was sent from (source IP address) and
to which address it is to be delivered (destination IP address).
IPSec
IPsec (IP Security Protocol) is an extended IP protocol which enables secure data transfer.
It provides services similar to SSL/TLS, however, these services are provided on a network
layer. IPSec can be used for creation of encrypted tunnels between networks (VPN) — so
called tunnel mode, or for encryption of traffic between two hosts— so called transport
mode.
Kerberos
Kerberos is a system used for secure user authentication in network environments. It was
developed at the MIT university and it is a standard protocol used for user authentication
under Windows 2000/2003/2008. Users use their passwords to authenticate to the central
server (KDC, Key Distribution Center) and the server sends them encrypted tickets which
can be used to authenticate to various services in the network. In case of the Windows
2000/2003/2008 domains, function of KDC is provided by the particular domain server.
LDAP
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) is an Internet protocol used to access di-
rectory services. Information about user accounts and user rights, about hosts included
in the network, etc. are stored in the directories.
NAT
NAT (Network Address Translation ) stands for substitution of IP addresses in packets
passing through the firewall:
•source address translation (Source NAT, SNAT) — in packets going from local
networks to the Internet source (private) IP addresses are substituted with the
external (public) firewall address. Each packet sent from the local network is
recorded in the NAT table. If any packet incoming from the Internet matches
with a record included in this table, its destination IP address will be substituted
by the IP address of the appropriate host within the local network and the packet
Glossary of terms
360
will be redirected to this host. Packets that do not match with any record in the
NAT table will be dropped.
•destination address translation (Destination NAT, DNAT, it is also called port
mapping) — is used to enable services in the local network from the Internet. If
any packet incoming from the Internet meets certain requirements, its IP address
will be substituted by the IP address of the local host where the service is running
and the packet is sent to this host.
The NAT technology enables connection from local networks to the Internet using a single
IP address. All hosts within the local network can access the Internet directly as if they
were on a public network (certain limitations are applied). Services running on local hosts
can be mapped to the public IP address.
Detailed description (in English) can be found for example at Wikipedia.
Network adapter
The equipment that connects hosts to a traffic medium. It can be represented by an
Ethernet adapter, TokenRing adapter, by a modem, etc. Network adapters are used by
hosts to send and receive packets. They are also referred to throughout this document
as a network interface.
P2P network
Peer-to-Peer (P2P) networks are world-wide distributed systems, where each node can
represent both a client and a server. These networks are used for sharing of big volumes
of data (this sharing is mostly illegal). DirectConnect and Kazaa are the most popular
ones.
Packet
Basic data unit transmitted via computer networks. Packets consist of a header which
include essential data (i.e. source and destination IP address, protocol type, etc.) and of
the data body,. Data transmitted via networks is divided into small segments, or packets.
If an error is detected in any packet or a packet is lost, it is not necessary to repeat the
entire transmission process, only the particular packet will be re-sent.
Policy routing
Advanced routing technology using additional information apart from IP addresses, such
as source IP address, protocols etc.
See also routing table.
POP3
Post Office Protocol is an email accessing protocol that allows users to download mes-
sages from a server to a local disk. It is suitable for clients who don’t have a permanent
connection to the Internet.
Port
16-bit number (1-65535) used by TCP and UDP for application (services) identification on
a given computer. More than one application can be run at a host simultaneously (e.g.
WWW server, mail client, FTP client, etc.). Each application is identified by a port number.
361
Ports 1-1023 are reserved and used by well known services (e.g. 80 = WWW). Ports above
1023 can be freely used by any application.
PPTP
Microsoft’s proprietary protocol used for design of virtual private networks.
See chapters and sections concerning VPN.
Private IP addresses
Local networks which do not belong to the Internet (private networks) use reserved ranges
of IP addresses (private addresses). These addresses cannot be used in the Internet. This
implies that IP ranges for local networks cannot collide with IP addresses used in the
Internet.
The following IP ranges are reserved for private networks:
•10.0.0.0/255.0.0.0
•172.16.0.0/255.240.0.0
•192.168.0.0/255.255.0.0
Protocol inspector
WinRoute’s subroutine, which is able to monitor communication using application pro-
tocols (e.g. HTTP, FTP, MMS, etc.). Protocol inspection is used to check proper syntax
of corresponding protocols (mistakes might indicate an intrusion attempt), to ensure its
proper functionality while passing through the firewall (e.g. FTP in the active mode, when
data connection to a client is established by a server) and to filter traffic by the corre-
sponding protocol (e.g. limited access to Web pages classified by URLs, anti-virus check
of downloaded objects, etc.).
Unless traffic rules are set to follow a different policy, each protocol inspector is auto-
matically applied to all connections of the relevant protocol that are processed through
WinRoute.
Proxy server
Older, but still wide-spread method of Internet connection sharing. Proxy servers connect
clients and destination servers.
A proxy server works as an application and it is adapted for several particular application
protocols (i.e. HTTP, FTP, Gopher, etc.). It requires also support in the corresponding
client application (e.g. web browser). Compared to NAT, the range of featured offered is
not so wide.
Router
A computer or device with one or more network interfaces between which it handles
packets by following specific rules (so called routes). The router’s goal is to forward
packets only to the destination network, i.e. to the network which will use another router
which would handle it on. This saves other networks from being overloaded by packets
targeting another network.
See also routing table.
Glossary of terms
362
Routing table
The information used by routers when making packet forwarding decisions (so called
routes). Packets are routed according to the packet’s destination IP address. On Windows,
routing table can be printed by the route print command, while on Unix systems (Linux,
Mac OS X, etc.) by the route command.
Script
A code that is run on the Web page by a client (Web browser). Scripts are used for
generating of dynamic elements on Web pages. However, they can be misused for ads,
exploiting of user information, etc. Modern Web browsers usually support several script
languages, such as JavaScript and Visual Basic Script (VBScript).
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used for sending email between mail servers. The SMTP
envelope identifies the sender/recipient of an email.
Spam
Undesirable email message, usually containing advertisements.
Spoofing
Spoofing means using false IP addresses in packets. This method is used by attackers to
make recipients assume that the packet is coming from a trustworthy IP address.
SSL
SSL is a protocol used to secure and encrypt network communication. SSL was origi-
nally designed in order to guarantee secure transfer of Web pages over HTTP protocol.
Nowadays, it is used by almost all standard Internet protocols (SMTP, POP3, IMAP, LDAP,
etc.).
At the beginning of communication, an encryption key is requested and transferred using
asymmetrical encryption. This key is then used to encrypt (symmetrically) the data.
Subnet mask
Subnet mask divides an IP address in two parts: network mask and an address of a host
in the network. Mask have the same form as IP addresses (i.e. 255.255.255.0), however,
its value is needed to be understood as a 32-bit number with certain number of ones on
the left end and zeros as the rest. The mask cannot have an arbitrary value. Number one
in a subnet mask represents a bit of the network address and zero stands for a host’s
address bit. All hosts within a particular subnet must have identical subnet mask and
network part of IP address.
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol is a transmission protocol which ensures reliable and se-
quential data delivery. It establishes so called virtual connections and provides tools for
error correction and data stream control. It is used by most of applications protocols
which require reliable transmission of all data, such as HTTP,FTP,SMTP,IMAP, etc.
TCP protocol uses the following special control information — so called flags:
•SYN (Synchronize) — connection initiation (first packet in each connection)
•ACK (Acknowledgement) — acknowledgement of received data
363
•RST (Reset) — request on termination of a current connection and on initiation
of a new one
•URG (Urgent) — urgent packet
•PSH (Push) — request on immediate transmission of the data to upper TCP/IP
layers
•FIN (Finalize) — connection finalization
TCP/IP
Name used for all traffic protocols used in the Internet (i.e. for IP, ICMP, TCP, UDP, etc.).
TCP/IP does not stand for any particular protocol!
TLS
Transport Layer Security. New version of SSL protocol. This version is approved by the
IETF and it is accepted by all the top IT companies (i.e. Microsoft Corporation).
UDP
User Datagram Protocol is a transmission protocol which transfers data through individ-
ual messages (so called datagrams). It does not establish new connections nor it provides
reliable and sequential data delivery, nor it enables error correction or data stream con-
trol. It is used for transfer of small-sized data (i.e. DNS queries) or for transmissions
where speed is preferred from reliability (i.e. realtime audio and video files transmis-
sion).
VPN
Virtual Private Network, VPN represents secure interconnection of private networks (i.e.
of individual offices of an organization) via the Internet. Traffic between both networks
(so called tunnel) is encrypted. This protects networks from tapping. VPN incorpo-
rates special tunneling protocols, such as PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) and
Microsoft’s IPSec.
WinRoute contains a proprietary VPN implementation called Kerio VPN.
WINS
The WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) service is used for resolution of hostnames to
IP addresses within Microsoft Windows networks.
364
Index
A
Active Directory 196
domain mapping 204
import of user accounts 203
mapping of other domains 208
administration 27
remote 18,215
Administration Console 27
columns 31
views setup 31
alerts 243
overview 246
settings 243
templates 245
anti-spoofing 222
antivirus check 11,167
conditions 167
external antivirus 170
file size limits 171
HTTP and FTP 172
McAfee 168
protocols 171
rules for file scanning 174
settings 168
SMTP and POP3 176
B
bandwidth limiter 130
configuration 130
detection principle 135
beta version 352
BOOTP 118
C
cache
directory 125
DNS 105
size 126
URL exceptions 127
certificate
SSL-VPN 336
VPN server 286
Web Interface 144
Clientless SSL-VPN 335
antivirus check 337
certificate 336
configuration 336
deployment 337
port 336
traffic rule 337
user right 198,213
configuration files 339
manipulation 340
conflict
port 10
software 10
system services 15
connection failover 62
D
DDNS 119
DHCP 110
default options 111
IP scopes 111
lease reservations 115
leases 116
dial-up
dialing scripts 61
hangup if idle 61
dial on demand 57,346
unintentional dialing 349
DNS 104
DNS
DNS Forwarder 104
forwarding rules 108
hosts file 106
365
local domain 107
dynamic DNS 119
F
FTP 147,186,343
filtering rules 162
full cone NAT 87
G
groups
interface throughput charts 47
IP address 180
of forbidden words 160
URL 187
user groups 190,196,210
H
H.323 186
hairpinning 102
HTTP 147
cache 124
content rating 154
filtering by words 158
logging of requests 154
proxy server 121
URL Rules 148
I
import
user accounts 203
installation 11
interface throughput charts 47
anti-spoofing 222
Dial-In 48
groups 47
Internet connection 53
back-up 62
dial on demand 57,346
leased line 54
load balancing 66
unintentional dialing 349
IPSec 87
K
Kerberos 196
Kerio Administration Console 23
Kerio Web Filter 154
deployment 156
parameters configuration 155
website categories 156
L
language
Administration Console 28
of alerts 246
Web Administration 28
license 32
expiration 43
information 33
license key 32
license types 32
number of users 33
optional components 32
user counter 45
license key 43
load balancing 66
optimization 97
reserved link 96
localizations
Administration Console 28
of alerts 246
Web Administration 28
log 262
alert 269
config 269
connection 270
debug 271
dial 273
error 275
filter 276
http 277
security 278
settings 262
sslvpn 280
warning 280
web 281
Index
366
M
media hairpinning 102
multihoming 93
N
NAT 84,90
full cone NAT 87,101
NT domain
import of user accounts 203
NTLM 138,139
configuration of web browsers 343
deployment 340
WinRoute configuration 341
P
P2P Eliminator 218
Peer-to-Peer (P2P) networks 218
allow 198,213
deny 218
detection 235
ports 220
speed limit 218
policy routing 95
port
SSL-VPN 336
port mapping 74,88,91
probe hosts 65,70
product registration 32
protocol inspector 89,185,186
retirement 99
proxy server 121,343
parent 123
Q
Quick Setup 7
quota
settings 256
speed limit 130
R
ranges
time 181,182
RAS 118
registration
at the Kerio website 43
of purchased product 39
trial version 36
relay SMTP server 229
routing table 224
static routes 225
S
services 82,183
SIP 186
SSL-VPN 335
antivirus check 337
certificate 336
configuration 336
deployment 337
port 336
traffic rule 337
user right 198,213
StaR 254
conditions for statistics 255
enable/disable gathering of statistic data
254
overview 259
settings 256
statistics 248
conditions for statistics 255
interface throughput charts 250
in the Web interface 254
Kerio StaR 254
monitoring 254
overview 259
settings 256
user groups 248
status information 231
active hosts 231
connections 238
subscription
expiration 43
Syslog 264
system requirements 11
T
technical support 351
367
traffic policy 71
created by wizard 75
default rule 77
definition 78
exceptions 95
Internet access limiting 94
wizard 71
transparent proxy 124
Trial ID 37
TTL 125,128
U
uninstallation 19
update
antivirus 168
WinRoute 216
upgrade 13,19
automatic update 216
UPnP
settings 227
system services 16
user accounts 190
definition 191
domain mapping 204
in traffic rules 98
local 192,193
mapped 192
templates 192,195
user authentication 137
authentication methods 195
automatic login 201
configuration 138
V
VPN 283
client 198,213,289
configuration example 297
Kerio Clientless SSL-VPN 335
Kerio VPN 283
routing 296
server 48,284
SSL certificate 286
tunnel 291
VPN client 289
DNS 286
routing 288
static IP address 202
WINS 288
VPN tunnel 291
configuration 291
DNS 293
routing 293
traffic policy 295
W
Web Interface 141
Web interface
automatic configuration 123
configuration script 124
Web Interface
parameters configuration 141
ports 143
SSL certificate 144
user authentication 146
Windows
Internet Connection Sharing 15,16
security center 17
Windows Firewall 15,16
WinRoute Engine Monitor 23,24
WinRoute Firewall Engine 23
wizard
configuration 17
traffic rules 71
368

Navigation menu